Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Plans
PROJECT MANUAL FOR j EWD MAR 6 2013 CM O DNIQ'pN BUILDIN Westside Christian High School Addition/Remodel 8200 SW Pfaffle Street Tigard, OR 97223 Building Addition & Remodel Package February 21 , 2013 P—c -c - City of Tigard A. .r.v:d Plans By � 2" Date L , ez ) OFFICE COPY IBI GROUP Dull Olson Weekes - IBI Group Architects Inc. SET NO . PROJECT MANUAL FOR: Westside Christian High School Addition/Remodel for (OWNER) Westside Christian High School 4565 Carman Drive Lake Oswego, OR 97035 (ARCHITECT) Dull Olson Weekes - IBI Group Architects 907 SW Stark Street Portland, OR 97205 503 226-6950 1933 1 NORMAN R. DULL PORTLAND, OREGO (zt OF February 21 ,2013 SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 01 10 Table of Contents 00 31 00 Available Project Information SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Summary 01 23 00 Alternates DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete 03 37 13 Shotcrete 03 47 13 Tilt-Up Concrete DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY 04 20 00 Unit Masonry 04 72 00 Cast Stone Masonry DIVISION 05 -- METALS 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing 05 31 00 Steel Decking 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06 --WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry 06 41 00 Architectural Wood Casework 06 64 00 Plastic Paneling DIVISION 07 --THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing 07 19 00 Water Repellents 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels 07 54 00 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 90 05 Joint Sealers DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 08 31 00 Access Doors and Panels 08 33 26 Overhead Coiling Grilles 08 34 73 Sound Control Door Assemblies 08 36 13 Sectional Doors 08 43 13 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 08 63 00 Metal-Framed Skylights Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 00 01 10 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 71 01 Hardware Schedule 08 80 00 Glazing 08 83 00 Mirrors DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES 09 00 01 Finish Legend 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 30 00 Tiling 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings 09 64 66 Wood Athletic Flooring 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting 09 84 00 Acoustic Room Components 09 90 00 Painting and Coating 09 96 00 High-Performance Coatings 09 96 53 Elastomeric Coatings DIVISION 10 --SPECIALTIES 10 11 01 Visual Display Boards 10 11 43 Tackable Wall Surfaces 10 14 00 Signage 10 14 01 Signage Schedule 10 21 13.19 Plastic Toilet Compartments 10 26 01 Wall and Corner Guards 10 28 00 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 10 51 00 Lockers DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT 11 31 00 Residential Appliances 11 52 13 Projection Screens 11 66 23 Gymnasium Equipment DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS 12 21 13 Horizontal Louver Blinds 12 24 13 Roller Window Shades 12 24 14 Motorized Window Shades 12 48 13 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames 12 66 13 Telescoping Bleachers DIVISION 13 --SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) DIVISION 14--CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 00 01 10 -2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 00 31 00 AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION SECTION 00 31 00 AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Certain information relating to existing surface and subsurface conditions and structures is available to bidders but will not be part of the Contract Documents, as follows: B. Site and Utility Survey: 1. A copy of a topographic survey with respect to the project site is included with the Drawings for information only and is not to be considered a part of the Contract Documents. a. Title: Existing Development b. Date: May 18, 2011 c. Prepared by: Michael R. Gates, #2449 2. This survey identifies grade elevations prepared primarily for the use of Architect in establishing new grades and identifying natural water shed. 3. The Owner does not warrant the correctness of the topographic survey or of any interpretation, deduction, or conclusion given relative to the information contained therein. 4. This survey identifies conditions of existing construction prepared primarily for the use of Architect in establishing the extent of the new versus existing work. 5. The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. 6. Verify all information shown. C. Geotechnical Report: 1. A copy of a geotechnical report with respect to the building site is available for viewing for information only and is not to be considered a part of the Contract Documents: a. Title: Report of Geotechnical Engineering Services b. Date: October 3, 2005 c. Prepared by: GeoDesign Inc. Scott V. Mills, Engineer 2. A copy of a letter with respect to the building site is available for viewing for information only and not to be considered a part of the Contract Documents: a. Title Site-Specific Seismic Hazard Evaluation b. Date: February 7, 2012 c. Prepared by: GeoDesign Inc. Brett A Shipton Engineer 3. This report identifies properties of below grade conditions and offers recommendations for the design of foundations, prepared primarily for the use of Architect. 4. The recommendations described shall not be construed as a requirement of this Contract. 5. This report, by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist on the site. Should subsurface conditions be found to vary substantially from this report, changes in the design and construction of foundations will be made, with resulting credits or expenditures to the Contract Sum accruing to Owner. 6. The Owner does not warrant the correctness of the subsurface investigation report or of any interpretation, deduction, or conclusion given in the report relative to subsoil conditions. D. Phase I & II Environmental Site Assessments: 1. A copy of two Environmental Site Assessments with respect to the building and building site are available for viewing for information only and is not to be considered a part of the Contract Documents: a. Title: Phase I Environmental Site Assessment- GM Training Center, #01-1057A-474 b. Date: August 232, 1999 c. Prepared by: Enecotech, Inc, Jeiiey M. Citrone, National Program Manager d. Title: Phase II Environmental Site Assessment and Asbestos Survey- GM Training Center#01-1057A-474 Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 00 31 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 00 31 00 AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION e. Date: December 20, 1999 f. Prepared by: Enecotech, Inc, Jeffrey M. Citrone, National Program Manager 2. This report identifies properties of below grade conditions of a former leach field, underground tanks and components for hydraulic lifts and suspect asbestos-containing building materials were identified. 3. he recommendations described shall not be construed as a requirement of this Contract. 4. This report, by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist on the site or in the building. Should conditions be found to vary substantially from this report, the Owner is to be notified and a determination on how to proceed will be made by the Owner. Based on direction given by the Owner any resulting credits or expenditures to the Contract Sum will accrue to the Owner. 5. The Owner does not warrant the correctness of the investigation report or of any interpretation, deduction, or conclusion given in the report relative to existing conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 00 31 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. General Requirements. B. Work Covered by Contract Documents. C. Delegated Design Requirements. D. Contractor Use of Premises. E. Related Work by Owner or Others. F. Owner Furnished Products. G. Work by Owner 1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. TIME OF COMPLETION 1. The work of this Contract shall be commenced on the date of written notice to proceed and shall be completed by the dates established in the Owner/Contractor Agreement. B. ASBESTOS FREE CERTIFICATION 1. Absolutely no materials containing asbestos are to be furnished or installed as part of this Project. Ensure that no subcontractor or any of the Contractor's own forces installs any materials containing asbestos. At final closeout of the Project, provide to the Owner certification that no materials containing asbestos have been installed in the Project, and that the Project is asbestos-free as required by the State of Oregon. C. COORDINATION 1. The Contractor is responsible for overall coordination of the Project. 2. The Drawings and Specifications are arranged for convenience only and do not necessarily determine which trades perform the various portions of the Work. 3. Coordinate sequence of work to accommodate agreed-upon Owner occupancy. 4. Perform all necessary work to receive and/or join the work of all trades. 5. Verify location of existing utilities and protect from damage. D. REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACTOR, SUBCONTRACTORS, AND MATERIAL SUPPLIERS 1. Ensure that all persons performing the Work comply with Owner's tobacco policy. Copies made available upon request. 2. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, ensure by appropriate provision in each subcontract agreement that the Contractor may remove from the work and work site any Subcontractor or Subcontractor's employee who has engaged in such action. At no change to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, remove from the work and work site any employee or other person pursuant to this Section. Failure to comply with these requirements is grounds for immediate termination of the Agreement for cause. 1.03 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Work of this Contract comprises all required demolition, on-site and earthwork construction, general construction, mechanical, and plumbing work for the Westside Christian High School Additiona and Remodel Project. 1.04 DELEGATED DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Certain components of the Work under this project are Delegated Design. It is the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate and assume or assign to subcontractors the complete responsibilities for the design, calculation, submittals, fabrication, transportation and installation of the Delegated Design portions or components as required. Delegated Design components of the Work are defined as complete operational systems, provided for their intended use. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 01 10 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY B. Submit deferred submittals for delegated design elements to the governing agency for the separate approval of each Delegated Design item. C. Owner shall not be responsible to pay for any delays, additional products, additional hours of work or overtime, restocking or rework required due to failure by the Contractor or the subcontractor to coordinate their work with the work of the other trades on the project or to provide the Delegated Design portion or component in a timely manner to meet the schedule of the project. D. Delegated Design components include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Steel Joists, Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joist Framing. 2. Cold-Formed Metal Framing, Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing. 3. Ship's Ladders, Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications. 4. Firestopping, Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. 5. Aluminum Storefront, Section 08 43 13 -Aluminum-Framed Storefronts. 6. Metal Framed Skylights, Section 08 63 00 - Metal-Framed Skylights. 7. Butt Glazina/Frameless Glass Relites, Section 08 80 00 - Glazing. 8. Gypsum Board Assemblies, Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. 9. Seismic Anchorage for Suspended Acoustical Ceilings, Section 09 51 00 -Acoustical Ceilings. 10. Seismic Anchorage Divisions 21, 23, 26 and 27 equipment, hoods, panels and other components of mechanical, plumbing, gas and electrical systems. 11. Fire Suppression, Division 21. 12. Fire Alarm System, Division 28. 1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Work Sequence: 1. Perform Work in a manner required to accommodate Owner and City Bible use of premises during the Contract Period. Coordinate Work schedules and operations with Owner's use requirements. 2. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner and City Bible: a. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered. 3. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit. B. Limitations on Use: 1. City Bible intends to occupy and conduct church services in the existing building during portions of the construction period. The existing building during times of Owner occupancy is a limited Contractor access area. Coordinate access to the existing building. 2. Complete and exclusive use of the construction area except as outlined above will be permitted from Notice to Proceed until Substantial Completion of the Project. Coordinate areas available for early occupancy(if any)with Owner.During times of Owner's occupancy there may be down days during the Contract Period when occupied areas will be closed. 3. During times of Owner's occupancy there may be down days during the Contract Period when occupied areas will be closed. Request from the Owner a list of down days that may occur during the Contract Period. Notify the Owner at least 48 hours in advance of down days during which time the Contractor intends to work. C. Non-Interference with Church Services: 1. Perform work operations upon areas adjacent to existing Church-occupied areas and/or structures in such manner as to not interfere with continued free and comfortable use of such areas. 2. During normal church hours, keep building exits safe, protected, and restricted from remainder of construction site and clear of obstructions at all times. If closure of an exit is required by the Work, notify the church and allow ample time for an alternate exit plan to be executed. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 01 10 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY 3. Work shall not be performed in Owner-occupied areas or rooms during normal church hours when such spaces are required for church use. Such Work shall be performed after normal church hours up to 10:00 PM or as agreed upon with Owner, and if no night time church activities are planned. All Work required in rooms or spaces being utilized for church purposes must be closely scheduled with the church such that rooms or spaces may be safely used for church purposes when their use resumes. D. Non-Interference with Serving Utilities: 1. Do not interrupt electric, gas, water, or other services to existing church-occupied structures without prior notice to the church and then only at a definite time and for a definite duration approved by Owner. 2. Schedule demolition, remodel, and new construction to accommodate Church's continued use of existing and/or new mechanical, electrical, and plumbing services as required for church's continued occupancy and beneficial use of designated areas. 3. Consult with public and private utility companies for location and extent of all utilities before commencing work. 4. Provide services of a utilities locator to investigate and mark underground utilities in the vicinity of exterior work; and for interior below-slab utilities in areas which will be partially demolished prior to commencing work. Ensure that utilities are identified prior to saw cutting interior floor slabs. 5. Provide all services required. Protect and maintain existing utilities, active electrical conductors, sewers, pipes, and other active lines either on project site or in offsite street excavations. 6. Arrange for and pay cost of disconnecting, removing, relocating, capping, replacing, or abandoning of public and private utilities in the way of construction operations in accordance with serving utilities policies, local regulations and governing codes. Utilities, pipes, sewers, electrical conductors and the like to be abandoned shall be capped in accordance with instructions of governing authority or as directed. E. Protections - Exterior Components: 1. Protect sidewalks, asphalt paving, concrete, plantings, and lawn areas at all times from spillage of materials used in carrying out the Work. Exercise care to preclude materials from clogging catch basins and yard drains. Leave all drainage items clean and in proper working condition. 2. Clean, repair, resurface, or restore existing surfaces to their original condition, or completely replace such surfaces to match existing where damaged by construction operations. 3. Whenever it is necessary to cut and remove fences and/or power lines (whether on private or public property), restore such demolished work to condition at minimum equal to that which existed prior to such demolition. 4. Damage to property adjacent to Owner's property shall be restored to the satisfaction of respective property owners. F. Protections- Interior Components: 1. Contractor is responsible for protection of completed portions of the Work. Provide protection as required such that items are not soiled or damaged during the progression of the Work. Maintain all such protections for the entire duration of the construction until acceptance by Owner. 2. Whenever it is required and/or necessary to demolish portions of work, take all precautions to protect adjacent portions of the work which remain from damage. 3. Clean, repair, resurface, or restore such items above required to be protected to their original condition, or completely replace items to match existing undamaged portions of work, where damaged by construction operations. G. Protections: Vegetation and Plantings: 1. Protect all existing trees to remain on-site from foliage, trunk, branch, and root damage. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 01 10 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY 2. Provide barricades and maintain same around all trees, plantings, and other landscaped areas adjacent to work of this Contract to protect such areas from damage of any nature caused by construction operations. 3. Replace any plantings damaged or destroyed with plants of equivalent type, size, quantity, and nature as approved by Architect. H. Security: 1. Provide security and facilities to protect the Work and Church's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft. 2. Provide temporary barriers, doors, and locks at all openings after building is enclosed. 3. Coordinate with Owner's building security provider and program. I. Removal of Equipment and Materials: 1. Clear site and surrounding street areas of all equipment, apparatus, appliances, tools, unused materials, and similar items immediately as they cease to be necessary to carry out the Work. 1.06 RELATED WORK BY OWNER OR OTHERS A. NIC and OFOI Items: Items designated on the Drawings and/or described in the Project Manual as "NIC" (Not In Contract) or"OFOI" (Owner Furnished, Owner Installed) are not included in the Contract. B. Contractor Responsibilities for NIC and OFOI items: 1. Designate delivery date for each portion of the Work in the Progress Schedule (if appropriate). 2. Storage of products if requested. 3. Coordination of installation with Project Schedule. 4. Provide all preparatory work necessary for proper installation including but not limited to: blocking, backing, and finish work including sealing, grouting, furring, preparing subfloors for finish flooring materials, and painting adjacent surfaces as required for NIC and/or OFOI products. C. Work of the Project which will be executed concurrently with the Work of this Contract, and which is specifically excluded from this Contract: 1. Hazardous Material Abatement, including, but not limited to, Asbestos and PCB abatement. 1.07 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. OFCI Equipment and Pr-ducts: Items specifically designated on Drawings or specified in the Project Manual and/or described as "OFCI" (Owner Furnished, Contractor Installed). B. Owner's Responsibilities for OFCI Products: 1. Arrange for delivery of shop drawings, product data, samples, manufacturer instructions, and certificates to Contractor. 2. Deliver supplier's bill of materials to Architect for review. 3. Arrange and pay for delivery to site in accordance with Contractor's Progress Schedule. 4. Inspect deliveries jointly with Contractor. 5. Submit claims for transportation damage. 6. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, or missing items. 7. Arrange for manufacturer's field services; arrange for and deliver manufacturer warranties and bonds to Contractor. C. Contractor Responsibilities for OFCI Products: 1. Designate submittals and delivery date for each product in project Progress Schedule. 2. Review shop drawings, product data, samples, and other submittals. Submit to Architect with notification of any observed discrepancies or problems anticipated due to non- conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Receive and unload products at work site. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 01 10 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY a. Inspect deliveries jointly with Owner, record shortages and damaged or defective items. b. Handle products at site including uncrating and storage. c. Protect products from damage and from exposure to elements. d. Assemble, install, connect, adjust, and finish products. e. Provide installation inspections required by public authorities and jurisdictions. f. Repair or replace items damaged by Contractor to satisfaction of Owner. D. Schedule of OFCI Products and Equipment: 1. Science Fume Hood from existing high school. 2. Refrigerators from existing high school. 1.08 WORK BY OWNER A. Owner will furnish and install the following: 1. Acid Storage Unit. 2. Flammable Storage Unit. B. Owner will furnish the following for installation by Contractor: 1. Refrigerators. 2. Fume Hood. 3. Stacked Washer/Dryer. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 01 10 00 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 01 23 00 ALTERNATES SECTION 01 23 00 ALTERNATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Description of alternates. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Base Bid: Includes all work shown on Drawings and as specified, with the exception of the Work specifically included in Additive or Deductive Alternates listed herein. B. Alternate Bid: Amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form that will be either Added To or Deducted From the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a change in either scope of work or in products, materials, equipment, systems, or other installation methods as described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate the alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.03 ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. Accepted alternates will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. B. Owner reserves the right to select any or all of the Alternates up to 90 days after award of Contract. If Owner so selects, the time for Substantial Completion will be correspondingly adjusted for those selected items only. Immediately following Award of Contract the Contractor shall prepare and distribute to each party involved notification of the status of each Alternate. C. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each alternate. 1.04 PROCEDURES A. Alternates shall conform to the requirements of each Section of the Specifications which pertain to the scope of work contained within the Alternate. B. Refer to Drawings for details and other information related to the construction of Alternates where such construction is required by scope. C. Include as part of each Alternate miscellaneous devices, accessory objects and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation, whether or not specifically mentioned as part of the Alternate. 1.05 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1 - Exterior Canopy at South of Commons: Addition of steel canopy at south and west of Commons#150, including foundations, steel structure and metal decking. B. Alternate No. 2 - Rigid Insulation on Existing Roof: Add rigid insulation to value of R-20 over existing roofing system prior to re-roofing. C. Alternate No. 3 - Re-roofing of Existing Roof: Removal of gravel topping, installation of new coverboard and TPO roofing system (not including insulation). Provide roof walk pads indicated on drawings. D. Alternate No. 4 - Main Irrigation Line: Installation of a main irrigation waterline and quick couplers for irrigation. E. Alternate No. 5 - Full Irrigation System: Installation of full automatic irrigation system. F. Alternate No. 6 - Exterior Plaza: Installation of exterior plaza to south of Commons#150 as shown on drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 01 23 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage. B. Openings for other work. C. Form accessories. D. Form stripping. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing. B. Section 03 30 00 -Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Placement of embedded steel anchors and plates in cast-in-place concrete. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute. C. ACI 318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute. D. ACI 347- Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on void form materials and installation requirements. B. Product Data: 1. For products having recycled content, provide documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. C. Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly and support of formwork. Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints and ties. 1. Architect's review will be for aesthetic review of the tie-hole patterns and panel joints only. Design and engineering of formwork are Contractor's responsibility. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design formwork under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of concrete formwork and licensed in Oregon. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK -GENERAL A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast-in- place concrete work. B. Design and construct to provide resultant concrete that conforms to design with respect to shape, lines, and dimensions. C. Comply with applicable State and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and removal of formwork. D. Comply with relevant portions of ACI 347, ACI 301, and ACI 318. 2.02 WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. Softwood Plywood, PS 1, B-B Class 1 or better, mill oiled and edge sealed for concealed structural concrete. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 10 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES B. Softwood Plywood: PS 1, B-B Medium Density Concrete Form Overlay, Class I for surfaces exposed to public view. C. Lumber: Douglas Fir species; No. 2 grade; with grade stamp clearly visible. 2.03 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Removable type, galvanized metal, fixed length, cone type, with waterproofing washer, 1 inch back break dimension, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch in concrete surface. B. Form Release Agent: Capable of releasing forms from hardened concrete without staining or discoloring concrete or forming bugholes and other surface defects, compatible with concrete and form materials, and not requiring removal for satisfactory bonding of coatings to be applied. C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. D. Filler Strips for Chamfered Corners: Rigid plastic type; 3/4 x 3/4 inch size; maximum possible lengths. E. Reveal Strips: Wood or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal. F. Dovetail Anchor Slot: Galvanized steel, 22 gage thick, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork. G. Flashing Reglets: Galvanized steel, 22 gage thick, longest possible lengths, with alignment splines for joints, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork. H. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. I. Embedded Anchor Shapes, Plates, Angles and Bars: As specified in Section 05 12 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with drawings. 3.02 EARTH FORMS A. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete. 3.03 ERECTION - FORMWORK A. Design and erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301. 1. At formwork for exposed concrete, lay out form ties in a regular pattern, coordinated with reveal locations for aesthetic review and acceptance by the Architect. 2. At exposed concrete, lay out panel edges to be concealed behind reveals to the greatest extent possible. B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. 1. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: a. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. b. Class C, 1/2 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces. C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 10 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on drawings. F. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to formwork. G. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, request instructions from Engineer before proceeding. H. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. 3.04 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete. 3.05 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete work. B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work. D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. F. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. 3.06 FORM CLEANING A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms. B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. 1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports. 2. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. 3.07 FORMWORK TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117, unless otherwise indicated. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. 3.09 FORM REMOVAL A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained. 1. Leave formwork for beam soffits,joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until conc:ate has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 10 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. D. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. E. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard damaged forms. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 10 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete. B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories. B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Reinforcement for masonry. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International. B. ACI SP-66 -ACI Detailing Manual; American Concrete Institute International. C. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. E. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. F. ASTM A704/A704M - Standard Specification for Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. G. ASTM A706/A706M - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. H. ASTM A996/A996M - Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. I. AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society. J. CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. B. Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, shapes of bent bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices. 1. Prepare shop drawings under seal of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of work of this type and licensed in Oregon. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that reinforcing steel and accessories supplied for this project meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Welders' Certificates: Submit certifications for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. E. Reports: Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code-- Reinforcing Steel." 1. Certify to WABO Standard No. 27-13 "WABO Welder and Welding Operator Performance Qualification Standard." Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 20 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60 (420). 1. Plain billet-steel bars. 2. Unfinished. C. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A706/A706M, deformed low-alloy steel bars. 1. Unfinished. D. Reinforcing Steel: Deformed bars, ASTM A996/A996M Grade 60 (420), Type R. E. Reinforcing Steel Mat: ASTM A704/A704M, using ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 40 (280) steel bars or rods, unfinished. F. Stirrup Steel: ASTM A82/A82M steel wire, unfinished. G. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM Al85/A185M, plain type. 1. Flat Sheets. 2. Mesh Size: 6 x 6. 3. Wire Gage: 1.4 x 1.4. H. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (420), plain-steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. I. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 3. Provide stainless steel components for placement within 1-1/2 inches of weathering surfaces. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice. B. Welding of reinforcement is not permitted. C. Welding of reinforcement is permitted only with the specific approval of Architect. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.4. D. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress. 1. Review locations of splices with Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. B. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. C. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. D. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 20 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING 3.02 PLACEMENT A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position. B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier. C. Accommodate placement of formed openings. D. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as indicated on the drawings. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01 40 00, will inspect installed reinforcement for conformance to contract documents before concrete placement. B. Refer to Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete for scope of testing. END OF SECTION Project No 11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 20 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Floors and slabs on grade. B. Concrete shear walls and foundation walls. C. Joint devices associated with concrete work. D. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including light pole bases, flagpole bases, thrust blocks, and manholes. E. Concrete curing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork. B. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing. C. Section 03 37 13 - Shotcrete: Pneumatically applied concrete. D. Section 03 47 13 -Tilt-Up Concrete: Tilt-Up concrete walls. E. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers: Sealants for saw cut joints and isolation joints in slabs. F. Section 09 64 66 -Wood Athletic Flooring: Coordination of sub-floor requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International. C. ACI 302.1R- Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International. D. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. E. ACI 305R- Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International. F. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International. G. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. H. ACI 318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International. I. ASTM C31/C31M - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. J. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. K. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. L. ASTM C42/C42M - Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. M. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. N. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or(50-mm) Cube Specimens). O. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. P. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. Q. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 30 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE R. ASTM C172/ C172M - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete S. ASTM C231/C231 M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. T. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. U. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. V. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. W. ASTM C881/C881M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. X. ASTM C1059/C1059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete. Y. ASTM C1064/C1064M - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic- Cement Concrete. Z. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). AA. ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures. AB. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). AC. ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers. AD. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. AE. ASTM E1745- Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements and installation instructions. 1. Provide design mixtures for each concrete mixture containing fly ash as a replacement for portland cement or other portland cement replacements and for equivalent concrete mixtures that do not contain portland cement replacements. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. 1. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 2. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: For concrete accessories, indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent construction. D. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements to determine compliance with specified tolerances. E. Minutes of preinstallation conference. F. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 30 00 -2 Printed 222/2013 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 10 00. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 20 00. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal Portland type. 1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates:ASTM C 33. 1. Acquire all aggregates for entire project from same source. 2. Maximum Size: 1-1/2 inches and not more than 1/5 of narrowest dimension between sides of forms, 1/3 depth of flatwork, or 3/4 of narrowest space between reinforcing bars. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. D. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Class N. E. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240, proportioned in accordance with ACI 211.1. F. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES A. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260. C. High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type G. D. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type F. E. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type E. F. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type D. G. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type C. H. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type B. I. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type A. 1. Shall not increase concrete shrinkage or promote water-bleeding. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi-layer, fabric-, cord-, grid-, or aluminum-reinforced polyethylene or equivalent, complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The use of single ply polyethylene is prohibited. 1. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2. Products: a. Moistop Ultra 15 manufactured by Fortifiber Corporation: www.fortifiber.com. b. VaporBlock 15 manufactured by Raven Industries: www.vaporblock.com. c. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier 15-mil (Class A): www.stegoindustries.com. d. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; PERMINATOR 15 mils: www.wrmeadows.com. e. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. 1. ASTM C1107/C1107M; Grade A, B, or C. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 2,400 psi. Project No 11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 30 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7,000 psi. C. Sealer SC-1: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces. 1. Products: a. Ashford Formula; Cure-Hard. b. BASF; Lapidolith. c. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; Intraseal. d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Sure Hard. e. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Euco Diamond Hard. f. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard. g. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Liqui-Hard. h. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Industraseal. 2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C1059 Type II. B. Epoxy Bonding System: Complying with ASTM C881/C881M and of Type required for specific application. C. Reglets: Formed steel sheet, galvanized, with temporary filler to prevent concrete intrusion during placement. 1. Size: 1/2 inch throat, 1/2 inch deep. D. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top section that will form 1/2 inch deep sealant pocket after removal. 1. Material: ASTM D1751, cellulose fiber. E. Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel, with minimum 1 inch diameter holes for conduit or rebars to pass through at 6 inches on center; ribbed steel stakes for setting. 1. Provide removable plastic cap strip that forms wedge-shaped joint for sealant installation. 2. Height: To suit slab thickness. F. Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07 90 05. 2.07 CURING MATERIALS A. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: ASTM C171. Provide one of the following: 1. Curing paper, regular or white. 2. Polyethylene film, clear or white, minimum nominal thickness of 0.0040 in. 3. White-burlap-polyethylene sheet, weighing not less than 10 oz/per linear yd, 40 inches wide. B. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete. 2.08 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. 1. Replace as much Portland cement as possible with fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag, silica fume, or rice hull ash as is consistent with ACI recommendations. B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. D. Normal Weight Concrete: Refer to Structural Drawings. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 30 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.09 MIXING A. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. B. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load-bearing applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required. 2. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications. C. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. D. Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade according to ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight by taping edges and ends with manufacturer's recommended tape. Use vapor retarder sheet to boot around all penetrations and seal with tape to create a continuous vapor retarder. Do not penetrate vapor retarder with screed pins, wood stakes or other items. 3.03 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1 R. C. Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations. D. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. E. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement. F. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below. 3.04 SLAB JOINTING A. Locate joints as indicated on the drawings. B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement. C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab. D. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs,joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 30 00 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. E. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- third of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws as indicated below. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. a. Equipment Control Joint Saw: "Soff-Cut System," early-entry dry-cut saw with Skid Plate, by Soff-Cut. 1112 Olympic Drive, Corona, CA 92881 909-272-2330. b. Comply with the Soff-Cut instructions for the SOFF-CUT System c. Troweled Finish: Install cuts 0 to 2 hours after final finish at each joint location. d. Broom Finish: Install cuts at each control joint location as soon as concrete will support weight of saw and operator without disturbing final finish. e. Cut depth not less than 10 percent of slab thickness with a 1-inch minimum. f. Remove debris in path of cut and under Skid Plate before cutting. Skid Plate must remain flat on surface. g. Use Soff-Cut blades and Skid Plates, using a new Skid Plate with each new blade. h. Install Soff-Cut joint protector at saw-cut intersection prior to cross-cut. i. Remove dry powder without disturbing finish. j. Avoid traffic across saw cut until sufficient strength is gained to protect joint edges. F. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. G. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. H. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable. I. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Engineer. J. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 30 00 - 6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. K. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. L. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. M. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.05 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES A. For floors below wood athletic flooring, provide surface flatness of=1- 1/8 inch in a 10 foot radius. 1. Coordinate with Wcrk of Section 09 64 66 -Wood Athletic Flooring for depth of recess to receive athletic flooring. 2. Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified. 3. Grind high spots and fill low spots with approved leveling compound. B. Minimum F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Values: 1. Exposed to View and Foot Traffic: F(F)of 20; F(L) of 15. 2. Under Carpeting: F(F)of 25; F(L)of 20. 3. Under Thin Resilient Flooring and Thinset Tile: F(F)of 35; F(L) of 25. C. Measure F(F)and F(L) in accordance with ASTM E1155, within 48 hours after slab installation; report both composite overall values and local values for each measured section. D. Correct the slab surface if composite overall value is less than specified and if local value is less than two-thirds of specified value or less than F(F) 13/F(L) 10. E. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process. 3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. Provide finish as follows: Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 30 00 - 7 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not more than 24 hours after form removal. C. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows: 1. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 301.1R; thin floor coverings include thin set ceramic tile, resilient flooring, and carpeting. 2. Surfaces to Receive Wood Athletic Flooring: Smooth "steel trowel" as described in ACI 301.1R. 3. Exterior Steps and Ramps: "Broom Finish." Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 4. Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R, minimizing burnish marks and other appearance defects. D. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at minimum 1/8 and maximum 1/4 inch per foot or as indicated on drawings. 3.07 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Concrete Fill for Bollards: Fill bollards with concrete. Smooth trowel concrete to one inch high convex curve at top of bollards unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3.08 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days. 2. High early strength concrete: Not less than 4 days. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period. D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive-Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and other surface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooring and adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing to flooring manufacturer's satisfaction. 2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated sand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap. a. Ponding: Maintain 100 percent coverage of water over floor slab areas, continuously for 4 days. b. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet. c. Saturated Burlap: Saturate burlap-polyethylene and place burlap-side down over floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in place. 3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry. a. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: Lap strips not less than 3 inches and seal with waterproof tape or adhesive; secure at edges. E. Sealer Application: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Sealer SC-1: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs. b. Do not apply to concrete that is less than three days' old. c. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous. d. Locations of Use: As indicated on the drawings. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 30 00 - 8 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of concrete operations. B. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance with specified requirements. C. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. D. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. E. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C143/C143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064/C1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31 M. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 8. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. 9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 30 00 - 9 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42/C42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. F. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E1155 (ASTM E1155M) within 24 hours of finishing. 3.10 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours of test. B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 30 00 - 10 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 37 13 SHOTCRETE SECTION 03 37 13 SHOTCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pneumatically applied concrete. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Prepared forms to achieve configuration, contours, and tolerances required. B. Section 03 20 00 -Concrete Reinforcing. C. Section 03 30 00 -Cast-in-Place Concrete: Reinforcement. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 506.2 - Specification for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shotcrete; American Concrete Institute International. B. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. C. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate formwork, and dimensions, reinforcement, accessories. B. Mix design test reports. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 506-05, ACI 506.2-95 and Section 1913 of the OSSC. B. Pre-construction tests shall be performed in accordance with OSSC Section 1913.5. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Sample Panel: Construct two panels, 2 feet long by 2 feet wide, to indicate range of special treatment or finish required. B. Test Panels: Prior to starting work provide mock-up for evaluation of materials and workmanship: 1. Provide three test panels fabricated by placing shotcrete onto plywood for each mix design being considered, for each shooting position to be encountered, and for each wall being placed. C. Mock-ups may not remain as part of the Work. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain material and surrounding air temperature at minimum 50 degrees F prior to and during installation and maintain material at this minimum temperature for 7 days after completion of work. Provide equipment and cover to maintain minimum temperature. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal; grey color. B. Aggregate: Normal weight, ASTM C33, 3/8 inch maximum size. C. Reinforcing Bars: Type as scheduled. D. Water: Clean, potable, and not detrimental to shotcrete. E. Curing Compound:Water-based, spray-on, penetrating curing compound and hardener; not detrimental to application of subsequent surface finish materials; containing no wax, resin, or solvents. 1. Products: a. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Deck-O-Treat: www.wrmeadows.com. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 37 13 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 37 13 SHOTCRETE b. Substitutions: Submit for and receice approval prior to bidding. F. Bonding Agent: Compatible with substrate and subsequent materials. G. Alignment Wire: Small gage, high strength steel wire. 2.02 SHOTCRETE MIX A. Provide wet or dry mix design that gives good compaction and low percentage of rebound, is stiff enough not to sag. B. Conform to following requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (28 day minimum): 4,000 psi. 2. Aggregate Size (maximum): 3/8 inch. C. Maintain quality control records during production of shotcrete; make records available. 2.03 EQUIPMENT A. Mixing Equipment: Capable of thoroughly mixing aggregate, cement, and water in sufficient quantity to maintain continuous placement. B. Water Supply: Uniform water pressure at discharge nozzle sufficiently greater than operating air pressure to ensure intimate mixing with aggregate-cement mix; provide water pump to system if line water pressure is inadequate. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to start of work, testing agency will review mix proportions, gradation, and quality of aggregate. B. Provide inspection for conformance to design mix. C. Test samples in accordance with ACI 506.2. D. Independent testing agency will test mock-up panels as follows: 1. Drill 3 inch diameter core samples from test panels. 2. Test for strength. E. Modify mix design as required based on results of testing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. C. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. D. Verify fabricated forms are: 1. True to line and dimension. 2. Adequately braced against vibration during placement. 3. Constructed to permit escape of trapped air during gunning operations. 4. Constructed to minimize rebound during gunning operations. E. Verify correct placement of reinforcement with sufficient clearances to permit complete encasement. F. Verify that embedded fittings, pipe, conduits, and other items are correctly and securely placed. G. Ensure easy access to shotcrete surfaces for screeding and finishing, and to permit uninterrupted application. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove existing unsound concrete block from substrate surfaces. 1. Minimize abrupt changes in depth of area to be repaired. 2. Remove square external corners from substrate by radiusing the edges. B. Sandblast surfaces to receive shotcrete. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 37 13 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 37 13 SHOTCRETE C. Determine operating procedures for placement in close quarters, extended distances, or around unusual obstructions where placement velocities and mix consistency may be adjusted during application. D. Clean and wet cementitious or absorptive substrate surfaces prior to receiving shotcrete. Keep porous surfaces damp for several hours prior to placement of shotcrete. E. Apply bonding agent. F. Protect adjacent surfaces not receiving shotcrete. 3.03 ALIGNMENT CONTROL A. Provide alignment wire to establish thickness and plane of required surfaces. B. Install alignment wire at corners and offsets not established by forms. C. Tighten alignment wire true to line. Position adjustment devices to permit additional tightening. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI 506.2. B. Use mixing and delivery equipment capable of thoroughly mixing aggregate, cement, and water in sufficient quantity to maintain continuous and uniform placement. C. Do not apply shotcrete more than 45 minutes after adding Portland cement to the mix. D. Do not place shotcrete on surfaces that are frozen, spongy, or where there is free water. E. Achieve maximum compaction with minimum rebound. F. Build-up to required thickness in multiple passes to achieve layering. Encase reinforcement with the first pass. G. Allow each layer to take initial set before applying succeeding layers. H. Do not permit applied shotcrete to sag, slough, or displace. I. After initial set of final layer, remove excess material outside of forms and alignment lines. J. Sandblast to remove laitance. Clean with air/water pressure jet. K. Finish surface of final layer with steel trowel finish. L. Remove rebound at construction and expansion joints. M. Remove rebound material that does not fall clear of work; discard salvaged rebound. N. Maintain shotcrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period necessary for hydration c,;cement and hardening of shotcrete. O. Immediately after placement, protect shotcrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. P. Maintain surfaces wet for a minimum of 7 days. Q. Sound test the applied material with hammer for voids. Expose voids and replace with new shotcrete ensuring full bond with adjacent work. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide additional test panels, as specified for mock-up, during the course of the work as may be requested by the testing agency. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Do not permit applied work to damage adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 37 13 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 47 13 TILT-UP CONCRETE SECTION 03 47 13 TILT-UP CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tilt-up, site cast concrete wall panels, load bearing, erected from forms to final position. B. Supports, devices, load bearing supports, and attachments. C. Joint seals. D. Grouting under panels. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 10 00 -Concrete Forming and Accessories: Formwork requirements. B. Section 03 20 00 -Concrete Reinforcing: Reinforcing steel and welding requirements. C. Section 03 30 00 -Cast-In-Place Concrete: Requirements for concrete for tilt-up panels. D. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Requirements for casting slab. E. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous metal for embedment. F. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Requirements for reglets recessed in units. G. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Calking of perimeter joint with sealant and backing. H. Section 09 90 00 - Paints and Coatings: Field applied painting of tilt-up panels. I. Section 09 96 53 - Elastomeric Coatings: Field applied coating of tilt-up panels. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International. B. ACI 304R- Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. C. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting. D. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting. E. ACI 318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International. F. ASTM A36/A36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. G. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. H. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware. I. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. J. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. K. ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric]. L. ASTM C31/C31 M - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. M. ASTM C78 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading). N. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. O. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. P. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 47 13 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 47 13 TILT-UP CONCRETE Q. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel. R. AWS Dl.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data, samples, laboratory reports, and mix desigh per Section 03 00 00 Cast- In-Place Concrete requirements and comply with submittal requirements of this Section 1. Prominently identify source of manufacture and supply and manufacturer's endorsement of specific applaication in the Workfor each product. Where products of multiple manufacturers are used together, provide documentation from the manufacturer of CM/GC's engineer of ther compatibility and prior successful use. B. Samples: 1. Coarse and fine aggregates representative of full range of color and size as specified but not less than five pounds of each. 2. Casting Samples: Submit laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results for approval before using in work. 3. Mock-Up: Provide for evaluation of mix design and finish requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Document formwork, reinforcing, concrete placement, erection and finishing procedures for tilt-up concrete panels. 1. Show each panel configuration and size required with openings, reinforcement and connection details as indicated and locations of items cast into panels, lifting devices, temporary supports and other pertinent information. 2. Reinforcement: Detail bar types and placement, bar schedule of material, grade and configuration, bent-bar diagrams and reinforcing supports. Indicate additional reinforcement proposed by CM/GC where necessary to resist loading due to means and methods of rection and temporary bracing. a. Welded Connections: Indicated using standard AWS symbols. D. Erection narrative: Illustrated, written report documenting means, method and sequence proposed for casting, cure, erection and finishing of tilt-up concrete panels; coordinate with other submittals such that information is based on approved mix design and other project specific information, update as necessary for the status of the work. 1. Include required observation and inspection by CM/GC's engineer. 2. Calculations for lifting devices and temporary bracing: Stamped by CM/GC's Oregon Registered Structural Engineer. E. Certification of Installer, Erector and Finisher Qualifications: Work history and project information demonstratin required experience and skill level. F. Samples: When directed submit samples of formwork materials. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 318. B. Designer Qualifications: Design units under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in Oregon. C. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in site-cast tilt-up concrete construction with minimum 5 years of documented experience. D. Welding Qualifications: Welding processes and welding operators qualified within previous 12 months in accordance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.4. E. Comply with referenced standards in Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete and the following: 1. ACI 551 Tilt-up Concrete structures. 2. ACI 303 Guide to Cast-In-Place Architectural concrete. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up panel as quality control for architectural finishes, coordination of work with other sections, testing, and observation of operation. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 47 13 -2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 47 13 TILT-UP CONCRETE 1. Panel Size: Minimum 4 by 8 feet, using forming system and construction methods to be used on project. 2. Details: Incorporate typical edge and reveal conditions as detailed. 3. Finishes: Demonstrate full range of color and inserts to be expected in completed panels. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handling Tilt-up Units: Lift units to position, consistent with their shape and design. Lift and support only from support points. B. Blocking and Lateral Support During Erection: Use materials that are clean and non-staining. Provide temporary lateral support to prevent bowing, warping, or cracking. C. Protect units from staining, chipping, or spalling. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Adverse Weather: Do not construct formwork, place reinforcing steel or concrete, or erect panels during adverse weather unless measures acceptable to Architect are taken to prevent damage. B. Cold Weather: Comply with provisions of ACI 306R for freezing or near-freezing conditions. 1. Provide adequate equipment for heating and protecting concrete materials. 2. Do not use concrete materials, reinforcing steel, forms, fillers, ground surface, or other materials that are frozen, frost-covered or that contain ice. C. Hot Weather: Comply with provisions of ACI 305R for high temperature conditions. 1. During periods of dry winds, low humidity, and other conditions that cause rapid drying, protect fresh concrete with an evaporation retardant or fine fog spray of water applied immediately after screeding and bull floating. 2. Maintain protection until final finishing and curing compounds are applied. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILT-UP PANEL UNITS A. Tilt-Up Panel Units: 1. Concrete: Minimum 4,000 psi, 28 day strength, air entrained to 5 to 7 percent; comply with ACI 301. 2. Design Loads: Static loads, anticipated dynamic loading, including positive and negative wind loads, thermal movement loads, and erection forces as defined by applicable code. 3. Calculate structural properties of units in accordance with ACI 318. 4. Accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. 5. Provide connections that accommodate building movement and thermal movement and adjust to misalignment of structure without unit distortion or damage. 6. Provide lifting hardware and lifting system appropriate to panel size and configuration. 2.02 PANEL MATERIALS A. Forms: Provide formwork in accordance with Section 03 10 00. B. Concrete: Provide concrete materials in accordance with Section 03 30 00. C. Reinforcing Steel: As specified in Section 03 20 00. D. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement,water reducing and plasticizing agents. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 2,400 psi. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 10,000 psi. E. Reveals: For reveals or relief in panel face, provide materials of adequate strength to withstand construction traffic and loads without damage. 2.03 SUPPORT AND LIFTING DEVICES A. Lifting Hardware, Connecting, and Support Devices: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel; hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153/A 153M. Project No 11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 47 13 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 47 13 TILT-UP CONCRETE B. Miscellaneous Metal Items: Provide inserts, dowels, and other items to be cast into panels as specified in Section 05 50 00, galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123/A 123M. C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307 heavy hex bolts, Type A, hot-dip galvanized, with matching ASTM A563 (A 563M) nuts and matching washers. D. Primer: Zinc rich oil alkyd. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Reglets: Specified in Section 07 62 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building structure, anchors, devices, and openings are ready to receive work of this section. B. Verify that casting slab specified in Section 03 30 00 is cured and ready for work of this section. Fill cracks, saw cuts,joints, or defects that would adversely affect appearance of tilt-up panels. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate site cast tilt-up operations with work of other sections to expedite the Work and avoid omissions and delays. B. Apply bondbreaker to casting slab in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Provide for erection procedures and induced loads during erection, and provide for temporary bracing that will remain in place until roof diaphragm has been completely installed and connected. 3.03 FORMING PANELS A. General: Maintain environmental records and quality control program during production of tilt- up units. Make records available upon request. B. Lay out panels in manner that will minimize joints in panel faces. Coordinate installation of inserts and anchorages. C. Maintain consistent quality during construction of forms. D. Fabricate connecting devices, plates, angles, items fit to steel framing members, inserts, bolts, and accessories. Fabricate to permit initial placement and final attachment. E. Embed reinforcing steel, anchors, inserts plates, angles, and other cast-in items as indicated. F. Locate hoisting devices to permit removal after erection. G. Work concrete thoroughly around reinforcement, around embedded items, and into corners of the forms. Consolidate concrete in accordance with ACI recommendations. H. Cold joints are not permitted in any individual panel. 3.04 PLACING AND CURING CONCRETE A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M, Option A, and in compliance with recommendations of ACI 304R. B. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessively hot or cold temperatures. C. Cure units to develop concrete quality, and to minimize appearance blemishes such as non- uniformity, staining, or surface cracking. 3.05 FINISHING CONCRETE A. Finish exposed surfaces of panels as indicated on drawings. B. Grade A-Architectural Finish: Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 47 13 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 47 13 TILT-UP CONCRETE 1. Panel surfaces must be free of voids, holes, pockets, and other surface deformations greater than 1/8 inch and must not telegraph imperfections from the casting surface, including floor joints. 2. Cracks in excess of 1/32 inch width are not acceptable. 3. Reveals may not deviate from their correct position by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 4. Repairs must not be apparent from a minimum distance of 10 feet. C. Interior Finish: Trowelled. 3.06 SITE FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Unless otherwise approved by Architect, provide panels conforming to casting tolerances as specified below. B. Panel Height and Width: 1. Up to 20 feet: 1/4 inch maximum. 2. 20 to 30 feet: 3/8 inch maximum. 3. Each additional 10 ft increment: 1/8 inch maximum. C. Panel Thickness: 3/16 inch maximum average variation through any vertical or horizontal cross section. D. Skew of Panel or Opening: Measured as difference in length of the two diagonals: 1. Per 6 feet of diagonal dimension: 1/8 inch maximum. 2. Maximum total difference: 1/2 inch. E. Panel Openings: 1. Size: 1/4 inch maximum. 2. Location of Centerline: 1/4 inch maximum. F. Location and Placement of Embedded Items: 1. Inserts, Bolts, and Pipe Sleeves: 3/8 inch. 2. Lifting and Bracing Inserts: As specified by manufacturer. 3. Weld Plate Embedments: 1 inch for location; 1/4 inch for tipping and flushness. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The CM/GC's engineer shall be present at the Project for the following milestones as a minimum to perform quality control inspections, observe the progress of the work and certify compliance with the approved erection narrative. 1. Required Site Visits: Pre-Installation Conference. Present for initial placing of concrete, form removal, erection and temporary bracing of panels. Shall also visit the site not less than 3 times while work is actively in progress with prior notice neither tothe CM/GC nor tilt-up supervisor and at additional intervals so as to reasonably ensure compliance with Project requirements for work of this Section. a. Particular attention shall be given to the proper installation of lifting hardware, installation and maintenance of temporary panel braces, slab anchors and final connections. 2. The Tilt-up Supervisor: On site at all times work of this Section is being perrormed, shall submit daily report of work status and any deviations from approved submittals. 3. Comply with requirements of Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete. B. Take minimum of 4 cylinders and 4 beams for each 150 cubic yds or fraction thereof, of each class of concrete, for each day concrete is cast, or not less than once for each 5000 sq ft of panel area. Field cure test specimens. 1. Beams: Perform casting, curing, and testing in accordance with ASTM C78. Test two beams prior to panel erection, and average results to determine flexural strength. Retain remaining beams for additional testing, if required. 2. Cylinders: Make and cure test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C31/C31 M. Test two cylinders at 7 days and two at 28 days. C. Take 1 slump tests for every 4 test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C143/C143M. D. Take one air entrainment test cylinder for each set of exterior concrete test cylinders taken. Project No 11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 47 13 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 47 13 TILT-UP CONCRETE E. Submit copies of test reports within 24 hours of test, indicating location of panels for each set of test results. 3.08 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: If test results indicate concrete not conforming to specified requirements, Contractor with the agreement of Architect must adjust mix to provide acceptable concrete on subsequent work. For concrete not meeting specified requirements, Owner may require core specimens to be taken and tested, at Contractor's expense. Concrete cores that test below specified requirements will be deemed to be defective. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect and will be paid for by Contractor. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace damaged or defective concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. 3.09 ERECTION A. Before beginning erection operations, verify that site conditions are appropriate for the work. Mark elements to conform to designations indicated on approved shop drawings. B. Employ erection equipment that will prevent damage to existing construction, permanent floor slabs, and tilt-up panels. Protect panels to prevent staining, warping, or cracking. C. Set panels in assigned positions. Erect members level and plumb within allowable tolerances. Grout space under panels for full bearing, or provide additional support until subsequent grouting operations are completed. D. Align and maintain uniform horizontal and vertical joints, as erection progresses. E. When members require adjustment beyond design or tolerance criteria, discontinue affected work; advise Architect. F. Fasten units in place with mechanical connections. G. Brace panels not attached to building frame at time of erection, using a bracing system designed to resist wind and other applicable loads until all structural connections have been made. Provide minimum of two braces per panel and maintain connections daily. H. Set units dry, without grout, attaining joint dimension with lead or plastic spacers. Grout pack base of unit. I. Exposed Joint Dimension: 1/2 inch. Adjust units as required to bring joint dimensions within allowable tolerances. J. Patch holes, cut-off anchors, surface defects, and damaged corners to match panel with epoxy/cement paste adhesive. K. Seal perimeter and intermediate joints in accordance with Section 07 90 05. 3.10 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Unless otherwise approved by Architect, install site-cast tilt-up panels within erection tolerances as specified below. B. Replace panels that cannot be installed within specified tolerances. C. Joint Width Variation: 1. Up to 20 feet tall panels: 1/4 inch maximum. 2. Each additional 10 ft increment: 1/8 inch maximum. 3. Do not increase or decrease joint width more than 50 percent from specified joint width in any case, as measured between panels at exterior face. D. Joint Taper: 1. Up to 20 feet tall panels: 1/4 inch maximum. 2. Each additional 10 ft increment: 1/8 inch maximum. 3. Maximum for entire length of panel: 3/8 inch width difference for non-parallel panel edges. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 47 13 -6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 03 47 13 TILT-UP CONCRETE E. Panel Alignment: 1. Horizontal and Vertical Joints: 1/4 inch maximum. 2. Offset in Adjacent Exterior Panel Faces: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 03 47 13 - 7 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete Block. B. Face Brick. C. Mortar and Grout. D. Reinforcement and Anchorage. E. Flashings. F. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 72 00 - Cast Stone masonry: Cast stone sills and surrounds B. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels. C. Section 07 19 00 -Water Repellents: Water repellents applied to unpainted exterior masonry. D. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Reglets for roof flashing. E. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control and expansion joints. F. Section 09 90 00 Painting & Coating: Interior coatings applied to concrete masonry units. G. Section 09 96 53 - Elastomeric Coatings: Elastomeric coatings applied to exterior concrete masonry walls. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA- Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures and Related Commentaries; American Concrete Institute International. B. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. C. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. E. ASTM C67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. F. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. G. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units. H. ASTM C140 - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units. I. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. J. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. K. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. L. ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale). M. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. N. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout. O. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry. P. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 04 20 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY Q. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. 1.04 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all relevant installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, and masonry accessories. 1. Indicate location and distance from Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for reinforcing steel showing bar sizes, bends and dimensions. C. Samples: Submit four samples of face brick units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes of color range. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA, except where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. Build mock-up of typical exterior wall in sizes indicated on Drawings. 1. Include sealant-filled joints, cavity drainage material, weep vents and through-wall flashings matching conditions that will occur on the project. 2. Clean one-half of exposed faces of mock-ups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 3. Protect accepted mock-ups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 4. Approval of mock-ups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. a. Approval of mock-ups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. b. Approval of mock-ups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mock-ups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. B. Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 8 feet long by 6 feet high; include mortar and accessories and structural backup in mock-up. C. Locate where directed. D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and contamination by other materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Manufacturers: a. Basalite Concrete Products, LLC. b. Cement Products Manufacturing Co. c. Mutual Materials Company. d. Willamette Graystone, Inc. 2. Manufacturers: a. Basalite Concrete Products, LLC. b. Eastside Masonry Products. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 04 20 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY c. Mutual Materials Company. d. Western Materials. e. White Block Company. B. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths as indicated on the drawings for specific locations. 2. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners, lintels, control joint edges, and other detailed conditions. a. Provide bullnose units for outside corners at the building interior, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, medium weight. a. Hollow block, as indicated. b. Exposed faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C129. a. Hollow block. b. Medium weight. 2.02 BRICK UNITS A. Regional Materials: Provide brick that has been manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site. B. Manufacturers: 1. Mutual Materials: www.mutualmaterials.com. 2. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. C. Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Type FBX, Grade SW. 1. Color: Blend of 50/50 Columbia red and ruby. 2. Texture: Smooth face. 3. Nominal size: As follows: a. BV- 1: 3-1/2 inches wide by 2-1/2 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long (Standard). 4. Special shapes: Molded units as required by conditions indicated, unless standard units can be sawn to produce equivalent effect. 5. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 6. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." 7. Compressive strength: As indicated on drawings, measured in accordance with ASTM C67. 2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Regional Materials: Provide aggregate for mortar and grout, cement, and lime that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I; color as required to produce approved color sample. 1. Not more than 0.60 percent alkali. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144. E. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404. F. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for mixing into mortar and complying with ASTM C979. 1. Color(s): To match existing. 2. Manufacturers: a. Davis Colors: www.daviscolors.com. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 04 20 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY b. Lambert Corporation: www.lambertusa.com. c. Solomon Colors: www.solomoncolors.com. d. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. G. Water: Clean and potable. H. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather. I. Integral Water Repellent Admixture for Mortar and Grout: Polymeric liquid admixture added to mortar and grout at the time of manufacture. 1. Use only in combination with masonry units manufactured with integral water repellent admixture. 2. Use only water repellent admixture for mortar and grout from the same manufacturer as water repellent admixture in masonry units. 3. Meet or exceed performance specified for water repellent admixture used in masonry units. 4. Locations of Use: Exposed exterior brick. 2.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors: 1. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand) 2. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com. 3. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60 (420) deformed billet bars; galvanized. C. Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry veneer and structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 1. Anchor Plates: Not less than 0.075 inch thick, designed for fastening to structural backup through sheathing by two fasteners; provide design with legs that penetrate sheathing and insulation to provide positive anchorage. 2. Wire Ties: Manufacturer's standard shape, 0.1875 inch thick. 3. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 2 inches. 4. Seismic Feature: Provide lip, hook, or clip on end of wire ties to engage or enclose not less than one continuous horizontal joint reinforcement wire of 0.1875 inch diameter. 5. Products: a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; DW-10HS with Seismiclip: www.h-b.com. b. Wire-Bond; RJ-711 with Wirebond clip: www.wirebond.com. c. Substitutions: C_Ibmit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.05 FLASHINGS A. Stainless Steel Flashing: ASTM A666, Type 304, soft temper; 26 gage (0.45 mm)thick; finish 2B to 2D. 1. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." 2. Fabricate through-wall flashing with drip edge unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. B. Lap Sealant: Silicone type as specified in Section 07 90 05. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material designed to fit sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall. Provide size and configuration as applicable to masonry width and conditions, fused joints. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Product#RS Series Rubber Control Joint: www.h-b.com. b. WIRE-BOND; Product Series 2900 Rubber Control Joint: www.wirebond.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 04 20 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY B. Cavity Mortar Control: Semi-rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh panels, sized to thickness of wall cavity, and designed to prevent mortar droppings from clogging weeps and cavity vents and allow proper cavity drainage. 1. Mortar Diverter: Panels designed for installation at flashing locations. a. Manufacturers: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Product Mortar Break II: www.advancedflashing.com. 2) Mortar Net USA, Ltd; Product Mortar Net: www.mortarnet.com. 3) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. C. Weeps: Cellular plastic. One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. 1. Manufacturers: a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Product Mortar Maze weep vent. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Product Quadro-Vent: www.h-b.com. c. WIRE-BOND; Product Cell Vent#3601: www.wirebond.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. D. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 1. Cleaners for Red and Dark-Colored Brick Not Subject to Metallic Staining: a. 200 Lime Solv; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. Masonry Cleaner Type R; Fabrikem Manufacturing Ltd. c. NMD 80; EaCo Chem Inc. d. Sure Klean 101 Lime Solvent; ProSoCo, Inc. 2. Cleaners for Concrete Masonry Units: a. 202V Vana-Stop; Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. Masonry Cleaner Type L; Fabrikem Manufacturing Ltd. c. NMD 80; EaCo Chem Inc. d. Heavy Duty Concrete Cleaner; ProSoCo, Inc. 3. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.07 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification. Use type S throughout. B. Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect's sample, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratio. C. Grout: ASTM C476. Consistency required to fill completely volumes indicated for grouting; fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less; coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches. D. Admixtures: Add to mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly. E. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. B. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 04 20 00 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY C. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. 3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. 3.04 COURSING A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. C. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Bond: Half Running. 2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. D. Brick Units: 1. Bond: Half Running, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches. 3. Mortar Joints: Concave. 3.05 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners,jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. C. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. D. Double strike head and bed joints. E. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. F. Remove excess mortar with water repellent admixture promptly. Do not use acids, sandblasting or high pressure cleaning methods. G. Interlock intersections and external corners. H. Provide smooth faced concrete masonry units where flashing or other elements overlap or abut split faced units. I. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. J. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. K. Cut mortar joints flush where resilient base is scheduled. L. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint. M. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks. 3.06 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS A. Install weeps in head joints in veneer walls at 24 inches on center horizontally above through- wall flashing, above shelf angles and lintels, at bottom of walls, and at tops of walls. 1. Use cellular plastic weep vents in open head joints to form weep holes. 3.07 CAVITY MORTAR CONTROL A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents. Project No 11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 04 20 00 -6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY B. Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity and at other flashing locations as recommended by manufacturer to prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents. 3.08 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE -GENERAL A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. 3.09 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE -SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 8 inches on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. E. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches on center. 3.10 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEER A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center. B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening. C. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing, concrete backup, and masonry backup with seismic masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Embed connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 2. Install a 6- inch by 6-inch diamond shaped patch of self-adhered membrane behind every masonry-veneer tie installed to sheathing. D. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls. E. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. F. Masonry Back-Up: Embed anchors to bond veneer at maximum 16 inches on center vertically and 24 inches on center horizontally. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 8 inches on center. G. Stud Back-Up: Secure veneer anchors to stud framed back-up and embed into masonry veneer at maximum 16 inches on center vertically and 24 inches on center horizontally. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 8 inches on center. H. Seismic Reinforcement: Connect veneer anchors with continuous horizontal wire reinforcement before embedding anchors in mortar. I. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches on center. 3.11 MASONRY FLASHINGS A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. 1. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under weather barrier, lapping at least 4 inches. 2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. 3. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 04 20 00 - 7 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY 4. Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar. B. Extend metal flashings through exterior face of masonry and turn down to form drip. Install joint sealer below drip edge to prevent moisture migration under flashing. C. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use cellular plastic weep/vents in open head joints to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3.12 GROUTED COMPONENTS A. Reinforce components as indicated on Structural Drawings. B. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters, unless otherwise indicated. C. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch of dimensioned position. D. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. E. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches either side of opening. 3.13 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. B. Install preformed control joint device designed to fit standard sash block in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Form expansion joints in brick using one of the following methods: 1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any. 2. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry. 3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers. D. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07 90 05 for sealant performance. E. Space control joints as follows, unless Drawings indicate closer spacing: 1. Concrete Masonry Units: 3 to 1, length to height. 30 foot maximum. 2. Concrete Masonry Veneer: 1 to 1, length to height. 20 foot maximum. 3. Structural Brick: 3 to 1, length to height. 30 foot maximum. 4. Brick Veneer: 3 to 1, length to height. 30 foot maximum. 3.14 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames, glazed frames, anchor bolts, and plates and other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections. B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line. C. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. 1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration. 3.15 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more. D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in two stories or more. E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft; 1/2 inch in 30 ft. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 04 20 00 -8 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. G. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch. 3.16 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for pipes, conduit, and sleeves. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the International Building Code. 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site- prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. C. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: Test each variety of concrete unit masonry in accordance with ASTM C140 for conformance to requirements of this specification. D. Mortar Tests: Test each type of mortar in accordance with ASTM C780, testing with same frequency as masonry samples. 3.18 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. D. Clean masonry with specified cleaners applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.19 PROTECTION A. Without damaging completed work, protect exposed external corners that are subject to damage by construction activities. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 04 20 00 - 9 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 04 72 00 CAST STONE MASONRY SECTION 04 72 00 CAST STONE MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Architectural cast stone. B. Units required are: 1. Exterior wall units, including lintels, sills, and surrounds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Installation of cast stone in conjunction with masonry. B. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers: Materials and execution methods for sealing soft joints in cast stone work. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International. B. ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. C. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. D. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. E. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. F. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. G. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. H. ASTM C1364 - Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Qualification Data: Documentation showing compliance with specified requirements. B. Product Data: Test results of cast stone components made previously by the manufacturer. C. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, dimensions, layouts, profiles, cross sections, reinforcement, exposed faces, arrangement of joints, anchoring methods, anchors, and piece numbers. D. Verification Samples: Pieces of actual cast stone components not less than 6 inches square, illustrating range of color and texture to be anticipated in components furnished for the project. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. A firm with a minimum of 5 years experience producing cast stone of types required for project. 2. Adequate plant capacity to furnish quality, sizes, and quantity of cast stone required without delaying progress of the work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver cast stone components secured to shipping pallets and protected from damage and discoloration. Protect corners from damage. B. Number each piece individually to match shop drawings and schedule. C. Store cast stone components and installation materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Store cast stone components on pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. Prevent contact with dirt. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 04 72 00 - 1 Printed 2/2212013 SECTION 04 72 00 CAST STONE MASONRY E. Protect cast stone components during handling and installation to prevent chipping, cracking, or other damage. F. Store mortar materials where contamination can be avoided. G. Schedule and coordinate production and delivery of cast stone components with unit masonry work to optimize on-site inventory and to avoid delaying the work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Architectural Cast Stone: 1. Arriscraft International. 2.02 ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE A. Cast Stone: Architectural concrete product manufactured to match appearance of existing precast window surrounds, complying with ASTM C1364. 1. Compressive Strength: As specified in ASTM C1364; calculate strength of pieces to be field cut at 80 percent of uncut piece. 2. Freeze-Thaw Resistance: Demonstrated by field experience. 3. Surface Texture: Fine grained texture, with no bugholes, air voids, or other surface blemishes visible from distance of 20 feet. 4. Color: Match existing. 5. Remove cement film from exposed surfaces before packaging for shipment. B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated on drawings. 1. Variation from Any Dimension, Including Bow, Camber, and Twist: Maximum of plus/minus 1/8 inch or length divided by 360, whichever is greater, but not more than 1/4 inch. 2. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, provide: a. Wash or slope of 1:12 on exterior horizontal surfaces. b. Drips on projecting components, wherever possible. c. Raised fillets at back of sills and at ends to be built in. C. Reinforcement: Provide reinforcement as required to withstand handling and structural stresses; comply with ACI 318. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150. 1. For Units: Type I, white as required to match existing. 2. For Mortar: Type I or II, except Type III may be used in cold weather. B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, except for gradation; granite, quartz, or limestone. C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33, except for gradation; natural or manufactured sands. D. Admixtures: ASTM C494/C494M. E. Water: Potable. F. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M deformed bars, galvanized or epoxy coated. G. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A185/A185M, galvanized or epoxy coated. H. Embedded Anchors, Dowels, and Inserts: Type 304 stainless steel, of type and size as required for conditions. I. Mortar: Portland cement-lime, ASTM C 270, Type N; do not use masonry cement. J. Sealant: As specified in Section 07 90 05. K. Cleaner: General-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other construction stains from new masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and by cleaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 04 72 00 - 2 Printed 2/222013 SECTION 04 72 00 CAST STONE MASONRY 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cast stone masonry units to sizes and profiles as indicated on Drawings. B. Fabricate Arris-cast units using the Vibrant Dry Tamp Casting method. C. Do not use dark mineral admixtures in surfaces intended to be exposed to view D. Alternately, cure units in a 95 percent moist environment at a minimum temperature of 70 degrees F for 16 hours after casting. E. Yard cure units for 350 degree-days prior to shipping. 2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Cross Section Dimensions: not deviating by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from approved dimensions. B. Length of Units: not deviating by more than L/360 or plus or minus 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, maximum plus or minus 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Length of any Unit: maximum 15 times the average thickness of the unit. D. Warp, Bow or Twist of Units: maximum L/360 or plus or minus 1/8 inch, whichever is greater. E. Location of Dowel Holes, Anchor Slots, Flashing Grooves, False Joints: maximum deviation as follows: 1. On Formed Sides of Unit: 1/8 inch, 2. On Unformed Sides of Unit: 3/8 inch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine construction to receive cast stone components. Notify Architect if construction is not acceptable. B. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install cast stone components in conjunction with masonry, complying with requirements of Section 04 20 00. B. Mechanically anchor cast stone units indicated; set remainder in mortar. C. Setting: 1. Drench cast stone components with clear, running water immediately before installation. 2. Set units in a full bed of mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fill vertical joints with mortar. 4. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots completely with mortar or non-shrink grout. D. Joints: Make all joints 3/8 inch, except as otherwise detailed. 1. Rake mortar joints 3/4 inch for pointing. 2. Remove excess mortar from face of stone before pointing joints. 3. Point joints with mortar in layers 3/8 inch thick and tool to a slight concave profile. 4. Leave the following joints open for sealant: a. Head joints in top courses, including copings, parapets, cornices, sills, and steps. b. Joints in projecting units. c. Joints between rigidly anchored units, including soffits, panels, and column covers. d. Joints below lugged sills and stair treads. e. Joints below ledge and relieving angles. f. Joints labeled "expansion joint". E. Sealant Joints: Install sealants as specified in Section 07 90 05. F. Installation Tolerances: 1. Variation from Plumb: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet or more. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 04 72 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 04 72 00 CAST STONE MASONRY 2. Variation from Level: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet or 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 3/8 inch maximum. 3. Variation in Joint Width: Not more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or 1/4 of nominal joint width, whichever is less. 4. Variation in Plane Between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Not more than 1/16 inch difference between planes of adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units. G. Repairs: Repair chips and other surface damage noticeable when viewed in direct daylight at 20 feet. 1. Repair with matching touchup material provided by the manufacturer and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Repair methods and results subject to Architect 's approval. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean completed exposed cast stone after mortar is thoroughly set and cured. 1. Wet surfaces with water before applying cleaner. 2. Apply cleaner to cast stone in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 4. Do not use acidic cleaners. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect completed work from damage. B. Clean, repair, or restore damaged or mortar-splashed work to condition of new work. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 04 72 00 -4 Printed 222/2013 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural steel framing members, support members. B. Steel columns. C. Steel purlins, beams and girders. D. Steel braces, struts and gusset plates. E. Steel edge angles, closures, stiffeners, continuity plates and shear tabs. F. Other steel framing and accessories. G. Shop and field welding. H. Field bolting. I. Base plates, shear stud connectors, anchor bolts, with nuts and washers. J. Grouting under base plates. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joist Framing. B. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking: Support framing for small openings in deck. C. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work. D. Section 09 96 00 - High-Performance Coatings: Primers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISC (MAN)- Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. B. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. C. AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts. D. ASTM A6/A6M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling. E. ASTM A36/A36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. F. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. G. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished. H. ASTM Al23/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. I. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. J. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. K. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric). L. ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat-Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. M. ASTM A490M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for Structural Steel Joints (Metric). N. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 12 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING O. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. P. ASTM A563M -Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts [Metric]. Q. ASTM A780 /A780M -Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot- Dip Galvanized Coatings. R. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. S. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). T. ASTM E94 - Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination. U. ASTM E164 - Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments. V. ASTM E165 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General Industry. W. ASTM E709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing. X. ASTM F436- Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. Y. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength. Z. ASTM F1852 - Standard Specification for"Twist Off'Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. AA. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society. AB. IAS AC172 -Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel; International Accreditation Service, Inc.. AC. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning. AD. SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning. AE. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning. AF. SSPC-SP 11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." B. Seismic-Load-Resisting System: Elements of structural-steel frame designated as "SLRS" or along grid lines designated as "SLRS" on Drawings, including columns, beams, and braces and their connections. C. Heavy Sections: Rolled and built-up sections as follows: 1. Shapes included in ASTM A6/A6M with flanges thicker than 1-1/2 inches. 2. Welded built-up members with plates thicker than 2 inches. 3. Column base plates thicker than 2 inches. D. Protected Zone: Structural members or portions of structural members indicated as "Protected Zone"on Drawings. Connections of structural and nonstructural elements to protected zones are limited. E. Demand Critical Welds: Those welds, the failure of which would result in significant degradation of the strength and stiffness of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System and which are indicated as "Demand Critical" or"Seismic Critical" on Drawings. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. B. Shop Drawings/Erection Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 12 00 -2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. 5. Identify members and connections of the seismic-load-resisting system. 6. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones. 7. Identify demand critical welds. C. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Mill Test Reports: Indicate structural strength, destructive test analysis and non-destructive test analysis. 1. Structural steel. 2. Bolts, nuts and washers. E. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. F. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is accredited under IAS AC172. G. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual." B. Comply with Section 10 of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"for architecturally exposed structural steel. C. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of documented experience. D. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC172). E. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of documented experience. F. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in Oregon. G. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification. 2. Certify to WABO Standard No. 27-13 "WABO Welder and Welding Operator Performance Qualification Standard." 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. See General Structural Notes in Drawings for specification and grade of framing members. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 12 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. C. Steel Angles, Plates, Channels, S Shapes, M Shapes, and HP Shapes: ASTM A36/A36M. D. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A992/A992M, Grade 50. E. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M, Grade 50. F. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B, 46 ksi. G. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, Finish black and galvanized, as indicated. H. Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A 108 Grade 1015 bars, unless otherwise indicated. I. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade A. J. High-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, medium carbon, galvanized. K. High-Strength Structural Bolts: ASTM A490 (ASTM A490M), with matching ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M) nuts and ASTM F436 washers; Type 1 alloy steel. L. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, plain, with matching ASTM A563 or A563M nuts and ASTM F436 Type 1 washers, unless otherwise indicated. M. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, plain, unless otherwise indicated. N. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F1852, Type 1, round head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. Finish: Plain. O. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. P. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A108, Grade 1035. Q. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A108, Grade 1030. R. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A108, Grade 1018. S. Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic aggregate type, complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M and capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 5,000 psi at 28 days. T. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: 1. Concealed Interior Steel in Non-Corrosive Environments: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Exposed Interior Surfaces: Either Tnemec Series 27 Typoxy WB at 3 to 4 mils DFT or primer specified in Section 09 96 00 - High-Performance Coatings. U. Primer and Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Either Tnemec Series 27 Typoxy WB at 2 to 2.5 mils or primer specified in Section 09 96 00 - High-Performance Coatings, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"and AISC 360. 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A6/A6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop- priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1 M. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 12 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC- SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS Dl.1/D1.1 M and manufacturer's written instructions. G. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. H. Space shear stud connectors as indicated on the drawings. I. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth. J. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors. 2.03 FINISH A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. Hold back is not required for Tnemec Series 394. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. Hold back is not required for Tnemec Series 394. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). Hold back is not required for Tnemec Series 394. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. Concealed Interior Steel in Non-Corrosive Environments: SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning." 2. Exposed Interior Surfaces: SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. Exterior Steel and Steel in Corrosive Environments: SSPC-SP 6, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." C. Preparing Galvanized Steel for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean steel of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner. 1. Clean surfaces of weld seams according to SSPC-SP11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal" unless otherwise recommended by coating manufacturer for substrate and exposure conditions. D. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. E. Galvanize all exterior structural steel members to comply with ASTM A123/A123M. Provide minimum 1.85 oz/sq ft galvanized coating. 1. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work unless they will function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 12 00 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 2. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94. E. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows: 1. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360- degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Field weld components and shear studs indicated on shop drawings. D. Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless otherwise specifically permitted on drawings. Install high-strength bolts in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". E. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond- reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 12 00 -6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 3. Pretension anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. F. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." G. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. H. Splice members only where indicated. I. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Engineer. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. J. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. K. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. L. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.03 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts"for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"for mill material. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. Refer to Structural Drawings for Special Inspection Program. B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 12 00 - 7 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94. D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1 M for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.06 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 1. Repair galvanizing prior to installation where repair areas will be inaccessible. 2. Clean surfaces of weld seams according to SSPC-SP111, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal." B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 12 00 - 8 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 21 00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING SECTION 05 21 00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Open web steel joists, with bridging, attached seats and anchors, including the following: 1. Long-span steel joists. 2. Joist accessories. B. Loose bearing members, such as plates or angles, and anchor bolts for site placement. C. Supplementary framing for roof openings greater than 18 inches. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Superstructure framing. B. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking: Support framing for openings less than 18 inches in decking. C. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Non-framing steel fabrications attached to joists. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A36/A36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. B. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished. C. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. D. ASTM A325- Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. E. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric). F. ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. G. ASTM E94- Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination. H. ASTM E164 - Standard Practice for Contact Ultrasonic Testing of Weldments. I. ASTM E165- Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General Industry. J. ASTM E709- Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing. K. AWS D1.1/D1.1M -Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society. L. IAS AC172 -Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel; International Accreditation Service, Inc. M. SJI (SPEC) - Catalog of Standard Specifications and Load Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel Joist Institute. N. SJI Technical Digest No. 9 - Handling and Erection of Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel Joist Institute. O. SSPC-Paint 20 -Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings. P. SSPC-Paint 25 -Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel, Type I and Type II; Society for Protective Coatings. Q. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings. R. SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design steel joist framing, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 21 00 - 1 Printed 2122/2013 SECTION 05 21 00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING B. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads indicated. C. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live load deflections no greater than the following: 1. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/240- DL+LL, 1/360 - LL of the span. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate standard designations,joist coding, configurations, sizes, spacings, cambers, locations of joists,joist leg extensions, bridging, connections, and attachments. 1. Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction. 2. Coordinate with mechanical equipment for location of bridging. 3. Coordinate duct penetrations through joist webs where required. 4. Coordinate duct penetrations through joist bridging and provide alternate bridging details where required. 5. Include accurate erection drawings indicating location of each differing size or style of joist. Indicate location of all temporary erection bracing and permanent bracing for all joists. Show identification markings as stamped on joists on erection drawings. 6. If joists require splice connections, detail and location must be submitted for approval prior to fabrication. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For steel joist framing indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Submit submittals as "Deferred Submittals" in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. Transmit a copy of each submittal indicating agency approval to the Architect for record. C. Welders' Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificates, certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. D. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is accredited under IAS AC172. E. Shop Weld Inspection Reports: Submit copies of shop weld inspection reports for inspections required by SJI. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables of S.11 "Specifications." 1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing special joists to comply with performance requirements. B. SJI Specifications: Comply with standard specifications in SJI's "Specifications"that are applicable to types of joists indicated. C. Perform Work, including that for headers and other supplementary framing, in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications Load Tables and SW Technical Digest No.9. D. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC172). E. Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1. Certify to WABO Standard No. 27-13 "WABO Welder and Welding Operator Performance Qualification Standard." 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products to SJI requirements. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 21 00 -2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 21 00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Joists: 1. Canam Group Inc: www.canam-steeljoist.ws 2. Nucor-Vulcraft Group: www.vulcraft.com. 3. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications"for web and steel-angle chord members. 1. Recycled Content: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. B. Steel Bearing Plates: ASTM A36/A36M. C. Open Web Joists: Types as indicated on the drawings: 1. Minimum End Bearing on Steel Supports: Comply with referenced SJI standards. 2. Finish: Shop primed. 3. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists. 4. Camber long-span steel joists as indicated. 5. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches. D. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain, uncoated. E. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers:ASTM A325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436 hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. F. Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A 108 Grade 1015 bars. G. Structural Steel For Supplementary Framing and Joist Leg Extensions: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Supply ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch of finished wall surface, unless otherwise indicated. H. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's"Specifications"for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. I. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist installation. J. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. K. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, zinc oxide, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. L. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Frame special sized openings in joist web framing as detailed. 2.04 FINISH A. Shop prime joists as specified. 1. Galvanize steel ledge angles. B. Prepare surfaces to be finished in accordance with SSPC-SP 2. C. Apply two coats of primer to areas inaccessible after erection, changing color of second coat. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 21 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 21 00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide shop testing of steel components in accordance with SJI requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 ERECTION A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications,"joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section. 1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Splice connections are to be submitted to the Architect for approval as indicated in Paragraph 1.5 Submittals above. 3. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 4. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are stabilized during construction. 5. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until dead loads have been applied. C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. D. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams. E. Erect joists with correct bearing on supports. F. Allow for erection loads. Provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain framing safe, plumb, and in true alignment. G. Coordinate the placement of anchors for securing loose bearing members furnished as part of the work of this section. H. Position and field weld joist chord extensions and wall attachments as detailed. I. Install supplementary framing for roof openings greater than 18 inches. J. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced bridged, and secured or until completion of erection and installation of permanent bridging and bracing. K. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of joist manufacturer. L. After erection, prime welds, damaged shop primer, and surfaces not shop primed. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports. Refer to Structural Drawings for Special Inspection Program. B. Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 21 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 21 00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING C. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following procedures, as applicable: 1. Radiographic Testing: ASTM E94. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709. 3. Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E164. 4. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165. D. Bolted connections will be visually inspected. E. High-strength, field-bolted connections will be tested and verified according to procedures in RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts." F. Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in compliance with specified requirements. G. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. 3.05 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, bearing plates, abutting structural steel, and accessories. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3. 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 21 00 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING SECTION 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Acoustical roof deck. B. Roof deck. C. Supplementary framing for openings up to and including 18 inches. D. Bearing plates and angles. E. Acoustical insulation in roof deck flutes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 -Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete topping over metal deck. B. Section 05 12 00-Structural Steel Framing: Support framing for openings larger than 18 inches and shear stud connectors. C. Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joist Framing: Support framing for openings larger than 18 inches and shear stud connectors. D. Section 07 54 00 - Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: Installation of acoustic insulation in acoustic roof deck. E. Section 09 96 00 - High-Performance Coatings: Primers for steel decking. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. B. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. C. ASTM Al23/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. E. ASTM A780/A780M - 09 Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot- Dip Galvanized Coatings. F. ASTM C423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. G. AWS Dl.1/D1.1 M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society. H. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel;American Welding Society. I. IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel; International Accreditation Service, Inc. J. SDI (DM) - Publication No.31, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks; Steel Deck Institute. K. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; The Society for Protective Coatings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, reinforcement, pertinent details, and accessories. B. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and finishes. 1. For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 31 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING D. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is accredited under IAS AC172. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC172). B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 5 years of experience. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." D. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." E. FMG Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FMG and listed in its "Approval Guide, Building Materials"for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation. B. Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Deck: 1. ASC Profiles, Inc.: www.ascsd.com. 2. Canam Steel Corporation: www.canam-steeljoists.ws. 3. Epic Metals Corporation: www.epicmetals.com. 4. Nucor-Vulcraft Group: www.vulcraft.com. 5. Verco Manufacturing Co.: vercodeck.com 6. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. a. Proposed substitutions must demonstrate equivalent structural performance as specified products. Any and all costs, including, but not limited to, upsizing of deck support members and redesign fees by Architect will be solely the financial responsibility of the manufacturer of the substituted product. 2.02 STEEL DECK A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. B. Acoustical Roof Deck: Non-composite type, steel sheet with plain vertical flute faces and perforated holes in the bottom flat areas between ribs. Perforations to be of size and spacing as required to meet specified acoustical performance. 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade as indicated, with G90/Z275 galvanized coating. 2. Primer: Shop coat of manufacturer's standard primer paint over cleaned and phosphatized substrate. 3. Structural Properties: As indicated on drawings. 4. Minimum Metal Thickness: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 5. Nominal Height: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 6. Profile: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 7. Side Joints: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 8. End Joints: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 9. Acoustic Insulation: Fill ribs with mineral or glass fiber liner cut to the shape of the ribs. Provide acoustical liner that is inert and vermin proof. a. Support sound absorbing elements above the surface of the deck with corrosion resistant spacers to facilitate field painting without degrading acoustical performance. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 31 00 -2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING b. Installation of insulation is Work of Division 07 roofing Sections. 10. Acoustical Performance: NRC 0.95 tested according to ASTM C423. 11. Products: As indicated on Structural Drawings. C. Roof Deck: Non-composite type, fluted steel sheet: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade as indicated on Structural Drawings, with G90/Z275 galvanized coating. 2. Primer: Shop coat of manufacturer's standard primer paint over cleaned and phosphatized substrate. a. Provide shop coat of primer compatible with high performance coatings for deck exposed to view at exterior applications. 3. Structural Properties: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 4. Minimum Metal Thickness: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 5. Nominal Height: As indicated by product designation on Structural Drawings. 6. Nominal Height: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 7. Profile: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 8. Side Joints: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 9. End Joints: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 10. Products: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws. C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter. D. Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, 1 inch thick; profiled to fit tight to the deck. 1. At acoustical deck applications, provide neoprene rubber air dams in underside of ribs and in the larger topside cell at perpendicular conditions. Provide manufacturer's recommended air dams for parallel conditions. E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile indicated. G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, Deck Profile Closures and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated. H. Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with floor deck. I. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, with factory-punched hole of 3/8- inch minimum diameter. J. Flat Sump Plate: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field. K. Cant Strips: Formed sheet steel, gage to match deck minimum, 45 degree slope, 3-1/2 inch nominal width and height, flange for attachment. L. Bearing Plates and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M steel, galvanized per ASTM A 123/A 123M. M. Stud Shear Connectors: Made from ASTM A 108 Grade 1015 bars. N. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1. O. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: 1. Concealed Interior Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 31 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING 2. Exposed Interior Surfaces: Either Tnemec Series 115 Uni-Bond DF at 2 mils DFT or primer specified in Section 09 96 00 - High-Performance Coatings. P. Primer and Touch-Up Primer for Exposed Galvanized Surfaces: Either Tnemec Series 27 Typoxy WB at 2 to 2.5 mils or primer specified in Section 09 96 00 - High-Performance Coatings, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. Q. Acoustical Insulation: Glass fiber type, minimum 1.1 lb/cu ft density; profiled to suit deck. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions and requirements in this Section. Align and level. B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations. C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks. E. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. F. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. G. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. 1. Fasten deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle)welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less the 1-1/2 inches long and as follows: a. Weld Diameter: 3/4 inch nominal, unless otherwise indicated. b. Weld Spacing: As indicated on Structural Drawings. c. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location. H. On concrete and masonry surfaces provide minimum 4 inch bearing. I. On steel supports provide minimum 1-1/2 inch bearing. J. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports at spacing indicated on Structural Drawings. 1. Welding: Use fusion welds through weld washers. 2. Place and secure special deep fluted sections for integral concrete bridging. K. Clinch lock seam side laps. L. At mechanically fastened male/female side laps fasten at 24 inches on center maximum. M. At welded male/female side laps weld at 18 inches on center maximum. N. Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3. O. At deck openings from 6 inches to 18 inches in size, provide 2 x 2 x 1/4 inch steel angle reinforcement. Place angles perpendicular to flutes; extend minimum two flutes beyond each side of opening and fusion weld to deck at each flute. P. Where deck changes direction, install 6 inch minimum wide sheet steel cover plates, of same thickness as deck. Fusion weld 12 inches on center maximum. Q. Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Project No 11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 31 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING R. At floor edges, install concrete stops upturned to top surface of slab, to contain wet concrete. Provide stops of sufficient strength to remain stationary without distortion. 1. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck. S. At openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings, provide sheet steel closures and angle flashings to close openings. T. Close openings above walls and partitions perpendicular to deck flutes with single row of foam cell closures, unless otherwise detailed. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure. 1. At exterior applications, provide expanded polystyrene insulation infill cut to fit deck profile between foam rubber closures as detailed a. Install sheet metal closure cut to fit profile of deck outboard of foam closures. b. All closure elements are to be cut to fit tight to the deck profile. U. Position roof drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each deck flute. V. Weld stud shear connectors through steel deck to structural members below. W. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. 3.04 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint. 1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom surfaces of deck exposed to view. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 31 00 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formed steel stud exterior wall and interior wall framing, including the following: 1. Exterior load-bearing wall framing. 2. Interior load-bearing wall framing. 3. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 4. Z-Furring for support of exterior finishes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 20 01 - Masonry Veneer: Veneer masonry supported by wall stud metal framing. B. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking. C. Section 07 21 00 -Thermal Insulation: Insulation within framing members. D. Section 07 25 00 -Weather Barriers: Weather barrier over sheathing. E. Section 07 42 13 - Metal Wall Panels: Coordination of placement of Z-furring behind metal wall panels. F. Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies: Lightweight, non-load bearing metal stud framing. G. Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies: Exterior structural wall sheathing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced SG-971) B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. C. ASTM A780/A780M - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. D. ASTM A1003/A1003M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members. E. ASTM 8117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog)Apparatus. F. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products. G. ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases. H. ASTM C1007 - Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories. I. ASTM C1513 - Standard Specification for Steel Tapping Screws for Cold-Formed Steel Framing Connections; 2012. J. AWS D1.1/D1.1M -Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society. K. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; American Welding Society. L. SFIA- Steel Framing Industry Association. M. SSMA- Steel Stud Manufacturers Association. N. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic,"and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 40 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate with work of other sections that is to be installed in or adjacent to the metal framing system, including but not limited to structural anchors, cladding anchors, utilities, insulation, and firestopping. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product criteria, limitations. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, welds, and type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related work. 1. Indicate stud and ceiling joist layout. 2. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for bolted framing connections. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Submit submittals as "Deferred Submittals". Transmit a copy of each submittal indicating agency approval to the Architect for record. 2. Provide calculations for loadings and stresses of specially fabricated framing, stamped by a Professional Structural Engineer. 3. Provide details and calculations for factory-made framing connectors, stamped by a Professional Structural Engineer. D. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests for current products: 1. Vertical deflection clips. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design framing system under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in Oregon. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, and with minimum 5 years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years of experience. D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 1. Certify to WABO Standard No. 27-13 "WABO Welder and Welding Operator Performance Qualification Standard." E. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." 1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing -Truss Design." 2. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C754 for conditions indicated. All products to be manufactured by current members of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA) or the Steel Framing Industry Association (SFIA). B. Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: 1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems: www.clarkdietrich.com Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 40 00 -2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 2. Marino: www.marinoware.com. 3. SCAFCO Corporation: www.scafco.com. 4. Steeler, Inc: www.steeler.com. 5. The Steel Network, Inc: www.SteelNetwork.com. 6. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 FRAMING SYSTEM A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips, fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system. B. Refer to SSMA standard for identification of cold-formed metal section sizes. SFIA members shall provide equivalent sizes while maintaining the same depth, flange and/or leg width. C. Design Criteria: Provide completed framing system having the following characteristics: 1. Delegated Design: Design cold-formed metal framing, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 2. Design: Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed steel framing members according to AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 3. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and erect to withstand specified design loads for project conditions within required limits. 4. Design Loads: As indicated on the drawings. 5. Live load deflection meeting the following, unless otherwise indicated: a. Floors: Maximum vertical deflection under live load of 1/240 of span. b. Roofs: Maximum vertical deflection under live load of 1/240 of span. c. Exterior Walls: Maximum horizontal deflection under wind load of 1/240 of span. d. Exterior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height for siding applications and 1/600 of the wall height for masonry veneer applications. e. Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height under a horizontal load of 5 Ibflsq. ft. f. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height for siding applications and 1/600 of the wall height for masonry veneer applications. g. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span. h. Design non-axial loadbearing framing to accommodate not less than 1/2 in vertical deflection. 6. Able to tolerate movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. 7. Able to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. 2.03 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Studs and Track: ASTM C955; studs formed to channel, "C", or"Sigma" shape with punched web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness (Gage)and depth: As indicated on the drawings. 2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M G90/Z275 coating. B. Z-Furring and Strapping: Z-furring members of depths indicated on drawings, 0.052 inch, 18 gage, with minimum ASTM A653/A653M G185 coating. For all attachment devices exterior to weather-resistive barrier or dampproofing, comply with the following: 1. Screws: #10 size, coated with Leland Industries DT2000 plating system to achieve at least 2000 hours of corrosion resistance to rust per ASTM 8117. 2. Low-velocity power-driven fasteners, expansion anchors, screw anchors and threaded rods to be Type 316, SAE 316 stainless steel able to achieve at least 1000 hours of corrosion resistance to rust per ASTM B117. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 40 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 3. Provide 2-inch wide, 0.052 inch, 18 gage strapping of with same coating for attachment of metal wall panels. C. Framing Connectors: Factory-made formed steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M SS Grade 50, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating and factory punched holes. 1. Structural Performance: Maintain load and movement capacity required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members; minimum 16 gage, 0.06 inch thickness. 2. Movement Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate movement using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, while maintaining structural performance of framing. Provide movement connections where indicated on drawings. a. Where continuous studs bypass elevated floor slab, connect stud to slab in manner allowing vertical and horizontal movement of slab without affecting studs; allow for minimum movement of 1/2 inch. b. Where top of stud wall terminates below structural floor or roof, connect studs to structure in manner allowing vertical and horizontal movement of slab without affecting studs; allow for minimum movement of 1/2 inch. c. Provide top track preassembled with connection devices spaced to fit stud spacing indicated on drawings; minimum track length of 12 feet. d. Acceptable Products: VertiClip(r) or DriftClip(tm) manufactured by The Steel Network Inc. 3. Provide non-movement connections for tie-down to foundation, floor-to-floor tie-down, roof-to-wall tie-down,joist hangers, gusset plates, and stiffeners. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A1003/A1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. 9. Joist hangers and end closures. 10. Hole reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates. C. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; finish to match framing components. D. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed Sheet Steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; finish to match framing components. E. Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch. 1. Provide in widths to allow material to extend a minimum of 2-1/2 inches beyond the face of the stud track on both sides. 2. Product: Grace Construction Products; Vycor V40 Self-Adhered Flashing. F. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 40 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 2.05 FASTENERS A. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws. 1. Screws at Load Bearing Walls and Exterior Walls: a. Alco Dril-Flex b. Hilti Kwik-Flex c. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Anchorage Devices: Powder actuated. C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify field measurements and adjust installation as required. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. B. Install sill gasket under stud track of framed walls bearing on foundations; puncture gasket cleanly to fit tightly around protruding anchor bolts. Prime surfaces as required for proper adhesion. 1. Provide sill gasket in width as required to extend a minimum of 2-1/2 inches beyond both sides of sill plate. Protect adhesive surfaces of extensions for future attachment to weather-resistive barrier(WRB) and interior vapor retarder. 2. Provide 3-inch minimum, laps between lengths of gasket material. 3. Firmly roll sill gasket after installation. C. Install sill gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF STUDS A. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions"and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ASTM C 1007 requirements. C. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. D. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. F. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 40 00 - 5 Ponied 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING G. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall layout. Secure in place with fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks. H. Place studs at 16 inches on center; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using clip and tie method. I. Install glass fiber batt insulation inside box headers and similar closed frame members. Coordinate with Work of Section 07 21 00 -Thermal Insulation. J. Construct corners using minimum of three studs. Install double studs at wall openings, door and window jambs. K. Install load bearing studs full length in one piece. Splicing of studs is not permitted. L. Install load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength and achieve design requirements. M. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection. N. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing. O. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load bearing framing. P. Attach cross studs to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls. Q. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation. R. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. 3.04 LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings indicated. B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as indicated. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb-walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations. D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. E. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing canrot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated. G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates. 1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads. 2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs. H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support windows, doors, fixtures, equipment, services, casework, shelving, heavy trim, furnishings, door holders and similar work requiring attachment to framing. 1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported. I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced 48 inches, unless otherwise indicated. Fasten at each stud intersection. Prgect No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 40 00 - 6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with a minimum of 2 screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches deep. J. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system. 3.05 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as indicated. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing studs and anchor to building structure. 3. Connect drift clips to cold formed metal framing and anchor to building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. a. Install solid blocking at centers indicated on Shop Drawings. 2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF Z-FURRING A. Verify that weather-resistive barriers have been fully installed as applicable. 1. Install a 6-inch by 6-inch diamond shaped patch of self-adhered membrane behind each fastener through weather-resistant barrier. B. Install Z-furring vertically behind metal wall panels as indicated. Coordinate spacing and layout of Z-furring with installers of exterior insulation and cladding. 1. Install at 16 inches on center, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Refer to applicable wall types for maximum spacing. 3. Install strapping as indicated. 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 40 00 - 7 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.09 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780 and manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 40 00 - 8 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated and manufactured steel and aluminum, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Metal ladders. 2. Metal ships' ladders. 3. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards. 4. Metal bollards. 5. Ledge angles, shelf angles, channels and plates not attached to structural framing. 6. Lintels. 7. Door frames for overhead doors. 8. Steel framing and supports for overhead grilles. 9. Pipe downspouts. 10. Steel framed canopies. 11. Steel handrails. 12. Enclosure gates. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete. B. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry. C. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Structural steel column anchor bolts and related structural steel elements. D. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Paint finish and metal primers for use for shop primers. E. Section 09 96 00 - High-Performance Coatings: Coating finish and metal primers for use for shop primers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ALI A14.3 -American Ladder Institute. B. ASTM A36/A36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. C. ASTM Al23/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. D. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. E. ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates. F. ASTM A325- Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. G. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric). H. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. I. ASTM A780/A780M - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. J. ASTM A786/A786M - Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates; 2005. K. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 50 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS L. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]. M. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. N. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]. O. ASTM B429/B 429M - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. P. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. Q. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink). R. ASTM D1187 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. S. ASTM F1941 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings on Threaded Fasteners (Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN/UNR)). T. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society. U. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society. V. AWS Dl.2/D1.2M - Structural Welding Code -Aluminum; American Welding Society. W. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings. X. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings. Y. SSPC-SP 11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Metal nosings. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 1. Prepare shop drawings from field measurements where possible. 2. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. E. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design handrails and ladders, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance of Ladders: Ladders shall withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ALI A14.3. C. Structural Performance of Railings: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ft. applied in any direction. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 50 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS Dl.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code -Aluminum." 3. Certify to WABO Standard No. 27-13 "WABO Welder and Welding Operator Performance Qualification Standard." 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Transport, handle, store and protect products with special custom wrapping and handling procedures to protect and touch-up shop primers at every stage of shipping. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS -STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. C. Plates: ASTM A 283. D. Fasteners: Provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade and class required. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M where connecting galvanized components. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded. G. Shop and Touch-Up Primer for Exterior Ferrous Metal: Either Tnemec Series 27 Typoxy WB at 3 to 4 mils DFT or primer specified in Section 09 96 00 - High-Performance Coatings, complying with VOC limitations specified in Section 09 96 00. 1. Manufacturer's standard fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer can be used only at the specific elements listed in the FINISHES - STEEL Article. H. Primer and Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Either Tnemec Series 27 Typoxy WB at 2 to 2.5 mils or primer specified in Section 09 96 00- High-Performance Coatings, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 MATERIALS -ALUMINUM A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper, 6061 alloy, T6 Temper, or 6005 alloy, T5 temper, as standard with manufacturer. B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209(ASTM B209M), 5052 alloy, H32 or H22 temper or 5005 alloy, H34 temper, as standard with manufacturer. C. Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B429/B429M, Alloy 6063-T6, standard weight, Schedule 40 pipe, unless otherwise required to meet performance requirements. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 50 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS D. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel. E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.2/D1.2M; type required for materials being welded. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187. B. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications. C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. D. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete for normal- weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Use materials of size and thickness indicated or, if not indicated, as required to produce strength and durability in finished product for intended use and, where applicable, to meet performance requirements. C. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. D. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. E. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. F. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. G. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. 1. Provide anchor bolts for connecting to other work. a. Drill and tap steel as required to receive bolted connections. b. Make bolt holes 1/16 inch larger than nominal bolt diameter. 2. Do not furnish bolts with threads within shear plane of the bolt. H. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.05 METAL LADDERS A. Fixed Access Ladders: Aluminum; with mounting brackets and attachments; mill finish. 1. Side Rails: a. Aluminum channel (6005-T5) b. 2 1/2" x 1 1/16" x 1/8" c. 1/8" molded polyurethane safety capes provided at top. 2. Rungs: a. Extruded aluminum (6005-T5) b. 2 1/4"x 3/4"x 1/4" 3. Space rungs 7 inches from wall surface with 2"x 3"x 1/4" aluminum brackets to support rails. 4. Walk-Thru: a. 1 1/4" aluminum square tube. b. 4" x 4"x 1/4"aluminum mounting brackets c. Extend 42"above top rung. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 50 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 5. Products: a. UPNOVR Model U-100: www.upnovr.com. b. Alaco Ladder Company; Product Model 563: www.alacoladder.com. c. O'Keeffes, Inc; Product Model 500: www.okeeffes.com. d. Precision Ladders, LLC; Model FL Fixed Vertical Ladder: www.precisionladders.com. e. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Low Parapet Fixed Access Ladder with Platform and Return: Aluminum; with mounting brackets and attachments; mill finish. 1. Side Rails: a. Aluminum channel (6005-T5) b. 2 1/2"x 1 1/16"x 1/8" c. 1/8" molded polyurethane safety capes provided at top. 2. Rungs: a. Extruded aluminum (6005-T5) b. 2 1/4"x 3/4"x 1/4" 3. Space rungs 7 inches from wall surface with 2" x 3"x 1/4" aluminum brackets to support rails. 4. Walk-Thru: a. 1 1/4"aluminum square tube. b. 4"x 4"x 1/4" aluminum mounting brackets c. Extend 42"above top rung. 5. Products: a. UPNOVR Model U-203: www.upnovr.com. b. Alaco Ladder Company; Product Model 563: www.alacoladder.com. c. O'Keeffes, Inc; Product Model 503: www.okeeffes.com. d. Precision Ladders, LLC; Model FL-06 Fixed Vertical Ladder: www.precisionladders.com. e. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.06 2.07 METAL SHIPS' LADDERS A. Provide aluminum ships' ladders where indicated. Fabricate of open-type construction with channel or plate stringers and pipe and tube railings unless otherwise indicated. Provide brackets and fittings for installation. 1. Stringers: Minimum 2 x 6 x 1/8 inch channel stringers. 2. Treads: Manufacturer's standard nonslip extruded-aluminum-alloy serrated treads. 3. Ladder Width: 24 inches. 4. Railings: Minimum 1-1/4 inch Schedule 40 aluminum pipe. a. Comply with applicable railing requirements in Performance Requirements Article. 5. Confirm angle of incline prior to fabrication. 6. Products For Ladders Serving Access Hatches: a. UPNOVR Model U-502: www.unovr.com. b. Alaco Ladder Company; Product Model 370: www.alacoladder.com. c. O'Keeffes, Inc; Product Model 523: www.okeeffes.com. d. Precision Ladders, LLC; Model SL Aluminum Ship's Ladder to Roof Hatch: www.precisionladders.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.08 METAL BOLLARDS A. Door Bollards: ASTM A500, Grade B HSS 4 by 4 by 1/4 inch steel tube. 1. Cap bollards with 1/4 inch thick steel plate, fully welded and ground smooth. Galvanize after fabrication. Project No 11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 50 00 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of metal decking,joists, and masonry; prime paint finish. B. Lintels: As detailed; galvanized finish. 1. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. C. Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings: Channel sections; prime paint finish. D. Overhead Door and Grille Supports: Fabricate supports for overhead doors and grilles from steel of sizes and shapes recommended by door manufacturer and with attached anchors as recommended by door manufacturer. 2.10 PIPE DOWNSPOUTS A. Provide downspouts fabricated from galvanized steel pipe in sizes indicated on drawings. Provide anchorage devices as detailed. Prime finish. 2.11 STEEL FRAMED CANOPIES A. Fabricate steel framed canopies from steel shapes as detailed. B. Galvanize all members after fabrication. 2.12 STEEL HANDRAILS A. Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Fabricate with butt joints welded and ground smooth or weld with manufactured internal fittings, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. C. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. D. Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. 2.13 ENCLOSURE GATES A. Fabricate steel fence from structural shapes as detailed. B. Galvanize after fabrication. 2.14 FINISHES -STEEL A. Galvanize and prime paint all exterior steel items. B. Prime paint all steel items. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete and items to be imbedded in masonry. C. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2 where indicated to receive manufacturer's standard primer. D. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP6 where indicated to receive high- performance coating finish. E. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. F. Prime Painting: One coat of specified primer applied in strict accordance with primer manufacturer's instructions: G. Galvanizing: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 50 00 -6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 2.15 FINISHES -ALUMINUM A. Mechanical Finish: AA-M12 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated). B. Exterior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I natural anodized. C. Interior Aluminum Surfaces: Class I natural anodized. 2.16 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors. C. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. D. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. E. Field weld components indicated. F. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. G. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. H. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers'written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 50 00 - 7 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 3.05 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.06 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A. Door Bollards: Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing. 1. Coordinate with Work of Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware for installation of door stops. B. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 6 inches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. C. Pipe Bollards: Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water where indicated. 3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780. 1. Clean surfaces of weld seams according to SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal." 3.08 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 05 50 00 - 8 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roofing nailers. B. Fire retardant treated wood materials. C. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports. D. Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 54 23 Thermoplastic-Polyolefin Roofing: Roofing membrane over sheathing. B. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Coping and Sill fleshings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM Al53/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware. B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process C. ASTM D2898 - Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing. D. ASTM E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood;American Wood Protection Association. F. PS 20 -American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce). G. WCLIB (GR) - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber No. 17; West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. H. WWPA G-5 -Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide technical data on application instructions and fire-treatment. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch or Douglas Fir, unless otherwise indicated. 2. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 3. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org)and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A. Grading Agency: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 06 10 00- 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY B. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). C. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. D. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. E. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. B. Die-Stamped Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. 1. For contact with preservative treated wood in exposed locations, provide minimum G185 galvanizing per ASTM A653/A653M. C. Sill Flashing: As specified in Section 07 62 00. 2.04 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating compliance with specified requirements. B. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Exterior Type: AWPA U1, Category UCFB, Commodity Specification H, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes both before and after accelerated weathering test performed in accordance with ASTM 02898. a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. b. Do not use treated wood in direct contact with the ground. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections. 3.02 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. 3.03 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fire blocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking. C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 06 10 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY D. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. E. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated. F. Specifically, provide the following non-structural framing and blocking: 1. Cabinets and shelf supports. 2. Wall brackets. 3. Handrails. 4. Grab bars. 5. Towel and bath accessories. 6. Wall-mounted door stops. 7. Chalkboards and marker boards. 8. Wall paneling and trim. 9. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs. 3.04 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation. B. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. C. Provide nailers as required for a complete roofing assembly. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 06 10 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Plastic laminate window sills. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 41 00 -Architectural Wood Casework: Shop fabricated plastic laminate custom cabinet work. B. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Sealants used at juncture of different materials. C. Section 09 00 01 - Finish Legend: Color and finish selections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) -Architectural Woodwork Standards. B. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association. C. PS 1 - Structural Plywood. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with installation of associated and adjacent components. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. For installation adhesives, include printed statement of VOC content. 2. For each composite-wood product used, provide documentation indicating that the bonding agent contains no urea formaldehyde. 3. For each adhesive used, provide documentation indicating that the adhesive contains no urea formaldehyde. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods,jointing details, and accessories. 1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot. 2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards. C. Samples: 1. Submit 2 samples of each plastic laminate color specified. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. B. Formaldehyde Free Panel Products: Provide fiberboard, particleboard and plywood products made with binders and adhesives containing no urea formaldehyde. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials in interior, ventilated location under constant minimum temperature of 60 degrees F and minimum relative humidity of 55 percent. B. Protect work from moisture damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Custom Grade. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 06 20 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide materials having fire and smoke properties as required by applicable code. 2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.03 SHEET MATERIALS A. Softwood Plywood Not Exposed to View: Any face species, veneer core; PS 1 Grade A-B; glue type as recommended for application. 2.04 PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIALS A. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL) PL-1: NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific applications. 1. Provide specific types as follows: a. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness. b. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch nominal thickness. B. Laminate Backing Sheet: NEMA LD 3, BKL; undecorated plastic laminate. C. Colors: As indicated in Section 09 00 01 - Finish Legend. 2.05 ADHESIVE A. Adhesive: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application. 1. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 2. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. b. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. 2.06 FASTENINGS A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; plain finish in concealed locations and stainless steel finish in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For exposed fasteners on plastic laminate wainscots, provide countersunk, flat-headed slotted screws and 1/2-inch o.d. finishing washers. B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. C. Nails: Size and type to suit application, plain finish. D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Blind Fasteners, Lags, and Screws: Size and type to suit application; plain. E. Joint Sealants: As specified in Section 07 90 05- Joint Sealers. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. C. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. D. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse face of plastic laminate finished surfaces. E. Plastic Laminate Sills: Fabricate with 1/2-inch thick particleboard backer, unless otherwise indicated, as detailed: 1. Conform to AW I Custom quality standards. 2. Apply plastic laminate over particleboard, adhered with adhesive over entire surface. 3. Apply adhesive over entire back surface of panels and adhere to gypsum board or other wall substrate. Attach wainscot panels at top corners and at two intermediate points equally spaced along top. All fasteners to be concealed. 4. Provide self-edge at all joints. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 06 20 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY 5. Install sealant and backer rod at perimeter of sill. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards requirements for grade indicated. B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. D. Install with blind nailing typical; use finish nails at all applications unless detailed otherwise. E. Plastic Laminate Sills: Install window sills plumb, level, true, and straight as shown on Drawings, set in full bed of adhesive. Brace in place and protect from movement. Scribe window sills to fit where required by site conditions. F. Provide sealant at the intersection of dissimilar materials. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 06 20 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specially fabricated cabinet units. B. Countertops, including the following: 1. Plastic laminate. 2. Chemical-resistant plastic laminate. C. Cabinet hardware. D. Factory finishing. E. Preparation for installing utilities. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking. B. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers. C. Section 09 00 01 - Finish Legend: Material and color selections. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A135.4 -American National Standard for Basic Hardboard. B. ANSI A208.1 -American National Standard for Particleboard. C. ANSI A208.2 -American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use. D. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) -Architectural Woodwork Standards. E. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) -Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada. F. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association. G. PS 1 - Structural Plywood. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods,joint details, fastening methods, cutouts and holes for items installed in casework, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. 1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot. B. Resubmittal of Shop Drawings: If field measurements result in significant changes to the casework design, resubmit all shop drawings after field dimensions have been verified. 1. Indicate on resubmitted drawings all dimensions which were verified. 2. Indicate significant changes to casework resulting from field-measured conditions. Do not proceed with fabrication until approved by Architect. C. Product Data: Provide data for panel products, countertop materials and hardware accessories. 1. For installation adhesives, include printed statement of VOC content. 2. For each composite-wood product used, provide documentation indicating that the bonding agent contains no urea formaldehyde. 3. For each adhesive used, provide documentation indicating that the adhesive contains no urea formaldehyde. D. Selection Samples: Submit actual samples of the full range of available colors for the following items: 1. Thermoset decorative panels. 2. PVC edge materials. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 06 41 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK E. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets, demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20 percent of cost of woodwork for this Project. B. Perform work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Custom quality. C. Formaldehyde Free Panel Products: Provide fiberboard, particleboard and plywood products made with binders and adhesives containing no urea formaldehyde. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirement specified in "Field Conditions"Article. B. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy. C. Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The following manufacturers are approved subject to conformance with Specifications: 1. Advance Cabinet Designs, Inc.; 541-465-3394. 2. Ashland Glass and Millwork; Ashland, OR; 541-664-5557. 3. Custom Source Woodworking Inc.; Olympia, WA; 360-491-9365. 4. Fremont Millwork Co.; Klamath Falls, OR; 541-884-5554. 5. ISEC Cabinets, 425-489-1333. 6. Kriegsco Manufacturing, Inc.; Hubbard, OR; 503-981-9083. 7. Lemons Millwork, Inc.; Albany, OR; 541-926-1463. 8. Legend Custom Woodworking, Inc.; Portland, OR; 503-669-1000. 9. Neil Kelly Cabinets; Portland, OR; 503-335-9214. 10. Pacific Cabinets, Inc.; Ferdinand, ID; 208-962-5546. 11. Specialty Cabinets; 503-835-6048. 12. Westmark Products; Tacoma, WA; 800-755-3470. B. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 1. Substitution requests shall be accompanied by a mock-up of a typical cabinet produced by the manufacturer showing quality of workmanship normally produced for custom-grade work. Mock-up shall include a door and drawer combination with related specified hardware, countertop with edge and base. Mock-up shall meet quality and specified requirements of cabinets and hardware specified herein. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 06 41 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 2.02 CABINETS A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI//AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Custom Grade. 2.03 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. 2.04 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: Graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Grade II/Custom; average moisture content of 5-10 percent; species as follows: 1. Exposed Surfaces: Not allowed. 2. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Not allowed. 3. Concealed Surfaces: Douglas Fir. 2.05 PANEL MATERIALS A. All panel products shall be manufactured with minimal to no formaldehyde content. B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS-1, Medium Density Overlay. C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; medium density industrial type as specified in AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, composed of wood chips bonded with interior grade adhesive, containing no added urea formaldehyde, under heat and pressure; sanded faces; thickness as indicated; use for all components not indicated as another material. 1. Available Products: a. Evergreen manufactured by Boise Cascade: www.bc.com. b. Vesta manufactured by Flakeboard: www.flakeboard.com. c. FSC Skyblend Particleboard manufactured by Roseburg: www.roseburg.com. d. FSC Encore M3 manufactured by SierraPine Composite Solutions: www.sierrapine.com. D. Moisture-Resistant Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; medium density industrial type as specified in AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, composed of wood chips bonded with moisture resistant grade adhesive, under heat and pressure; sanded faces; thickness as indicated, CARB1 compliant; use for countertops containing sinks. 1. Available Products: a. Evergreen manufactured by Boise Cascade: www.bc.com. b. Duraflake MR Particleboard manufactured by Flakeboard: www.flakeboard.com. c. FSC Encore MR manufactured by SierraPine Composite Solutions: www.sierrapine.com. d. TemStock-MR Particleboard manufactured by Temple-Inland: www.templeinland.com. E. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2; type as specified in AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; composed of wood fibers pressure bonded with interior grade adhesive, containing no added urea formaldehyde, to suit application; sanded faces; thickness as required. 1. Use for painted components and concealed components. 2. Product: Medite II manufactured by SierraPine Composite Solutions: www.sierrapine.com. F. Hardboard: AHA A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, Class 1 - Tempered, 1/4 inch thick, smooth two sides (S2S); use for drawer bottoms, dust panels, and other components indicated on drawings. 1. Provide prefinished hardboard for cabinet drawer bottoms. 2.06 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. As indicated in Section 09 00 01 - Finish Legend. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 06 41 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK B. Thermoset Decorative Panels (Melamine): Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. 1. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. C. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific applications. 1. Provide specific types as follows: a. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness. b. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch nominal thickness. c. Post-Formed Horizontal Surfaces: HGP, 0.039 inch nominal thickness. d. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch nominal thickness or decorative thermoset panels. e. Laminate Backer: BKL, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, undecorated; for application to concealed backside of panels faced with high pressure decorative laminate. 2. Colors: Colors as scheduled in Section 09 00 01 - Finish Legend. D. Chemical-Resistant, High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGP, as follows: 1. Laminate has the following ratings when tested with indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.9.5: a. Nitric Acid (30 Percent): Moderate effect. b. Sulfuric Acid (77 Percent): Moderate effect. c. Hydrochloric Acid (37 Percent): Moderate effect. d. Phosphoric Acid (75 Percent): Moderate effect. e. Acetic Acid (98 Percent): No effect. f. Formaldehyde: No effect. g. Ethyl Acetate: No effect. h. Ethyl Ether: No effect. i. Phenol (85 Percent): Moderate effect. j. Xylene: No effect. k. Furfural: No effect. I. Methyl Ethyl Ketone: No effect. m. Sodium Hydroxide (25 Percent): Moderate effect. n. Sodium Sulfide (15 Percent): No effect. o. Ammonium Hydroxide (28 Percent): No effect. p. Zinc Chloride: No effect. q. Gentian Violet: No effect. 2. Products: a. Chemtop2 manufactured by Formica Corporation: www.formica.com. b. ChemGuard manufactured by Pionite Decorative Surfaces: www.pionite.com. c. Chemsurf manufactured by Wilsonart International: wilsonart.com. 3. Colors: Colors as scheduled in Section 09 00 01 - Finish Legend. 2.07 COUNTERTOPS A. Plastic Laminate Countertops: Plywood covered with high-pressure laminate. 2.08 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by AWI/AWMAC to suit application. 1. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. b. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. B. Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC, convex shaped; smooth finish; of width to match component thickness. 1. Color: To match adjacent plastic laminate color. 2. Use 3 mm at all exposed edges, doors and drawer fronts, vertical case ends, bottoms and sub-tops. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 06 41 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 3. Use 0.030 inch at all exposed shelf edges. 4. Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. 5. Manufacturers: Dollken Woodtape: www.doellken-woodtape.com, 800-426-6362 or equal. C. Countertop Support Brackets: Prefinished cold-rolled steel L-bracket with 1,200 lbs. per pair load rating. Mount with manufacturer's recommended fasteners to wall backing. 1. Size: 20 inches long by 13 inches high nominal. 2. Finish: White. 3. Product: Model 208 WH 500 Ultimate L-Bracket manufactured by Knape &Vogt. D. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. E. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized or chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome-plated finish in exposed locations. F. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. G. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. 2.09 HARDWARE A. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated shelf rests, nickel plated finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments. 1. Product: a. No. 282.04.71 manufactured by Hafele: www.hafeleonline.com. b. No. 332 Flat Top Shelf Support manufactured by Knape &Vogt: www.knapeandvogt.com. B. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Brackets: Standard back-mounted system using surface mounted metal shelf standards and coordinated cantilevered shelf brackets, satin chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments. 1. Product: 80/180 standards and brackets manufactured by Knape &Vogt: www.knapeandvogt.com. C. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, aluminum with satin finish, 4 inch centers. 1. Product: No. 38 Wire Pull manufactured by Ives: www.ives.ingersollrand.com, or approved equal. D. Drawer and Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with satin finish. Key to building master keyway. 1. Lock Manufacturer: Olympus Lock, Inc. a. Products: 1) Door Locks: 100DR N Series; National Keyway. 2) Drawer Locks: 200DW, N Series; National Keyway. b. Provide strike plates for each lock. c. Finish: 626. 2. Coordinate with Work of Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware for correct keying of locks. E. Catches: Magnetic. 1. Product: 592 manufactured by EPCO: www.epcohardware.com, or approved equal. F. Elbow Catches: Cadmium plated steel; install on left-hand door of double door cases where locks are indicated. 1. Products: No. 2 Elbow Catch manufactured by Ives: www.ives.ingersollrand.com, or approved equal. G. Drawer Slides: 1. Type: Full extension. 2. Typical Drawers: Steel ball bearings, full extension, progressive action, side mounting, with load rating of 100 pounds with polymer stop cushions. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 06 41 00 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK a. Product: No. 8400 manufactured by Knape &Vogt: www.knapeandvogt.com, or equal by other named manufacturers. 3. File Drawers: Steel ball bearings, full extension, progressive action, side mounting, with load rating of 150 pounds with hold-in feature to prevent bounceback. a. Product: No. 8500 manufactured by Knape &Vogt: www.knapeandvogt.com or equal by other named manufacturers. 4. Manufacturers: a. Accuride International, Inc.: www.accuride.com. b. Grass America Inc.: www.grassusa.com. c. Knape &Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com. d. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. H. Drawer Front Adjusters: No. 295.1000 manufactured by Blum: www.blum.com. I. Hinges: Five knuckle, fixed pin in chrome finish. Steel hinge 2-3/4 inches high with 270 degree opening. 1. Finish: 26D Satin Chrome. 2. Product: No. 454 manufactured by RPC Rockford Process Control, Inc., www.rockfordprocess.com, or equal by Fastec. J. Clothes Rods: Steel tube closet rod, bright chrome finish with mid-span support for shelf widths over 48-inches. 1. Products: a. Rod: No. 770-1 manufactured by Knape &Vogt: www.knapeandvogt.com. b. Rod Support Flanges: No. 734 manufactured by Knape &Vogt: www.knapeandvogt.com. c. Mid-Span Support: No. 760ANO manufactured by Knape &Vogt: www.knapeandvogt.com. 2.10 FABRICATION A. Laminate Finished Surface Definitions: Comply with requirements of AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated and the following: 1. Exposed portions of casework include all surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, interior faces of cabinet doors and exposed surfaces of open cases including top and bottom of shelving, interior cabinet surfaces visible behind glass doors. 2. Semi-exposed surfaces of casework include those members behind opaque doors such as shelves, drawers, dividers, interior faces of ends, case backs and backs and bottoms. 3. Concealed portions of casework include sleepers, dust panels, and other surfaces not visible after installation. B. Surface Finishes: 1. Exposed Surfaces: High-Pressure Laminate unless otherwise indicated. Provide colors and finishes as scheduled in Section 09 00 01 - Finish Legend. 2. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Thermoset decorative overlay. Colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of available colors. C. Cabinet Style: Reveal overlay. D. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: As indicated. E. Drawer Construction Technique: Lock shoulder joints. F. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. G. Construct cabinets without integral base. Provide separate structural base as specified below. H. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single length. I. Provide minimum 1/2-inch thick cabinet back. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 06 41 00 - 6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK J. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting. K. Base Construction: Construct cabinet bases of 3/4-inch thick marine grade plywood, glued and screwed. Provide reinforcing blocks as required for maximum strength. Recess base for toe space as indicated. Set base on floor where casework is to be installed. Level top surface and scribe bottom surface to floor line leaving a height of 4-inches between floor and bottom of casework. L. Drawers: 1. Fronts: One piece 3/4-inch thick, particleboard or plywood with 3 mm PVC edge facing on all four sides. 2. Sides: 1/2-inch thick medium density overlay plywood. 3. Back and Sub-Front: 3/4-inch thick particleboard. 4. Edge band top edges of sides, backs and sub-front. 5. Bottoms: Minimum 1/4-inch hardboard set into 1/4-inch deep grooves at front, back and both sides. 6. Drawer Reinforcement: Reinforce drawer bottoms in excess of 400 square inches in area with 1 inch by 3 inch wood strip running front to back centered on drawer. 7. Fabricate drawers full depth of cabinet. 8. Mount drawers with positive in and out stops. M. Cabinet Doors: Plastic laminate clad 3/4-inch thick particleboard with 3 mm PVC edge facing on all edges. 1. Provide one pair of hinges per door 3 feet high and less, 1-1/2 pair of hinges per door greater than 3 feet. N. Semi-Exposed Cabinet Shelving: Provide plastic laminate clad particleboard as follows: 1. 3/4-inch thick particleboard for shelving less than 32 inches wide. 2. 1-inch thick particleboard for shelving more than 32 inches wide. 3. Provide "Line Bored" multi-hole shelf support holes. 4. Allow 1/16-inch clearance at each end of loose shelving (1/8-inch overall)for ease of moving shelves. 5. Cover all edges of shelving with PVC edging matching surface of shelves. O. Countertops: 1. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High-pressure laminate bonded to plywood top over wood framing. a. Provide Self Edge. b. Provide 3/4-inch backsplash covered with matching plastic laminate. Panel to extend to the entire length of base cabinet and return to all exposed ends. 1) Shop install backsplashes. 2) Mechanically fasten end splashes to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center. c. Coordinate with plumbing and electrical installation of pipes, drains, electrical outlets and fixtures. 2. Chemical-Resistant Plastic Laminate Countertops: Provide chemical-resistant plastic laminate countertops and backsplashes at the following locations: a. Science Classrooms. b. Science Prep Rooms. P. Filler Panels: Provide 3/4-inch thick filler panels covered with matching plastic laminate to fill in all voids between cabinets and walls. Q. Library Shelving: 1-inch thick plywood shelving with high-pressure laminate cladding. Provide PVC edge facing in color to match laminate. Provide "Line Bored" multi-hole shelf support holes. R. Plastic Laminate, General: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 06 41 00 - 7 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 1. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. 2. Balanced construction on all laminate-finished panels is mandatory. Unfinished stock surfaces, including all concealed surfaces and edges will not be permitted. S. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops as recommended by laminate manufacturer at 16 inches on center. T. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures and fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Seal cut edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with Work of this section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Cabinets: 1. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level. 2. Shim as required using concealed shims. 3. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. 4. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. 5. Attach wall-mounted cabinets with concealed continuous cleats screwed to solid framing or blocking. 6. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. 7. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet for plumb and level, and with 1/32 inch maximum offset in flush adjoining surfaces, and 1/16 -inch maximum offset in revealed adjoining surfaces. 8. Drill pilot holes at corners prior to making field-cutouts. 9. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes and other fixtures and fittings. Verify location of cutouts from field-verified dimensions. Seal contact surfaces of cut edges. 10. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. 11. Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered ope,'tion. B. Countertops and Backsplashes: 1. Secure countertops to grounds, furring and blocking with concealed or countersunk fasteners and by blindnailing. Fasteners shall not be exposed to view. 2. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports places to support joints in substrates and to avoid deflection. Use clamping devices to provide flush, hairline joints. 3. Fasten countertop support brackets at maximum of 36-inches on center under unsupported counter surfaces. At corners, provide two brackets minimum - one at each unsupported corner, perpendicular to each wall surface. Provide even spacing of brackets beneath each countertop. 4. Provide holes and cutouts neatly cut where required for mechanical and electrical services. 5. Scribe backsplash at juncture with walls and other surfaces as recommended by AWI standards. Seal where backsplashes and endsplashes meet different surface materials with mildew-resistant silicone sealant as specified in Section 07 90 05-Joint Sealers. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged and defective casework, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace casework. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate and adjust hardware. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 06 41 00 - 8 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 06 41 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK C. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. B. Provide protection of installed casework from damage until final acceptance by Architect. 1. Cover casework with 4-mil polyethylene film for protection against dust and soiling. Maintain for duration of construction period. 2. Do not allow use of casework for storage of construction equipment or materials. 3. Do not allow use of casework as scaffolding for construction operations. 4. Do not allow use of countertops as construction work surfaces. C. Repair or replace defective portions of Work as directed prior to Substantial Completion. D. Remove plastic film and thoroughly clean as required prior to Punchlist review. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 06 41 00 - 9 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 06 64 00 PLASTIC PANELING SECTION 06 64 00 PLASTIC PANELING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic (FRP)wall paneling and trim accessories. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Selection Samples: Samples of panels and trim accessories for color selection. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING A. General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D5319. 1. Products a. Fire-X Glasbord manufactured by Crane Composites, www.cranecomposites.com. b. Class I/A Wall Panel manufactured by Marlite, www.marlite.com. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch. 3. Surface Finish: Molded pebble texture. 4. Color: As specified in Section 09 00 01 - Finish Legend. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges. 1. Color: Match panels. B. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer. 1. VOC Content: 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers. 1. VOC Content: 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 06 64 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 06 64 00 PLASTIC PANELING 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls not less than half the width of full panels so that trimmed panels at corners are not less than 12 inches wide. 1. Mark plumb lines on substrate at trim accessory locations for accurate installation. 2. Locate trim accessories to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C. Install trim accessories with adhesive. D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant. E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. F. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 06 64 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING SECTION 07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Bituminous dampproofing. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D1187 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. B. ASTM D1227 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide properties of primer, bitumen, and mastics. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include recommendations for method of application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness and protection course, if applicable. Include protection plan of surrounding areas and surfaces not to receive dampproofing. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years experience. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 50 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application until dampproofing has cured. B. Protect from rain until coating has set. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COLD ASPHALTIC MATERIALS A. Bitumen: Emulsified asphalt, ASTM D 1227; Type 2, Class I, and ASTM D 1187, Type 1. 1. Product: Hydrocide 700B manufactured by BASF: www.basfbuildingsystems.com. 2. Product: HE 789 Fibered Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing manufactured by Henry Company: www.henry.com. 3. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify substrate surfaces are durable, free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of dampproofing system. C. Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive dampproofing are securely installed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive dampproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not apply dampproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer. D. Apply mastic to seal penetrations, small cracks, or minor honeycomb in substrate. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Foundation Walls: Apply two coats of dampproofing by brush or spray. 1. Patch disturbed areas of existing dampproofing with two coats of new dampproofing of the same generic type. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 11 13- 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 2. Apply prime coat of non-fibrated material, cut 20 percent by volume with clean water. Allow prime coat to dry tacky to touch and apply 1 coat of short fiber fibrated material. 3. Fill in crevices and grooves, providing continuous coating and free from breaks and pinholes. Carry coating over exposed top and outside edge of footing. Spread around joints, grooves and slots and into chases, corners and reveals. Bring coating to within 2 inches of finished grade. 4. Place protection board in conjunction with bituminous material application, if recommended by dampproofing manufacturer. 5. Place backfill at least 24 to 48 hours after application but within 7 days. B. Apply from 2 inches below finish grade elevation down to top of footings. C. Seal items projecting through dampproofing surface with mastic. Seal watertight. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 11 13- 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 19 00 WATER REPELLENTS SECTION 07 19 00 WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water repellents applied to the following surfaces: 1. Exterior brick. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C67 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. B. ASTM D3960 - Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content of Paints and Related Coatings. C. ASTM D5095 - Standard Test Method for Determination of the Nonvolatile Content in Silanes, Siloxanes, and Silane-Siloxane Blends Used in Masonry Water Repellent Treatments. D. ASTM E514 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Performance Requirements for Brick: 1. Surface Appearance - No change in the surface appearance or texture. 2. ASTM E514 "Water Permeance of Masonry." a. 100% reduction in the leakage rate over the control. b. Control wall must have a leakage rate of at least 2.0 liters/hour . 3. ASTM C67"Brick and Structural Clay Tile" Part 7 Water Absorption. a. 98% reduction in water absorption. 4. Penetration -visual penetration into brick - 0.25 inches average. 1.05 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a meeting at least one week prior to starting work; require attendance of affected installers; invite Architect and Owner. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide product description, details of tests performed, limitations, and chemical composition. 1. Include manufacturer's printed statement of VOC content. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention; cautionary procedures required during application. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. D. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Report whether manufacturer's "best practices" are being followed; if not, state corrective recommendations. Email report to Architect the same day as inspection occurs; mail report on manufacturer's letterhead to Architect within 2 days after inspection. E. Pre-application Field Test Reports: Results of RILEM uptake tests for water repellents. F. Manufacturer's Statement: Water repellent manufacturer's representative's written statement confirming that the water repellent has been installed according to applicable manufacturer's specifications and details, and is eligible for manufacturer's warranty. G. Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 19 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 19 00 WATER REPELLENTS 1. Provide products for water repellents and graffiti-resistant coatings by a single manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years experience and trained and approved by manufacturer. C. Test Application: Apply a finish sample for each type of water repellent and substrate required and of graffiti-resistant coating. Duplicate finish of approved sample. Test area for RILEM uptake test(s) can serve as finish samples. 1. Locate each test application as directed by Architect. 2. Size: 9 sq. ft. minimum. 3. Final approval by Architect of water-repellent and graffiti-resistant coating application will be from test applications. 4. Conduct RILEM test(s)to comply with requirements specified in Field Quality Control Article. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Protect liquid materials from freezing. B. Do not apply water repellent when ambient temperature is lower than 50 degrees F or higher than 100 degrees F. C. Do not proceed with application on materials if ice or frost is covering the substrate. D. Do not proceed with the application of materials in rainy conditions of if heavy rain is anticipated within 4 hours after application. E. Sealer Coordination: Verify compatibility with curing compounds, patching materials, repair mortar, paints, sealants, and similar items to be used on substrates to verify compatibility with the water repellents and graffiti-resistant coatings. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Water Repellents: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agree(s)to repair or replace materials that fail to maintain water repellency specified within specified warranty period. 1. Loss of Water Repellency: a. Brick Masonry: 1.0 ml/20 minutes or greater(80 mph wind driven rain equivalent) using a water uptake tube meeting the requirements of RILEM Method II. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Silane/Siloxane Water Repellents: 1. Evonik Industries (formerly Degussa Corporation): www.protectosil.com. 2. Fabrikem: www.fabrikem.com. 3. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Water Repellent: Non-glossy, colorless, penetrating, water-vapor-permeable, non-yellowing sealer, that dries invisibly leaving appearance of substrate unchanged. 1. Applications: Vertical surfaces and nontraffic and traffic horizontal surfaces. 2. Number of Coats: One. 3. VOC Content: Less than 600 g/L, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3960 or D5095. 4. Maintains dry appearance when wetted. 5. Products: Solvent-based siloxane, silane, or blend that reacts chemically with concrete and masonry; minimum 40 percent nonvolatile content by weight. a. Basis-of-Design Products: 1) Exterior Unpainted Brick: Protectosil Chem-Trete 40 VOC manufactured by Evonik Industries or equal by other named manufacturers. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 19 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 19 00 WATER REPELLENTS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify joint sealants are installed and cured. 1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those required. C. Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean, and free of efflorescence, oil, or other matter detrimental to application of water repellent. D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION FOR WATER REPELLENT APPLICATION A. Protection of Adjacent Work: 1. Protect adjacent landscaping, property, and vehicles from drips and overspray. 2. Protect adjacent surfaces not intended to receive water repellent. B. Prepare surfaces to be coated as recommended by water repellent manufacturer for best results. C. Do not start work until masonry mortar and concrete substrate is cured a minimum of 60 days. D. Remove loose particles and foreign matter. E. Verify that masonry joints found to be unsound, hollow or otherwise defective have been raked out to a depth of 1/2 inch and pointed with mortar. F. Verify that cracks that exceed 1/64 inch wide have been filled with pointing mortar. G. Remove oil and foreign substances with a chemical solvent that will not affect water repellent. H. Coordination: Verify compatibility of water repellent with curing compounds, patching materials, repair mortar, paints, sealants, etc. to be used on or adjacent to surfaces to be coated. I. Scrub and rinse surfaces with water and let dry. J. Allow surfaces to dry completely to degree recommended by water repellent manufacturer before starting coating work. Allow mortar to cure as required by water repellent manufacturer. 3.03 WATER REPELLENT APPLICATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect the substrate before application of water repellent and to instruct Applicator on the product and application method to be used. B. Apply water repellent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using procedures and application methods recommended as producing the best results. C. Apply at rate recommended by manufacturer, continuously over entire surface. D. Remove water repellent from unintended surfaces immediately by a method instructed by water repellent manufacturer. E. Provide manufacturer's field service representative to inspect preparation and application work for at least 3 hours on first day to ensure that manufacturer's "best practices"for preparation and application are being followed. 3.04 CLEANING A. As work progresses, clean spillage from adjacent surfaces using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer. 1. Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces when no longer needed. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test Area: Before any water repellent application, perform the following field evaluation. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 19 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 19 00 WATER REPELLENTS 1. Prepare a three foot by three foot area to be sprayed with the water repellent where directed by the Architect. Apply the water repellent at a rate of square foot per gallon as recommended by manufacturer to meet warranty requirements. 2. After allowing five days for the sample to cure, run a RILEM uptake test on the treated area. Place one tube on the masonry and one tube on a mortar joint. Contact Architect at least one week prior to the application of the water repellent and the test. B. Coverage Spray Test: In the presence of Architect, hose down a dry, repellent-treated surface to verify complete and uniform product application. A change in surface color will indicate incomplete application. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when surfaces will be tested. 2. After surfaces have adequately dried, recoat surfaces that show water absorption. 3. Run random RILEM tests on each elevation of structure. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish written certification that surface preparation method and final condition ha!: manufacturer's approval and comply with warranty. 1. Test Area: Furnish results of test area absorption on each type of substrate. Test results shall determine application rate. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 19 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board insulation at cavity wall construction, exterior wall behind metal panel wall finish, and exterior wall behind masonry veneer wall finish. B. Board insulation at interior face of exterior walls. C. Batt insulation for filling stud cavities in external walls. D. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall and roof. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Coordination of installation of seismic veneer ties and insulation. B. Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Board insulation on wall sheathing and Z-furring. C. Section 07 25 00 -Weather Barriers: Separate air barrier and vapor retarder materials. D. Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation inside walls and partitions. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C578- Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. B. ASTM C665- Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. C. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C. F. NFPA 285- Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, product limitations, and formaldehyde content. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on installation techniques. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. B. Do not expose foam-plastic board to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. C. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPLICATIONS A. Insulation Inside Masonry Veneer Clad Walls: Extruded polystyrene board. B. Insulation Over Metal Stud Framed Walls, Continuous: Extruded polystyrene board. C. Insulation on Inside of Concrete and Masonry Exterior Walls: Extruded polystyrene. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 21 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION D. Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder. 2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV; Extruded polystyrene board with either natural skin or cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics: 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Locations of Use: a. Exterior walls in cavity behind masonry veneer and metal wall panels. b. Interior face of exterior tilt-up concrete and concrete masonry walls. 3. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Test Standard: For insulation installed in exterior walls, provide products tested in wall assemblies tested in accordance with and in compliance with the acceptance criteria of NFPA 285 and in compliance with and labeled in accordance with Section 2603.5 of the International Building Code. 5. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 6. Board Edges: Square. 7. Thermal Resistance: a. Masonry Veneer and Metal Wall Panel Clad Walls: R-7.5. b. Inside face of Tilt-Up Concrete and Concrete Masonry Walls: R-12 8. Compressive Resistance: 25 psi. 9. Board Density: 1.6 lb/cu ft. 10. Water Absorption, maximum: 0.3 percent, volume. 11. Products: a. Dow Chemical Company; Product Styrofoam Square Edge: www.dow.com. b. Owens Corning Corp.; Product Foamular 250 Square Edge: www.owenscorr..ing.com. 12. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.03 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit. 1. Locations of Use: Within stud cavity, covered with a separate sheet vapor barrier. 2. Material: Glass or mineral fiber. 3. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 5. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136. 6. Formaldehyde Content: Zero or in compliance with Greenguard Children and Schools Program Certification. 7. Thermal Resistance: R-13 minimum, fill entire stud cavity. 8. Products: a. CertainTeed Corporation; Product CertaPro Acousta Therm Batts for Metal Framing: www.certainteed.com. b. CertainTeed Corporation; Product CertaPro Partition Batts: www.certainteed.com. c. Guardian Building Products, Inc.; Product Batts for Metal Framing: www.guardianbp.com. d. Guardian Building Products, Inc.; Product Precut Batts for Wood Framing: www.guardianbp.com. e. Johns Manville Corporation; Product Batts for Metal Framing Formaldehyde Free; www.jm.com. f. Knauf Fiber Glass; Product EcoBatt: www.knauf.com. g. Owens-Corning Corp.; Thermal Batts for Metal Frame Construction: www.owenscorning.com. 9. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 21 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM C1136, flame retardant facing consisting of 0.00030 inch aluminum foil, fiberglass reinforcing and kraft paper laminated together with flame retardant adhesive. 1. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: 1.0 perms or less. 2. Flame Spread Index: 10 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Smoke Developed Index: 5 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. Products: a. Johns Manville Corporation; Product Commercial Facing 35TL: www.jm.com. b. Lamtec Corporation; Product R-3035 HD: www.lamtec.com. c. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Vapor Retarder Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. C. Adhesive for Polystyrene Board Insulation Fasteners: High strength, industrial grade spray adhesive, acceptable to insulation manufacturer. 1. Available Product: 3M Polystyrene Foam Insulation 78 Spray Adhesive. a. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. D. Insulation Seam Tape: Pressure sensitive, self-adhering seam tape recommended by insulation manufacturer that qualifies as a continuous air barrier material in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 and complying with AAMA 711. 1. Available Product: JointSealR Foam Joint Tape manufactured by Owens Corning or equal. E. Seals and Sealants: Chemically and physically compatible with adjacent materials at locations to eliminate uncontrolled air leakage. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation . B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that may impede adhesive bond. 3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT CAVITY WALLS BEHIND METAL WALL PANELS A. Coordinate placement of insulation panels with cladding supports. Install insulation in two layers with joints offset where feasible. B. Install insulation with each layer adhesively attached. Seal all joints with tape. 1. Install fasteners at insulation manufacturer's recommended spacing. C. Apply 2 inch diameter daubs of adhesive spaced approximately 12 inches on center both ways on inside face of insulation board. D. Fit insulation between furring and obstructions with joints staggered and edges butted tightly. 1. Press units firmly against inside substrate. 2. Make insulation continuous. Fill all voids. E. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. 3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION AT CAVITY WALLS BEHIND MASONRY VENEER A. Install boards to fit snugly between wall ties. B. Install boards horizontally on walls. C. Install insulation with each layer adhesively"ttached. Seal all joints with tape. D. Apply 2 inch diameter daubs of adhesive spaced approximately 12 inches on center both ways on inside face of insulation board. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 21 00- 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION E. Fit insulation between furring and obstructions with joints staggered and edges butted tightly. 1. Press units firmly against inside substrate. 2. Make insulation continuous. Fill all voids. F. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. 3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION AT INSIDE FACE OF TILT-UP CONCRETE AND CONCRETE MASONRY WALLS. A. Coordinate placement of insulation panels with gypsum board supports. Install insulation in two layers with joints offset where feasible. B. Install first layer of first row of insulation mechanically attached and all other layers adhesively attached. Seal all joints with tape. 1. Install fasteners at insulation manufacturer's recommended spacing. C. Apply 2 inch diameter daubs of adhesive spaced approximately 12 inches on center both ways on inside face of insulation board. D. Fit insulation between furring and obstructions with joints staggered and edges butted tightly. 1. Press units firmly against inside substrate. 2. Make insulation continuous. Fill all voids. E. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. 3.05 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior wall spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Install insulation inside box headers and similar closed framing members. Coordinate with Work of Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing. D. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. E. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. 1. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. F. At metal framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation; lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face. G. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder. 1. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders. 2. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. H. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames (seal to self-adhered membrane flashing) and other items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place. I. Seal vapor retarder at penetrations, and perimeter floor, wall and ceiling terminations to eliminate uncontrolled air leakage. J. Coordinate work of this section with construction of weather-resistive barrier(WRB) specified in Section 07 25 00. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 21 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Weather-Resistive Barrier(WRB): Vapor permeable weather-resistive barrier membrane system for installation under wall cladding and masonry veneers over sheathing and masonry substrates. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Masonry substrates. B. Section 07 62 00 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal flashings installed in conjunction with weather-resistive barriers. C. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers: Sealant materials and installation techniques. D. Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies: Exterior sheathing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer. B. ASTM C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants. C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. D. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers—Tension. E. ASTM D1002 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Shear Strength of Single-Lap-Joint Adhesively Bonded Metal Specimens by Tension Loading (Metal-to-Metal). F. ASTM D1781 - Standard Test Method for Climbing Drum Peel for Adhesives. G. ASTM E96/ E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. H. ASTM E283- Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. I. ASTM E330- Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. J. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. K. ASTM E547 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference. L. ASTM E2178- Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Performance Description: 1. Construct the building envelope with a continuous, weather and air barrier system (WRB) to control moisture and air leakage into, and out of the conditioned space. 2. Install joints, penetrations and paths of moisture and air infiltration watertight and airtight. 3. Install system capable of withstanding positive and negative combined wind and stack pressures on the envelope without damage or displacement. 4. Install system in an airtight and flexible manner, allowing for the relative movement of systems due to thermal and moisture variations. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data including membrane and accessory material types, technical and test data, composition, descriptions and properties, installation instructions and substrate preparation requirements. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 25 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS B. Test Reports: Submit test reports indicating compliance with specified performance characteristics and requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations and extent of weather-resistive barrier system. 1. Include details of conditions specific to this project, including joints, cracks, intersections with other building envelope systems and materials, corners, terminations, counterflashings and details showing bridging of envelope at substrate changes. 2. Include details of sealing penetrations, and detailed flashing around windows and doors. D. Sample Warranty: Submit a sample warranty identifying the terms and conditions of the warranty. E. Qualifications: Submit letters of verification that manufacturer and installer meet specified qualifications. F. Manufacturer's Field Inspection Reports: Indicate procedures followed, ambient temperatures, humidity, and supplementary instructions given. G. Inspection Report: Copy of membrane manufacturer's inspection report of completed weather-resistive barrier system indicating that system as installed is acceptable to receive manufacturer's specified warranty. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Weather-resistive barrier systems shall be manufactured and marketed by a firm with a minimum of five years experience in the production and sales of weather and air barrier system. B. Installer's Qualifications: The installer shall be able to demonstrate qualifications to perform the work of this section by submitting the following, upon request: 1. Verification that installer has been trained by and is approved to perform work as herein specified by weather-resistive barrier system manufacturer. 2. List of at least three projects completed within the past three years of similar scope and complexity to this project carried out by the firm and site supervisor. 3. Evidence of proper equipment and trained field personnel to successfully complete the project. C. Inspection and Testing: Cooperate and coordinate with the Owner's inspection and testing agency and manufacturer's representative. Do not cover installed products or assemblies until they have been inspected, tested and approved. D. Sole source: Obtain materials from a single manufacturer. E. Regulations: Provide products which comply with all state and local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). F. Pre-installation Conference: Prior to beginning installation of weather-resistive barrier system, hold a pre-installation conference to review work to be accomplished. 1. Contractor, Architect, installing subcontractor, membrane system manufacturer's representative, and all subcontractors who have materials penetrating membrane system or finishes covering membrane system shall be present. 2. Notify Architect at least seven days prior to time for conference. 3. Record minutes of meeting and distribute to attending parties. 4. Agenda: As a minimum discuss: a. Surface preparation. b. Substrate condition and pretreatment. c. Minimum curing period. d. Special details and sheet flashing. e. Sequence of construction, responsibilities, and schedule for subsequent operations. f. Installation procedures. g. Testing and inspection procedures. h. Protection and repair procedures. i. Review and approval of all glazing applications. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 25 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS j. Meeting shall include review of integrated exterior mock-up to confirm installation procedures as required to provide a warrantable assembly. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and products in labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Protect from damage, weather, excessive temperatures and construction operations. Remove damaged material from site and dispose of in accordance with applicable regulations. B. Protect weather-resistive barrier components from freezing and extreme heat. Store materials at temperatures of 40 degrees F to 100 degrees F. C. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, and to minimize on-site storage. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Conditions: Perform work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within the limits established by the manufacturer of the materials used. 1. Do not apply at surface temperatures below 40 degrees F or over 150 degrees F on the substrate. 2. Proceed with installation only when the substrate construction and preparation work is complete and in condition to receive the membrane system. 3. Exposure Limitations: Schedule work to ensure that weather-resistive barrier system is covered and protected from UV exposure within 180 days of installation. If weather-resistive barrier membrane system cannot be covered within 180 days after installation, apply temporary UV protection as recommended by membrane manufacturer. 1.09 WARRANTY. A. Manufacturer's Warranty Requirements: Submit manufacturer's written warranty stating that installed weather-resistive barrier materials are watertight, free from defects in material and workmanship, and agreeing to replace defective materials and components. B. Warranty period: Ten years from Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Building Envelope Innovations, LLC (BEI), Wet Flash: www.wet-flash.com. B. PROSOCO, Inc: www.prosoco.com. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Liquid-Applied Flashing Membrane: liquid-applied penetration membrane flexible flashing 1. Description: 99% solids, roll/trowel/brush-applied, elastomeric liquid flashing material. 2. Characteristics: 3. Thickness: Minimum 12 mils. a. Water Vapor Permeability: Minimum 25 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E96. b. Water Penetration (cyclical static air pressure difference): No uncontrolled water penetration when tested in accordance with ASTM E547. c. Hardness: Shore A,40-45 when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. d. Tensile Strength: 180 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D412. e. Elongation at Break: 400 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D412. f. Peel Strength: 25 pli when tested in accordance with ASTM D1781. g. Volatile Organic Content (VOC): 27 g/L. 4. Acceptable Products: a. BEI Penetration Membrane PM-7000. b. Prosoco, Inc, R-GUARD FastFlash flashing membrane. 5. Joint& Seam Filler: Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 25 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS a. Description: Waterproof, high modulus, single-component fiber reinforced joint and seam treatment and filler for application to joints, gaps and seams of sheathing and fenestration substrates. b. Characteristics: 1) Hardness: Shore A, 45-50 when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 2) Tensile Strength: 225 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D412. 3) Lap Shear Strength: 275 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D1002. 4) Elongation at Break: 275 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D412. 5) Peel Strength: 30 pli when tested in accordance with ASTM D1781. 6) Volatile Organic Content (VOC): 15 g/L. 7) Shrinkage: None. c. Acceptable Products: 1) BEI FR-7200 Fiber Reinforced Fill-Coat and Seam Treatment. 2) Prosoco, Inc R-GUARD Joint &Seam Filler. d. Backer Rod: Compressible, closed cell rod stock as recommended by manufacturer for compatibility with sealant. Provide size and shape of rod to control joint depth. 6. Weather-Resistive Barrier: a. Description: Seamless, 98 percent solids, vapor-permeable, elastomeric, silyl-terminated polyether membrane designed for application to exterior above-grade walls to seal assemblies and prevent moisture and air infiltration. b. Characteristics: 1) Thickness: Minimum 12 mils. 2) Air infiltration: Less than 0.004 cfm per square foot(0.02 Us/sq m)when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178 or ASTM E283. 3) Water Vapor Permeability: Minimum 23 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E96. 4) Structural Performance: Weather-resistive barrier system shall withstand positive and negative wind pressure loading when tested in accordance with ASTM E330. 5) Water Penetration (Static Pressure): No uncontrolled water penetration when tested in accordance with ASTM E331, with differential static pressure not less than 6.24 psf. 6) Water Penetration (Cyclical Static Air Pressure Difference): No uncontrolled water penetration when tested in accordance with ASTM E547. 7) Hardness: Shore A, 20-25 when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 8) Tensile Strength: 110 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D412. 9) Elongation at Break: 300 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D412. 10) Peel Strength: 30 pli when tested in accordance with ASTM D1781 or C794. 11) Volatile Organic Content(VOC): 15 g/L. 12) Shrinkage: None. c. Acceptable Products: 1) BEI SWB-7500 Fluid-Applied Weather and Air Barrier. 2) Prosoco, Inc. R-GUARD Cat-5 EXTREME Weather Air and Water-Resistive Barrier. 7. Weather-Resistive Barrier Sealant for Windows and Doors: a. Description: 98 percent solids, one-component, low-modulus, elastomeric, paintable, silyl-terminated polyether sealant. b. Characteristics: 1) Hardness: Shore A, 20-25 when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 2) Tensile Strength: 110 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D412. 3) Elongation at Break: 1300 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D412. 4) Peel Strength: 30 pli when tested in accordance with ASTM D1781. 5) Type: Type S, Grade NS, Class 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM C920. 6) Volatile Organic Content (VOC): 15 g/L. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 25 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS 7) Shrinkage: None. c. Acceptable Products: 1) BEI WS-7100 Weather Sealant. 2) Prosoco, Inc, AirDam Sealant for window and doors 8. Backer Rod: Compressible, closed cell rod stock as recommended by manufacturer for compatibility with sealant. Provide size and shape of rod to control joint depth. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the Work of this Section. B. Examine conditions for compliance with system manufacture's requirements for installation, tolerances and other specific conditions affecting performance of weather-resistive barrier system. C. Surfaces shall be sound and free of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate and sharp protrusions. 1. Remove contaminants such as grease, oil and wax from exposed surfaces. 2. Remove dust, dirt, loose stone and debris. 3. Use repair materials and methods that are acceptable to manufacturer of the weather-resistive barrier system. D. Seam filler for seams,joints, cracks and gaps at sheathing and building face: 1. Joint and seam treatment shall be applied to clean, dry or damp substrates, with temperature and weather limitations as required by manufacturer. 2. Fill sheathing and building face seams,joints, cracks and gaps with Seam Filler. 3. For joints 3/8-inch wide and larger, install backer rod prior to installation of joint and seam treatment materials. Place backer rod to maintain sealant manufacturer-s recommended sealant thickness, depth and profile. 4. Apply seam filler treatment using trowel, broad-knife or spatula to fill seams and gaps. 5. Coat 1-inch beyond each side of seam or gap. 6. Minimum Thickness: 35 mils. E. Exterior Sheathing: 1. Verify that sheathing is properly installed with ends, corners and edges properly fastened. 2. Fill sheathing end and edge joints with seam filler. F. Masonry Substrates: 1. Masonry shall have smooth trowel-cut mortar joints. 2. Rub to remove loose mortar and debris. 3. Fill cracks,joints and gaps with seam filler. 3.02 FLASHING AT WINDOWS, DOORS, OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS A. General: Comply with weather-resistive barrier manufacturer's installation instructions, temperature limitations, product data and shop drawings. B. Flashing Membrane Preparation of Sills: 1. Apply flashing to clean, dry substrates, with temperature and weather limitations as required by manufacturer. 2. Apply liquid-applied flexible flashing to perimeters, sills and adjacent sheathing and building face, using broad knives, rollers, brushes or trowels, in accordance with manufacturer-s product data and installation instructions. 3. At sills, extend flexible flashing on building face a minimum of 6 inches beyond and 3 inches above sill-jamb intersection. C. Liquid-Applied Flexible Flashing; Jambs, Heads and Perimeters: 1. Following application of flashing at sills, apply a full application of flashing membrane to perimeters,jambs and heads of open■Hgs using broad knives, rollers, brushes or trowels, in accordance with manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 25 00 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS 2. At perimeters, extend flexible flashing on sheathing and building face a minimum of 9 inches beyond openings. 3.03 WEATHER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION: A. General: Comply with weather and air barrier manufacturer's installation instructions, temperature limitations, product data and shop drawings. B. Substrates: Do not apply weather and air barrier materials until installation of joint and seam treatment, flexible flashing, counter-flashing and accessory materials are complete and acceptable to system manufacturer. C. Weather-Resistive Membrane: 1. Apply weather-resistive barrier membrane to clean, dry substrates, with temperature and weather limitations as required by manufacturer. 2. Apply a continuous uniform application of weather-resistive barrier at minimum 12 mils film thickness using multiple, overlapping passes. Coverage rate shall be minimum 120 sq. ft. /gallon at 12 mil thickness on substrates such as exterior sheathing. CMU applications may allow membrane to be absorbed into matrix of the block due to porosity. When this occurs test wall with a RILEM tube for any evidence of absorption. If absorption of the block is observed apply additional membrane until watertightness during the RILEM tube testing is achieved. 3. Use application methods and equipment as recommended by weather-resistive barrier manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. 4. Seal masonry ties and other penetrations as work progresses with Joint& Seam Filler. 5. Inspect weather-resistive barrier membrane before covering, and repair any punctures, deficient areas and damaged areas with specified membrane system, extending repair material a minimum of 6 inches beyond the puncture, deficiency area or damage. 6. Installation shall provide a continuous building envelope barrier in conjunction with manufacturer's sealants, flashing, counter-flashing and accessory materials. 3.04 SEALANT FOR WINDOWS AND DOORS A. At the time of storefront, curtain wall, and door frame installations, install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's product data, installation instructions and shop drawings. B. Apply sealant to clean, dry substrates, with temperature and weather limitations as required by manufacturer. Do not apply to wet substrates. C. Prior to installation of sealant, install backer rod to maintain sealant manufacturer's recommended sealant thickness, depth and profile. D. Install sealant to provide uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete wetting of joint bond surfaces. E. Tool joints to concave profile and smooth, uniform surface, flush with edges of substrate. Maintain sealant depth-to-width ratio in accordance with manufacturer's product data. F. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a vertical surface, fill joint to form slight cove so that joint will not trap moisture and debris. G. Do not allow materials to overflow onto adjacent surfaces. Prevent staining of adjacent surfaces. H. Remove excess and misplaced materials as work progresses. Clean the adjoining surfaces to remove misplaced materials, without damage to adjacent surfaces or finishes. I. Cure sealant in accordance with manufacturer's product data to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability. Protect uncured surfaces from contamination and physical damage. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 25 00 -6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS SECTION 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured metal panels for walls, with related flashings and accessory components. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 40 00 -Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Wall panel Z-furring. B. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout,joints, construction details, methods of anchorage, and trim. 1. Shop drawings must reflect architectural detailing and conditions shown of the Drawings. Manufacturer's standard catalog-type details are not acceptable. B. Samples: Submit two samples of wall panel, 6 inch by 6 inch in size illustrating finish color, sheen, and texture. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of experience. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect panels from accelerated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping wrap. B. Store prefinished material off ground and protected from weather. Prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and provide ventilation to stored materials. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. C. Prevent contact with materials that may cause discoloration or staining of products. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Correct defective work within a 20 year period after Substantial Completion for degradation of panel finish, including color fading caused by exposure to weather. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. AEP Span: www.aepspan.com. (basis of design) 2. Centria: www.centria.com. 3. Firestone Metal Products/Unaclad: www.unaclad.com. 4. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 MANUFACTURED METAL PANELS A. Wall Panel System: Factory fabricated prefinished metal panel system, site assembled. 1. Provide exterior panels. 2. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with IBC. Design pressure as indicated on Structural Drawings. 3. Maximum Allowable Deflection of Panel: 1/180 of span. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 42 13 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS 4. Movement: Accommodate movement within system without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement within system; movement between system and perimeter components when subject to seasonal temperature cycling; dynamic loading and release of loads; and deflection of structural support framing. 5. Drainage: Provide positive drainage to exterior for moisture entering or condensation occurring within panel system. 6. Fabrication: Formed true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects; pieces of longest practical lengths. 7. Exterior Finish: Panel manufacturer's standard polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) coating, top coat over epoxy primer. 8. Exterior Panel Back Coating: Panel manufacturer's standard polyester wash coat. B. Exterior Panels; Type MP-1: 1. Basis of Design: Prestige Series (PS-12) 2. Profile: Horizontal; no reveal and Horizontal with 1" reveal where indicated on the drawings. 3. Gauge: 22 4. Color: As indicated in Section 09 00 01 Finish Legend. 5. Side Seams: Concealed fasteners 6. Panel Width: 12 inches. 7. Panel Reinforcement: CDX plywood, full depth and width of panel. C. Exterior Panels; Type MP-2 1. Basis of Design: Nu-Wave Corrugated 2. Profile: Horizontal, 7/8" corrugations 3. Gauge: 24 4. Color: As indicated in Section 09 00 01 Finish Legend. 5. Side Seams: Lapped, exposed fasteners. 6. Panel Width: 36 inches D. Internal and External Corners: Same material, thickness, and finish as exterior sheets; profile to suit system; brake formed to required angles. E. Expansion Joints: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; 22 &24 gage; manufacturer's standard brake formed type, of profile to suit system. F. Trim: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; brake formed to required profiles. 1. Provide base trim with factory-drilled drainage holes; minimum 3/16-inch ovals at maximum 24-inches on center. Drill before applying factory finish coatings. G. Anchors: Galvanized steel. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Precoated Steel Sheet: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, ASTM A792/A792M, Commercial Steel (CS)) or Forming Steel (FS), with AZ50/AZM150 coating; continuous-coil-coated on exposed surfaces with specified finish coating and on panel back with specified panel back coating. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with system, permanently resilient; ultraviolet and ozone resistant. B. Sealants: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with installation of system; non-staining. C. Insect Screen: Charcoal colored fiberglass screening comprised of an 18 x 16 woven mesh. D. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type to suit application; with soft neoprene washers, stainless steel. Fastener cap same color as exterior panel. E. Field Touch-up Paint: As recommended by panel manufacturer. F. Bituminous Paint: Asphalt base. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 42 13 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS 2.05 FABRICATIONS A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest practical lengths. 1. Factory fabricate all components for field assembly. 2. Comply with indicated profiles, dimensions and structural requirements. C. Fabricate corners in one continuous piece with minimum 18 inch returns. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building framing members, including furring members are in alignment and within wall panel manufacturer's tolerances, ready to receive panels. B. Verify that insulation has been properly installed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate with Work of Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing for placement and attachment of Z-furring. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install panels on walls in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Protect surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. Allow to dry prior to installation. C. Fasten panels to structural supports; aligned, level, and plumb. D. Locate joints over supports. Lap panel ends minimum 2 inches. E. Seal horizontal joints as recommended by manufacturer. F. Provide and secure plywood backer in Type MP-1 panels to a height of 7 feet. G. Install insect screen at openings to prevent insect intrusion. H. Install wall panel edge trim as detailed. Ensure that weep holes and drainage channel in lower trim pieces are free of obstructions, dirt, debris, and sealant. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Offset From True Alignment Between Adjacent Members Butting or In Line: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plane or Location Indicated on Drawings: 1/4 inch. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove site cuttings from finish surfaces. B. Clean and wash prefinished surfaces with mild soap and water; rinse with clean water. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 42 13 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 54 00 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING SECTION 07 54 00 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Mechanically attached system with thermoplastic roofing membrane. B. Adhered system with thermoplastic roofing membrane. C. Insulation, flat and tapered. D. Cover board. E. Fleshings. F. Roofing stack boots and walkway pads. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking: Acoustical insulation installed as Work of this Section for acoustical steel deck. B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers and curbs. C. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Counterflashings, reglets,and similar flashing. D. Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories: Roof-mounted units; prefabricated curbs. E. Section 08 63 00 - Metal-Framed Skylights: Roof-mounted skylights on site built curbs. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Roof Edge Standard. B. ASTM C1177/C1177M -Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. C. ASTM C1289- Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board. D. ASTM D6878 - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing. E. ASTM E1980 - Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces. F. NRCA ML104 -The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association. G. SMACNA (ASMM) -Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Corner Uplift Pressure: 39 psf. 2. Ferimeter Uplift Pressure: 28 psf. 3. Field-of-roof Uplift Pressure: 19 psf. B. ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Roof Edge Standard: The completed membrane roofing system and associated roof edge metal systems shall comply with ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Roof Edge Standard while using a basic wind speed of 95. C. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with initial Solar Reflectance Index not less than 110 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency. 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 54 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 54 00 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 2. Meet with Owner, Architect, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 3. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 5. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 6. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 7. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. 8. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 9. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 10. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, insulation, and fasteners. 1. Include manufacturer's published specifications for the proposed materials and systems. B. Specimen Warranty: For approval. Sample warranty shall clearly indicate 72 mph wind-speed coverage. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate joint or termination detail conditions, conditions of interface with other materials, and walkway layout. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other Work. Provide complete drawings of non-manufacturer-standard details to be used with details of construction. 1. Indicate insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter and field-of-roof locations. D. Selection Samples: Manufacturer's full range of available standard colors for prefinished metal fascias, coping and drip edges. E. Samples for Verification: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inches in size illustrating finish of metal. F. Qualification Data: For Installer. G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate membrane seaming precautions and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. H. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements including the following: 1. Submit letter from the membrane manufacturer confirming that the completed membrane roofing system will achieve a minimum UL Class A Fire Rating, and shall be listed in the current U.L. Directory. 2. Submit letter from the membrane manufacturer confirming that the completed membrane roofing system shall meet and/or exceed specified wind speed design criteria. IBC uplift pressures shall be calculated in accordance with ASCE 7 "Minimum Design Loads for Building and Other Structures." Letter shall confirm field, perimeter, and corner values in pounds per square foot. 3. Submit letter from the membrane manufacturer confirming that the completed membrane roofing system and associated roof edge metal systems comply with ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Roof Edge Standards. 4. Submit letter from the membrane manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with specified requirements. 5. Submit certification of the membrane manufacturer's warranty reserve. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 54 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 54 00 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 6. Submit certification that installer is an approved applicator with the membrane manufacturer. 7. Submit certificate of Xenon-Arc testing. Results shall demonstrate membranes resistance to Xenon-Arc weathering test in accordance with ASTM G 26. No cracking, no loss of breaking or tearing strength shall be present. 8. Submit certification from the membrane manufacturer indicating the fasteners are capable of providing a static back-out resistance of 10 inch pounds minimum. 9. Submit Letter of Compliance from the membrane manufacturer that the proposed system complies with the specifications and guidelines stated herein, including the manufacturer's 72 MPH warranty criteria for the duration indicated in Warranty Article. I. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of roofing system. J. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate procedures followed, ambient temperatures, humidity, wind velocity during application, and supplementary instructions given. K. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing installation. 1. Manufacturer's warranty is evidence of satisfactory inspection. Report shall be submitted if warranty cannot be issued because of improper workmanship, or if manufacturer's inspection noted any conditions requiring correction. L. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. M. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 10 years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company authorized and trained by the membrane manufacturer. The roofing applicator shall be thoroughly experienced and upon request be able to provide evidence of having at least 5 years successful experience installing single-ply roofing systems similar to the specified system and having installed at least four roofing applications of similar systems and of equal or greater size within the last 12 months. 1. Crew Experience and Supervision: Provide adequate number of experienced workmen regularly engaged in this type of work who are skilled in the application techniques of the materials specified. Provide at least one thoroughly trained and experienced foreman/superintendent on the job at all times roofing work is in progress. C. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's instructions. D. Membrane manufacturer's technical representative shall make site inspections before, during and after installation of Work and at frequency as required to enable manufacturer to issue specified warranty. 1. Perform and document inspections by designated and properly qualified technical representative of membrane manufacturer. 2. Verify that materials and Work meet specified requirements. 3. Should Work and/or materials not meet specified requirements, promptly advise Architect with recommended course of action. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact. Deliver in sufficient quantity to permit work to continue without interruption. B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. Comply with the manufacturer's written instructions for proper material storage. C. Protect foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight. Store on pallets, off the ground or roof deck and tightly covered with waterproof materials. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 54 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 54 00 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING D. Do not overload roof structure by concentrating stored materials in certain locations. E. Store adhesives at temperature above 40 degrees F. 1.09 WARRANTY A. System Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard or customized form of system warranty without monetary limitation, agreeing to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. The warranty shall contain no exclusion or limitation for damage caused by wind or gale. Minimum wind speed limitation under warranty shall be 72 M.P.H. measured at 10 meters above ground level. 2. The warranty shall include all components of membrane roofing system such as membrane, insulation, cover board, substrate board, fasteners and plates, accessories, adhesives, sealants, term bars, pre-fabricated roof edge and coping systems, walkways and other components of membrane roofing system. 3. The warranty shall contain no exclusion or limitation for improper installation, or damage from environmental contaminants, or damage from water that ponds, or does not drain freely. 4. For repair and replacement, include costs of both material and labor in warranty. 5. Pro-Rated System Warranties shall not be accepted. 6. Warranty Term: 20 years, "No Dollar Limit." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. PVC Membrane Materials: 1. Carlisle SynTec: www.carlisle-syntec.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3. Sika Sarnafil, Inc: www.sarnafilus.com. 4. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Insulation: 1. As approved by membrane manufacturer. 2.02 ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS A. Membrane: 1. Material: Thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) complying with ASTM D6878. 2. Reinforcing: Internal fabric. 3. Thickness: 0.060 inch, nominal. 4. Sheet Width: Factory fabricated into largest sheets possible. 5. Acceptable Mechanically Attached PVC Products: a. Carlisle SynTec; Sure-Flex Polyvinyl Chloride Membrane. b. Johns Manville; JM PVC Membrane. c. Sika Sarnafil, Inc; Sarnafil S327 Membrane. B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. C. Membrane Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer to meet performance and warranty requirements. D. Flexible Flashing Material: Material recommended by membrane manufacturer. 2.03 COVER BOARD A. Cover Board: Glass mat faced gypsum panels, ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, fire resistant type. 1. Existing Roof Areas: 1/2 inch thick 2. New Roof Areas: 1/4 inch thick B. Basis-of-Design Product: 1. Johns Manville JM Invinsa Polyisocyannurate Cover Board: www.jm.com. 2. Other Available Products: Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 54 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 54 00 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING a. Carlisle: www.carlisle-syntec.com. b. Firestone: www.firestonebpco.com. 3. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.04 INSULATION A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1, cellulose felt or glass fiber mat both faces; Grade 2 and with the following characteristics: 1. Compressive Strength: 20 psi. 2. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. a. Provide 48 x 48 inch sheets for adhered applications unless otherwise approved by membrane manufacturer. 3. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 24. 4. Board Edges: Square. 5. Provide a minimum of two layers. 6. Provide tapered cricket materials where indicated. B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 3/8 inch per 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 2.05 METAL EDGING AND MEMBRANE TERMINATIONS A. Parapet Pre-Fabricated Metal Coping System: Provide coping system with full snap-on design with 20 gage galvanized steel anchor clips and factory applied stainless steel springs. Provide prefinished snap-on 0.04 inch aluminum cover. 1. Wind Performance: As required to meet ANSI/SPRI ED-1 Test Method RE-3. 2. Shaped Components: Provide factory-fabricated pieces necessary for a complete installation, including miters, corners, intersections, and end caps. Provide minimum 14 inch long legs on corner, intersection and end pieces. 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Johns Manville Presto-Lock Coping System -Tapered Version. Presto-Lock Coping. B. Coated Metal: 24 gage, galvanized steel sheet coated with a layer of non-reinforced TPO membrane flashing. Cut sheets to the appropriate width and use to fabricate metal drip edges or other roof perimeter edging profiles and scuppers. TPO membrane may be heat welded directly to the coated metal. 1. Color: To match membrane color. C. Sheet Metal Counterflashings: 24 gage minimum pre-painted sheet metal materials with hemmed drip edges. 1. Locations of Use: At all wall and curb locations where sheet metal counterflashing materials are required or detailed. D. Termination Bar: 1.35 inch wide and 0.098 inch thick roll formedaluminum bar pre-punched; which incorporates a sealant ledge to support sealant. Provide termination bar at all membrane termination points, including membrane terminations where sheet metal counterflashings are used and as required for manufacturer's warranty. E. Color of prefinished components furnished by this Section: Custom to match color of existing precast caps. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Stack Boots: Prefabricated flexible boot and collar for pipe stacks through membrane; same material as membrane. B. Wood Nailers: Furnish pressure treated 2x lumber materials to create wood nailer edge conditions at drip and rake edge locations, or wherever insulation and/or cover board edges are exposed Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 54 00 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 54 00 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING C. Insulation Joint Tape: Glass fiber reinforced type as recommended by insulation manufacturer, compatible with roofing materials; 6 inches wide; self adhering. D. Insulation Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer, where fasteners can be used to secure substrates. 1. Fastener Penetration: Minimum 3/4-inch. E. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. 2. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 3. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L. 4. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. 5. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. 6. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 7. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 8. Other Adhesives and Sealants: 250 g/L. F. Cover Board Adhesive: One part moisture curing, urethane foam adhesive as recommended by membrane manufacturer. G. Surface Conditioner for Adhesives: Compatible with membrane and adhesives. H. Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with membrane. I. Insulation Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer. J. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. K. Walkway Pads: Type recommended by membrane manufacturer, suitable for maintenance traffic, contrasting color or otherwise visually distinctive from roof membrane. Provide non-skid surface pattern. 1. Size: As indicated. 2. Products: a. Carlisle Sure-Flex PVC Weldable Walkway Rolls. b. Johns Manville PVC Walkpad. c. Sika Sarnafil Sarnatred. L. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories as recommended by membrane manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. C. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is outside the temperature range recommended by manufacturer. D. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. E. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. F. Coordinate the work with installation of associated counterflashings installed by other sections as the work of this section proceeds. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 54 00 -6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 54 00 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING G. Schedule and execute work to prevent leaks and excessive traffic on completed roof sections. Exercise care to provide protection for the interior of the building and to ensure water does not flow beneath any completed sections of the membrane system. H. When positioning membrane sheets, exercise care to locate all field splices away from low spots and out of drain sumps. Shingle all field splices. I. Proceed with work so new roofing materials are not subject to construction traffic. When necessary, inspect and protect new roof sections upon completion for possible damage. J. New roofing shall be complete and weather-tight at the end of the work day. K. Contaminants such as grease, fats and oils shall not be allowed to come in direct contact with the roofing membrane. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. At existing building roof areas, the existing roof is to remain in place. Work includes installing new cover board and membrane roofing over the existing built-up roofing system. At new addition roof areas,work includes installing new insulation and membrane roofing over steel roof decks. Refer to Roof Assembly Descriptions and Installation as described below for complete details of assembly components and installation criteria at specific roof areas. B. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. C. Verify deck is supported and secure. D. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and suitable for installation of roof system. E. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. F. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and nailing strips are in place. 3.03 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE A. Substrate must be even without noticeable high spots or depressions, and must be free of accumulated water, ice or snow. B. At existing roof areas, remove existing loose gravel materials from built-up roofing system. This can be accomplished by vacuum, power brooming, or sweeping. The remainder of the existing roofing system is to remain in place. C. Clear the substrate of debris and foreign material. 3.04 PARAPET WALL PLYWOOV OVERLAY INSTALLATION -EXISTING ROOF AREAS A. Prepare the concrete substrate for the installation of new plywood materials. B. Install new 1/2 inch thick CDX plywood materials over the inside face parapet substrate as defined in the architectural details. New plywood materials shall extend up to the top edge of the stone coping cap. The stone coping cap extends out from the wall approximately 2 inches. Adding an overlay of 1/2" plywood to the inside face of the parapet wall will result in a flush condition. Where plywood is terminated, bevel the outside edges to create a smooth transition for membrane wall flashings. C. At the stone coping cap, mechanically secure the plywood overlay materials using 3/16 inch diameter Tapcon Concrete Screws. Pre-drill a pilot hole using a hammer drill and 5/32 inch carbide drill bit. Hole depth shall be 1 inch deeper than fastener penetration requirements. Hole shall be cleaned out with high pressure air or vacuum prior to installation of fastener. Fastener penetration into concrete substrate shall result in a minimum of between 1.0 and a maximum of 1.75 inches. Using an electric drill with Phillips bit, drive anchor into the concrete substrate and tighten until fully seated. Care should be taken to not overdrive or torque the fastener. Once properly seated, the fastener head shall be counter-sunk into the plywood, resulting in a flush condition. Mechanically secure at 9 inches on center. D. At the lower portion of the plywood overlay, mechanically secure the board with appropriate screw type fasteners - into wood lumber backing, as shown on architectural details. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 54 00 - 7 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 54 00 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 3.05 INSULATION, COVER BOARD, AND TAPERED CRICKET INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and/or cover board materials over the substrate with boards butted tightly together with no joints or gaps greater than 1/4 inch. Stagger joints both horizontally and vertically where multiple layers are required. B. Tapered cricket materials shall be installed at locations identified on the roof plan, and wherever ponding water conditions may exist. Tapered materials shall be sandwiched between the roof deck and the insulation and/or cover board materials. C. Mechanically secure the insulation and cover board materials to the roof deck substrates per manufacturer requirements. Completed installation shall satisfy warranty requirements. 3.06 MEMBRANE PLACEMENT AND ATTACHMENT A. Mechanically attach the new TPO membrane roofing system per manufacturers requirements. Install system in accordance with the specified warranty requirements. B. Hot air weld the membrane sheets a minimum of 1-1/2" with an Automatic Hot Air Welding Machine. C. Membrane that has been exposed to the elements for approximately 7 days must be prepared with TPO Membrane Cleaner. Wipe the surface where TPO Membrane Cleaner has been applied with a clean, dry HP Splice Wipe or other white rag to remove cleaner residue prior to hot air welding. D. Install adjoining membrane sheets in the same manner in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. E. When using 60-mil thick TPO Membrane, a surface splice of TPO Non-Reinforced Flashing must be applied over all "T"joint splice intersections. Refer to the manufacturer's technical manual. 3.07 FLASHING A. Flash all walls and curbs with TPO 60-mil thick reinforced membrane. Non-Reinforced membrane shall be limited to inside and outside corners, field fabricated pipe seals, scuppers and Sealant Pockets where the use of premolded accessories are not practical. Terminate the flashing in accordance with manufacturer's Termination Details. To satisfy 20 year warranty requirements, membrane wall flashings must be terminated with termination bar at all locations, even when sheet metal counter-flashings overlap the membrane. B. Follow manufacturer's typical flashing procedures for all wall, curb, and penetration flashings including metal edging/coping and roof drain applications. C. At parapet wall locations, extend wall flashing materials up and over the top, and down the outside edge where possible. Terminate the membrane per manufacturer's requirements. D. See roof plan and associated roofing details for job specific flashing requirements. 3.08 ROOF ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTIONS AND INSTALLATION: A. ROOF TYPE 1 - REROOF OVER EXISTING ROOFING SYSTEM: 1. Roof Deck Type: Concrete roof deck - structurally sloped. 2. Existing Roofing System: Existing roofing system is to remain in-place. Remove loose gravel materials from built-up roofing system. Power broom or vacuum gravel from the existing roof surface to create a smooth substrate condition. 3. Existing Base Flashings: Remove existing built-up roofing system base flashings at all walls and curbs. 4. Existing Wet or Saturated Materials: Cut-out and remove wet or saturated existing materials, and replace with new insulation in-fill materials. Ensure that completed in-fill materials are relatively flush with surrounding existing roofing system materials. 5. Existing Roof Blisters and/or Stress Ridges: Slit or cut open any blisters or stress ridges that may be present in the existing built-up roofing system. After slitting open deficiencies, install membrane fasteners with plates into the roof deck to secure the delaminated blistered built-up materials. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 54 00 - 8 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 54 00 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 6. Existing Lead Pipe Flashings: Remove existing lead pipe flashings and discard accordingly. 7. Existing Sheet Metal Counter Flashings: Remove existing sheet metal counter-flashings at all walls and curbs. New materials shall be fabricated from 24 gauge pre-painted sheet metal materials, and shall be minimum 6 inch wide with hemmed drip edges. 8. Existing Saw-Cut Reglet Wall Flashings: Remove existing saw-cut reglet wall flashing materials and replace with new pre-painted sheet metal flashings. Saw-cut reglet flashings shall counter flash over the top of the new membrane wall flashings at all areas. Existing caulking materials located within the saw-cut is to be removed and replaced with new. 9. Existing Through-wall Scupper Drains: Remove and replace with new all through-wall scupper drain and overflow drain sleeve inserts. Replace with new TPO membrane clad metal inserts. New membrane clad sleeve inserts shall match the dimensions of existing inserts. 10. Existing Wood Sleepers, Wood Gas Line Supports, or Wood Electrical Supports: Where necessary, remove existing wood sleeper materials supporting gas and electrical conduit lines and replace with new pressure treated lumber materials. New sleeper supports shall match the elevation height of existing supports. Install a protection layer of membrane or walkway pad material between the new roof membrane and wood sleeper material. Protection material shall be mechanically secured to the sides of the wood support. 11. Existing Main Internal Drains: Prepare existing internal drain bowls for new membrane application. Using a wire brush, remove built-up roofing materials from the drain bowl substrate, including the compression ring. Remove and replace with new any broken or missing compression ring bolts. Remove and replace with new missing or damaged leaf guards. 12. Disposal: Dispose of materials properly and according to local, state, and federal code requirements. 13. New Cover Board: Install and mechanically fasten JM Invinsa Roof Cover Board over the existing roof to the concrete roof deck substrate in accordance with roofing manufacturer's instructions. 14. New Tapered Cricket Materials: Install and mechanically attach Tapered Cricket Insulation materials at equipment curbs, between roof drains, or wherever ponding water may occur. Install cricketing materials below cover board materials. Refer to the architectural roof plan page for identification of cricket materials. 15. New TPO 60-mil Membrane: Mechanically attach JM TPO 60-mil membrane over the new cover board materials, and secure to the concrete roof deck substrate using membrane fasteners and plates. Hot air weld the TPO membrane sheets using the Automatic Hot Air Welding Machine or Hot Air Hand Welder in accordance with the manufacturer's hot air welding procedures. Install according to JM's 20 year 72 MPH warranty requirements. 16. Parapet Wall Membrane Flashings: At exterior parapet wall locations, extend new membrane wall flashings up and over the newly installed plywood overlay materials. Extend membrane flashings over the top of the stone coping materials and terminate on the outside edge. Membrane flashings shall be adhered with TPO Bonding Adhesive. 17. New Pre-fabricated Metal Coping System: At exterior parapet wall locations where identified on the architectural roof plan page, install JM Presto-Lock Coping System - Tapered Version. Mechanically secure to the parapet substrates per manufacturer requirements. B. ROOF TYPE 2 - ROOFING AT NEW CONSTRUCTION AREAS: 1. Roof Deck Type: Steel roof deck - structurally sloped. 2. New Insulation: Install and mechanically attach 2 layers of 1.7 inch thick ENRGY 3 Polyisocyanurate Insulation to the steel roof deck substrate. Total overall thickness of rigid flat stock insulation shall be 3.4 inches. 3. New Tapered Cricket Materials: Install and mechanically attach Tapered Cricket Insulation materials at equipment curbs, between roof drains, or wherever ponding water may occur. Install cricketing materials between rigid foam board and cover board materials. Refer to the architectural roof plan page for identification of cricket materials. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 54 00 - 9 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 54 00 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 4. New Roof Cover Board: Install and mechanically attach 1/4 inch thick Invinsa Roof Cover Board over the underlying rigid foam board insulation materials -at all areas. Install according to JM 20 year 72 MPH warranty requirements. 5. New TPO Membrane: Install and mechanically attach JM TPO 60-mil membrane over the new cover board and insulation materials. Fasten to the steel roof deck substrate using membrane fasteners and plates. Hot air weld the TPO membrane sheets using the Automatic Hot Air Welding Machine or Hot Air Hand Welder in accordance with the manufacturer's hot air welding procedures. Install according to JM's 20 year 72 MPH warranty requirements. 3.09 WALKWAYS A. Install JM TPO Walkway materials at all traffic concentration points (such as roof hatches, access doors, rooftop ladders, etc.) and all locations as identified on the specifier's drawing. B. Install TPO walkways to the JM TPO membrane in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. 3.10 DAILY SEAL A. On phased roofing, when the completion of flashings and terminations is not achieved by the end of the work day, a daily seal must be performed to temporarily close the membrane to prevent water infiltration. B. Use water cut-off mastic or other acceptable membrane seal in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. 3.11 CLEAN UP A. Perform daily clean-up to collect all wrappings, empty containers, paper, and other debris from the project site. Upon completion, all debris must be disposed of in a legally acceptable manner. B. Prior to the manufacturer's inspection for warranty, the applicator must perform a pre-inspection to review all work and to verify all flashing has been completed as well as the application of all caulking. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 54 00 - 10 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, downspouts, and other items indicated in Schedule. B. Reglets and accessories. C. Precast concrete splash pads. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Flashings at base of masonry veneer. B. Section 07 54 00 -Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: Roofing systems and related parapet copings. C. Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories: Roof-mounted units. D. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers. E. Section 08 63 00 - Metal-Framed Skylights: Metal curbs. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2605 -Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. B. ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Roof Edge Standard. C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. D. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. E. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. F. ASTM B749- Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. G. ASTM D226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. H. ASTM D1970 - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection. I. ASTM D2244 - Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. J. ASTM D4214 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. K. ASTM D4479/D4479M -Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Coatings -Asbestos-Free. L. SMACNA(ASMM)-Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association. 1.04 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1. Insure that all parties whose work interfaces with roof system application are in attendance. These parties include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Owner. b. Architect. c. Contractor. d. Contractor's superintendent. e. Sheet metal contractor. f. Roofing installer. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 62 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM g. Roofing manufacturer's representative. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen. and shall remain watertight. B. Design, fabricate and install flashings at roof edges in accordance with ANSI/SPRI, ES-1, except with basic wind speed of 85 mph. C. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that does not allow water infiltration to building interior. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile,jointing pattern,jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details. B. Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating metal finish color. C. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 10 years of documented experience. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Special Project Warranty: Submit Installer's warranty, on Installer's standard or customized form, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of flashing and sheet metal against defects in materials and workmanship, for the following warranty period: 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.028 inch (24 gage)thick base metal. B. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.028 inch (24 gage)thick base metal, unless otherwise indicated, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating. 1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system. C. Lead: ASTM B749, 2.5 lb/sq ft thick. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 62 00 -2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666 Type 304, soft temper, 0.025 inch (24 gage)thick, unless otherwise indicated; smooth No. 4 finish. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Stainless steel, with soft neoprene washers. Where exposed to view, finish to match color of metal being fastened. B. Underlayment: ASTM D226, organic roofing felt, Type II ("No. 30"). C. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet(SAHTS): Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F. 3. Products: a. Carlisle Coatings &Waterproofing Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT. b. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. c. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment. d. Protecto Wrap Company; High Softening Point RainProof-40. e. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. D. Primer: Zinc chromate type. E. Protective Backing Paint: Asphaltic mastic, ASTM D 4479 Type I. F. Sealant: As specified in Section 07 90 05. G. Reglets: The following types, galvanized steel: 1. Surface mounted: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge. 2. Concrete Type: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of concrete materials, special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete forms, and guides to ensure alignment of reglet section ends. 3. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint. 4. Accessories: a. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing. b. Counterflashiri, Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge. H. Solder: ASTM B32; Sn50 (50/50)type. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view. B. Field verify dimensions prior to fabrication. C. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 62 00- 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. Fabricate in sizes recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 1. Provide continuous cleats on outside face of copings. E. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. F. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. G. Form material with standing seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. 1. Standing Seams: 1-inch high with sealant at folded corners. 2. Solder-Lap Seams: 1-inch finish width; sweat full with solder. 3. Double S Lock Seams: Form 1-1/4 inch with S shaped seam on each edge of flashing sheet for concealed fastening. H. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. Solder galvanized steel that is not prefinished. Do not solder prefinished steel. 1. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. I. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. J. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 4 inches over roofing. Return and break edges. 2.04 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION A. Gutters: Profile as indicated. B. Downspouts: Profile as indicated. C. Gutters and Downspouts: Sizes indicated. D. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts. 1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements. 2. Gutter Supports: Brackets, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Downspout Supports: Brackets, unless otherwise indicated. E. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, of size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment. F. Pipe Downspouts: As specified in Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications. G. Seal metal joints. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant. C. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 62 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM B. Install Work watertight and weathertight, without oil canning, buckles, tool marks, fastening stresses, distortion or defects which impair strength or mar appearance. C. Roof-Edge Flashings: Secure metal flashings at roof edges according to Section 1505.5 of the International Building Code. D. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. E. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Coat back side of stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet. F. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with lead wedges. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant. G. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. H. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles. I. Install high-temperature self-adhered membrane (SAHTS)flashing where indicated. Install under all copings except where roof membrane extends under the full width of coping. Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days or as required by underlayment manufacturer. J. Seal metal joints watertight. K. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact for flashings that are not prefinished. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. 1. Clean and flux metals prior to soldering. 2. Perform soldering with a heavy soldering copper of blunt design, properly tinned for use. 3. Perform soldering slowly with a wall heated surface and fill with solder. 4. Do not solder coil-coated galvanized sheet steel. L. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. M. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten. N. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant. O. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. P. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill,jamb and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 62 00 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Q. Wall Flashing: Fabricate and install with interlocking seams at bottom as indicated in SMACNA Figure 3-9 with alternate fastening method. Provide 24 inch (610 mm) wide panels with flat seams (Alternate Section A-A). R. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member. S. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners. T. Connect gutters to downspouts with leaders. Seal connection watertight. U. Set splash pads under downspouts where indicated. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified requirements. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim from the following materials of the minimum thicknesses indicated, unless otherwise required on the Drawings or to meet performance requirements. B. Gutters with Girth 16 to 20 inches: 1. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (24 gage)thick. C. Downspouts: Fabricate complete with mitered elbows. 1. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (24 gage)thick. D. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch-wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. 1. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (24 gage)thick. E. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes, exterior flange trim and built-in overflows. 1. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (24 gage)thick. F. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long, but not exceeding 10-foot-long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. 1. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (24 gage) thick. 2. Refer to Section 07 54 00 -Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing for parapet copings provided by roofing manufacturer. G. Saddles: Fabricate concealed saddles fully welded. 1. Stainless Steel: 0.031 (22 gage) thick where in contact with masonry. 2. Galvanized Steel: 0.034 inch (22 gage)thick, all other locations, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. H. Base Flashing: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (24 gage)thick. I. Counterflashing: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (24 gage)thick. J. Flashing Receivers: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch (26 gage)thick. K. Roof-Penetration Flashing: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (24 gage)thick. L. Roof-Drain Flashing: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch (28 gage)thick. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 62 00 - 6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM M. Wall Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (24 gage)thick. N. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill,jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch-high, end dams. 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch (26 gage)thick. O. Door Sill Pans: Fabricate door sill pan flashings, and soldered closure flashing (saddles)for deck-to-column intersections with all corners soldered 100 percent watertight. 1. Stainless Steel: 0.025 inch (24 gage)thick. P. Storefront Sill Pans: Fabricate storefront sill pan flashings with end and back dams and all corners sealed watertight. 1. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (24 gage)thick. Q. Equipment Support Flashing: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (24 gage)thick. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 62 00- 7 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES SECTION 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof hatches. B. Roof hatch railing system. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Roof accessory items fabricated from sheet metal. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used. 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Maintenance requirements. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF HATCHES A. Manufacturers - Roof Hatches: 1. Acudor Products Inc: www.acudor.com. 2. Bilco Co.: www.bilco.com 3. Dur-Red Products: www.dur-red.com. 4. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart& Cooley, Inc: www.milcorinc.com. 5. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Roof Hatches: Factory-assembled aluminum frame and cover, complete with operating and release hardware. 1. Style: Provide flat metal covers unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mounting: Provide frames and curbs suitable for mounting on flat roof deck. 3. For Ship's Ladder Access: Single leaf; 30 by 54 inches. C. Frames/Curbs: One-piece curb and frame with integral cap flashing to receive roof flashings; extended bottom flange to suit mounting. 1. Material: Mill finished aluminum, 11 gage, 0.125 inch thick. 2. Insulation: 1 inch rigid fiberboard, located on outside face of curb. 3. Curb Height: 12 inches from finished surface of roof, minimum. D. Metal Covers: Flush, insulated, hollow metal construction. 1. Capable of supporting 40 psf live load. 2. Material: Mill finished aluminum; outer cover 0.125 inch thick, liner 0.04 inch thick. 3. Insulation: 1 inch rigid glass fiber. 4. Gasket: Neoprene, continuous around cover perimeter. E. Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated or required by manufacturer. 1. Lifting Mechanisms: Compression or torsion spring operator with shock absorbers that automatically opens upon release of latch; capable of lifting covers despite 10 psf load. 2. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type. 3. Hold open arm with vinyl-coated handle for manual release. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 72 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES 4. Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release. 5. Manual Release: Pull handle on interior. 6. Locking: Padlock hasp on interior. 2.02 ROOF HATCH RAILING SYSTEM A. Railing System: Provide manufacturer's standard railing system that directly attaches to hatch curbs. B. Characteristics: 1. Safety yellow color. 2. Railing system shall attach to cap flashing of the roof hatch and shall not penetrate any roofing material. 3. Meet the requirements of OSHA 29 CFR 1910.23 and OSHA strength requirements with a factor of safety of no less than two. 4. Provide self-closing gate. 5. Posts and Rails: Round reinforced fire retardant fiberglass treated with a UV inhibitor. 6. Hardware: a. Mounting Brackets: 1/4 inch thick hot dip galvanized steel. b. Hinges and Post Guides: 6063-T5 aluminum. c. Fasteners: Type 316 stainless steel. C. Basis-of-Design Product: Model RL-NB manufactured by Bilco Company. 1. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify substrate openings are coordinated with frame sizes before proceeding with installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing weather integrity. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean installed work to like-new condition. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 72 00 -2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping systems. B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire-resistance rated and smoke-resistant assemblies . 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. C. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. D. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc. E. FM P7825-Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation. F. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and firestopping test or design number. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations. 1. Include printed statement of VOC content and chemical components. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For penetration firestopping indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including product data and, where applicable, engineering judgment drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Submit submittals as "Deferred Submittals" in accordance with Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. Transmit a copy of each submittal indicating agency approval to the Architect for record. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Certificate from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide fire ratings equal to the fire rating of the assembly penetrated when tested in accordance with methods indicated. 1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock Hersey)will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. 2. Valid evaluation report published by ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES) at www.icc-es.org will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. 3. Submission of actual test reports is required for assemblies for which none of the above substantiation exists. B. Manufacturer's Representative: A manufacturer's direct representative (not distributor or agent) shall be on-site during initial installation of systems to train appropriate personnel in proper selection and installation procedures. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 84 00- 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING D. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials. B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design. 2.02 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. Grace Construction Products. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Johns Manville. 5. Nelson Firestop Products. 6. RectorSeal Corporation. 7. Specified Technologies Inc. 8. 3M Fire Protection Products. 9. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. B. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. 1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 or ASTM E 119 that has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and T Rating Equal to F Rating and that meets all other specified requirements. C. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E84. D. VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping that complies with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. E. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 84 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could adversely affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond. C. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage" or similar indication that the penetration is fire-rated. 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 84 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing. B. Precompressed foam sealers. C. Precompressed gaskets. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. B. ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. D. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. E. ASTM C1248 - Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants. F. ASTM C1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid Applied Sealants. G. ASTM C1521 - Standard Practice for Evaluating Adhesion of Installed Weatherproofing Sealant Joints. H. ASTM D1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed-Cell). I. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hardness. J. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. K. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; www.aqmd.gov. 1.03 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. a. Locate test joints on integrated exterior mock-ups, where applicable. 2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below: a. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present. a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C1521. 1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 90 05- 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant performance criteria, substrate preparation, and limitations. 1. For sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system, include printed statement of VOC content. B. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application,joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. D. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate surface preparation. F. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing"Article. G. Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested. H. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years experience. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer. D. Product Testing: Provide products tested according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Silicone Sealants: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for All other Types of Sealants: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 90 05 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANTS A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. B. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. C. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. D. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.02 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT. 1. Products: a. BASF Building Systems; Omniseal 50. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 795. c. Momentive Performance Materials (formerly GE Silicones); SilPruf SCS2000. d. Pecora Corporation; 864. e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C995. f. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2. 2. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C 1248. 3. Locations of Use: a. Control, expansion and isolation joints in steel or aluminum. B. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 1. Products: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. Momentive Performance Materials (formerly GE Silicones); SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. Pecora Corporation; 890. d. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. e. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1. 2. Sanding of Joints: Provide sanded joints at joints occurring in masonry surfaces. 3. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C1248. 4. Locations of Use: a. Exterior joints in vertical and nontraffic surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. b. Vertical control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. c. Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings. C. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Products: a. BASF Building Systems; Omniplus. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. c. Momentive Performance Materials (formerly GE Advanced Materials); Sanitary SCSI 700. d. Pecora Corporation; 898. e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary or Tremsil 600. 2. Locations of Use: a. Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors and counters. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 90 05 - 3 Pnnted 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS b. Interior joints between cabinetry and counters and adjoining walls. D. Single-Component, Silicone USDA Approved Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Products: a. BASF Building Systems; Omniplus. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. c. Momentive Performance Materials (formerly GE Advanced Materials); Sanitary SCS 1002. d. Pecora Corporation; 898. e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600. 2. Locations of Use: a. Interior joints in contact with food. 2.03 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T. 1. Products: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP 2. b. Pecora Corporation; Dynatred. c. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 2c NS. d. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240FC. 2. Locations of Use: a. Interior ceramic tile expansion control and isolation joints in vertical surfaces. b. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls. B. Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T and I. 1. Products: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic SL 2. b. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200. c. Sika Corporation, Inc. Sikaflex - 2c SL. d. Tremco Incorporated; THC 900/901. 2. Locations of Use: a. Interior ceramic tile expansion, control, construction and isolation joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. b. Exterior paving joints. C. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 1. Products: a. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 15LM. b. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic FC. 2. Locations of Use: a. Within the field of fiber cement siding. 2.04 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. 2. Locations of Use: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and elevator entrances. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 90 05 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS 2.05 POLYUREA JOINT SEALANTS A. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, aromatic polyurea with a Type A shore durometer hardness range of 85 to 95 per ASTM D2240. 1. Products: a. BASF, TF-100. b. Euclid Chemical Company, QUIKjoint 200. c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Joint Tite 750. 2. Locations of Use: a. Interior joints in floor slabs. 2.06 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS A. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturers standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping. 1. Products: a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals; Polytite Standard. b. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V. c. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Polyseal. d. Tremco Incorporated; Illmod 600. B. Precompressed Gaskets: Preformed expanding foam sealant the provides watertight secondary sealing in application behind conventionally install sealant and backer rod. Seal shall be comprised of water-based, 100 percent acrylic, impregnated expanding foam sealant with internal laminations of closed cell foam. Factory produce in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated, coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping. 1. Locations of Use: Behind backer rod and sealant at precast panel joints. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Backerseal. a. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.07 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E90. 1. Products: a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR b. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. c. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2.08 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. Confirm requirements based on preconstruction field testing. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM C 1330 Type B, cylindrical, bi-cellular material; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. 1. Products: a. Sof Rod manufactured by Nomaco Inc. b. Sonolastic Soft Backer-Rod manufactured by BASF. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 90 05 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. B. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction field tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Seal all exposed joints of dissimilar materials and elsewhere as indicated. B. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. C. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193. D. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. E. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations. F. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer. G. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. H. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. I. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. J. Tool joints concave. K. Seal bottoms of hollow metal frames to floor at resilient flooring. L. Seal edges of wainscots to door jambs. M. Seal thresholds in a full bed of sealant. N. Sanding Joint Sealants: At masonry surfaces, sand sealant joints within one floor of an adjacent walking surface as follows: 1. Dry tool the sealant assuring a minimum sealant thickness of 1/8 inch in the middle of the joint. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 90 05 - 6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS 2. Before the sealant has skinned, deposit the selected sand, grout, or stone particles to the tacky sealant surface using whatever method is site appropriate (casting, tossing, air-blowing). Catch the excess particles, if possible, for reuse. Start at the lower levels and work up to minimize substrate contamination below. 3. Compress the particles into the surface of the un-skinned sealant to a depth of not greater than 1/16-inch, using a dry tool or other technique. 4. Allow the joint sealant to cure a minimum of seven days before testing the adhesion of the particles to the sealant or the sealant to the substrate. O. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface. P. Installation of Precompressed Gasket: Install in joints of precast panels in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions at depth sufficient to allow installation of properly sized backer rod and sealant in front of gasket. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Provide periodic field-adhesion testing as work progresses. Submit test results after each test. 2. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation. 3. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C1521. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 4. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria. 5. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 90 05 - 7 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. B. Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 07 90 05 - 8 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames. B. Steel frames for wood doors. C. Fire-rated steel doors and frames. D. Thermally insulated steel doors. E. Steel glazing frames. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. B. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites. C. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 -American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council. B. ANSI A250.6 - Hardware on Standard Steel Doors (Reinforcement--Application). C. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. D. ANSI A250.10 -Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. F. ASTM C665- Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. G. ASTM C1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus. H. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750°C. I. BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames. J. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. K. NFPA 105- Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening Protectives. L. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. M. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. N. UL 1784- Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. 1. Indicate U-Value for exterior doors. C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 11 13 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly. E. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to UL 10C. C. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784. 1.06 DEFINITIONS A. Seamless: In addition to the requirements for full flush doors as defined in ANSI/SDI A250.8, no visible seams are permitted along the vertical edges of doors. Fabricate seams on the vertical edges by one of the following methods: 1. Intermittently welded seams, edge filled, dressed smooth, or 2. Continuously welded seam dressed smooth. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Assa Abloy Ceco or Curries: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Door Components: www.doorcomponents.com. 3. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com. 4. Stiles Custom Metal, Inc.: www.stiles.com. 5. Basis of Design Products: a. Level 2 and Level 3 Doors: BW18 and BW 16, respectively, manufactured by Steelcraft. b. Frames: F16 and F14 manufactured by Steelcraft. 6. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1. 2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 4. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 5. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings. 6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with ANSI/SDI 250.6, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard and as follows: a. Closers: 0.093 inch, 12 gage. b. Hinges: 0.167 inch, 7 gage. c. All other surface applied hardware: 0.067 inch, 14 gage. 7. Galvanizing Exterior Door and Frames: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed), in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A60/ZF180 coating and factory primed. 8. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. a. Provide primer compatible with primers specified in Section 09 96 00 - High-Performance Coatings. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 11 13 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent. 2.03 STEEL DOORS A. Exterior Doors : 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 as indicated below: a. Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, seamless, unless otherwise indicated. b. Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless, for doors 42 inches in width or greater. 2. Core: Vertical steel stiffeners, minimum 0.032 inch, 20 gage thick at 6 inches on center. 3. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A60/ZF180 coating and factory primed. 4. Insulating Value: U-value of 0.60, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363. 5. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00. B. Interior Doors, Non-Fire-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 as indicated below: a. Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, seamless, unless otherwise indicated. b. Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless, for doors 42 inches in width or greater. 2. Core: Vertical steel stiffeners, minimum 0.032 inch, 20 gage thick. 3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. C. Interior Doors, Fire-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 as indicated below: a. Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, seamless, unless otherwise indicated. b. Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless, for doors 42 inches in width or greater. 2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door, Frame and Relite Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C ("positive pressure"). a. Provide units listed and labeled by UL. b. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit. 3. Core: Vertical steel stiffeners, minimum 0.032 inch, 20 gage thick. 2.04 STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. a. ANSI A250.8 Level 2 Doors: 16 gage frames. b. ANSI A250.8 Level 3 Doors: 14 gage frames. c. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for Level 2, 16 gage. 2. Finish: Same as for door. 3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted. 4. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches high to fill opening without cutting masonry units. 5. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. 6. Frames Installed Back-to-Back: Reinforce with steel channels anchored to floor and overhead structure. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 11 13 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES B. Exterior Door Frames: Fully welded. 1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A60/ZF180 coating and factory primed. 2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00. C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Fully welded type. D. Interior Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Fully welded type. 1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled. E. Mullions for Pairs of Doors: Removable type, of profile similar to jambs. F. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00 . B. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6-to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E136 for combustion characteristics. C. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. D. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames. E. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. F. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick. Provide clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2.06 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10 and compatible with finish coats specified in Section 09 96 00- High Performance Coatings. B. Corrosion Resistant Coating: High-build, water-resistant, resilient coating NFPA 101 Class A. 1. Product: Hi-Build Epoxoline II N69 manufactured by Tnemec or equal. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 2. Install top cap and mechanically attach to door to prevent water intrusion. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 11 13 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 3. Floor Anchors: Provide adjustable base anchors at bottom of jambs. Provide fixed anchors at mullions. 4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 90 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Four anchors per jamb up to 90 inches high. 2) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 3) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. 5. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped or gasketed doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with corrosion resistant coating at 4 mil DFT, prior to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard . B. In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80. C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. D. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames. E. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. F. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. G. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 1. At post-installed anchors, countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. H. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. I. Coordinate installation of hardware. J. Coordinate installation of glazing. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 11 13 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 11 13 -6 Printed 2/2212013 SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; non-rated. B. Factory finishing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. B. Section 08 34 73 - Sound Control Door Assemblies. C. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. D. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.1 -American National Standard for Particleboard. B. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)-Architectural Woodwork Standards. C. WDMA I.S.1-A-Architectural Wood Flush Doors; Window and Door Manufacturers Association. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Indicate compliance with WDMA standards, door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling, blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details. 1. Provide product data for adhesives and composite wood products, indicating that product contains no added urea formaldehyde. C. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 8-1/2 by 11 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. E. Warranty, executed in Owner's name. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and finishing. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. C. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors." 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation. B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 14 16 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 1. Algoma Hardwoods: www.algomahardwoods.com. 2. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com. 3. Lynden Door, Inc.: lyndendoor.com. 4. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc: www.marshfielddoors.com. 5. Oregon Door: www.oregondoor.com. 6. Oshkosh Door Company: www.oshkoshdoor.com. 7. Vancouver Door Company: www.vancouverdoorco.corn. 8. VT Industries, Inc.: www.vtindustries.com. 2.02 DOORS A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain added urea formaldehyde or doors that comply with CA 01350, the State of California's Department of Health Services Standard Practice for testing chemical emissions from building products used in schools, offices and other sensitive environments. Third party certification for this testing is required. B. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements. 1. Quality Level: Custom Grade, Extra Heavy Duty performance, in accordance with WDMA I.S.1-A. 2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. C. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at all locations . 2. Wood veneer facing with factory transparent finish where indicated on drawings. 2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2, plies and faces as indicated above, made with binder containing no added urea-formaldehyde resin or provide certification for low chemical emissions complying with CA 01350 noted above. 1. Provide structural composite lumber core for full glazed doors. 2.04 DOOR FACINGS A. Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: White maple, Grade A veneer, plain sliced, book veneer match, running assembly match. 1. Vertical Edges: Same species as face veneer. 2. Pairs: Pair match each pair; set match pairs within 10 feet of each other when doors are closed. B. Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Glazing Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws. 2.06 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. B. Blocking: Provide minimum 5 inch top rail blocking for all doors with closers. Provide 5 inch bottom rail for auxiliary hardware and undercut flexibility. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 14 16 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS C. Stiles (Vertical Edges): Provide manufacturer's standard laminated edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Both inner and outer stiles cannot contain salt treating. D. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. E. Factory fit factory finished doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard except as follows: 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads,jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. F. Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. G. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified. 2.07 FACTORY FINISHING -WOOD VENEER DOORS A. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 5 - Finishing for Grade specified and as follows: 1. Transparent: a. System - 9, UV Curable, Acrylated Epoxy, Polyester or Urethane. b. Stain: As selected by Architect. c. Sheen: Semigloss. B. Finish doors at factory. C. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample. D. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door. C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. E. Coordinate installation of glazing. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust closers for full closure. C. Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 14 16-3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS D. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 14 16 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 31 00 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS SECTION 08 31 00 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall access door and frame units. B. Access panels to gain access to equipment specified in Division 22, 23 and 26, as well as where panels are not shown on Drawings, are provided as Work of other Sections. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field paint finish. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, fire rating, scheduled location, and details of adjoining work. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access door units. C. Access Door and Frame Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all access units. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.05 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Submittals"Article. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCESS DOOR AND PANEL APPLICATIONS 2.02 WALL AND CEILING UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Acudor Products Inc: www.acudor.com. 2. JL Industries: www.activarcpg.com/jl-industries. 3. Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com. 4. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart& Cooley, Inc: www.milcorinc.com. 5. Nystrom: nystrom.com B. Access Doors: Factory fabricated door and frame units, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to be installed in. 1. Material: Steel. 2. Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges. 3. Material: Steel. 4. Steel Finish: Primed. 5. Primed Finish: Polyester powder coat; manufacturer's standard color. 6. Hardware: a. Hinges for Non-Fire-Rated Units: Continuous piano hinge or concealed, constant force closure spring as standard with manufacturer. b. Latch/Lock: Cylinder lock operated cam latch, two keys for each unit. c. Number of Locks/Latches Required: As recommended by the manufacturer for the size of the unit. C. Non-Fire Rated Door and Frame Units in Walls: Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 31 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 31 00 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 1. In Cast-In-Place Concrete: a. Model UF-5000 manufactured by Acudor. b. Model TM manufactured by JL Industries. c. Model DSC-214M manufactured by Karp. d. Style M manufactured by Milcor. e. Model NT manufactured by Nystrom. 2. In Masonry: a. Model UF-5000 manufactured by Acudor. b. Model TM manufactured by JL Industries. c. Model DSC-214M manufactured by Karp. d. Style M manufactured by Milcor. e. Model NT manufactured by Nystrom. 3. In Tile: a. Model UF-5000 manufactured by Acudor. b. Model TM manufactured by JL Industries. c. Model DSC-214M manufactured by Karp. d. Style M manufactured by Milcor. e. Model NT manufactured by Nystrom. 4. In Gypsum Board on Steel Studs: a. Model DW-5040 manufactured by Acudor. b. Model WB manufactured by JL Industries. c. Model KDW manufactured by Karp. d. Style DW manufactured by Milcor. e. Model NW manufactured by Nystrom. D. Non-Fire Rated Door and Frame Units in Ceilings: 1. In Gypsum Board on Metal Furring: a. Model DW-5040 manufactured by Acudor. b. Model WB manufactured by JL Industries. c. Model KDW manufactured by Karp. d. Style DW manufactured by Milcor. e. Model NW manufactured by Nystrom. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. 1. Exposed Flanges: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches wide around perimeter of frame. 2. For trimless frames with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board securely attached to perimeter of frames. Provide trimless frames for all gypsum board applications. D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 31 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 31 00 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces. D. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 31 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 33 26 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES SECTION 08 33 26 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Overhead coiling metal grilles and operating hardware, electric operation. B. Emergency response automatic coiling metal grilles and operating hardwar, electric operation. C. Wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Cylinder cores and keys. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. B. ASTM B221 M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]. C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association. D. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC; National Electrical Manufacturers Association. E. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association. F. UL (EAUED)- Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.. G. UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details, electrical equipment . B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and installation details. C. Samples: Submit two grille members, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating shape, color and finish texture. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and procedures, adjustment and alignment procedures. E. Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency. F. . Provide an ICC-ES evaluation report covering the provisions of Section 1008.1.4.4 of the 2009 International Building Code 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of grille and operating hardware assembly. B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Overhead Coiling Grilles: 1. Cornell Iron Works, Inc.: www.cornelliron.com. 2. Overhead Door Corporation: www.overheaddoor.com. 3. The Cookson Company: www.cooksondoor.com. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 33 26- 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 33 26 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 4. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 GRILLE AND COMPONENTS A. Grille: Aluminum; horizontal bar curtain, coiling on overhead counterbalanced shaft. 1. Finish: No. 4. 2. Finish: Anodized, clear color. 3. Lock: Inside cylinder lock. 4. Electric operation. 5. Mounting: As indicated. B. Curtain: Round horizontal bars connected with vertical links. 1. Horizontal bars: 5/16 inch diameter. 2. Bar spacing: 2 inch on center. 3. Tube spacers: 1/2 inch diameter. 4. Link spacing: 9 inch on center. 5. Bar Ends: Provide with nylon runners for quiet operation. 6. Bottom Bar: Extruded tube, 4 inches high by 1-3/4 inches deep with safety edge system or back-to-back angles with tubular resilient cushion, as standard with manufacturer. C. Guides: Extruded aluminum guides, of profile to retain grille in place , mounting brackets of same metal. D. Hood Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard aluminum sheet; internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape. 1. Finish: Clear anodized aluminum. E. Hardware: 1. Lock Cylinders: Specified in Section 08 71 00. a. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated grilles with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when grille is locked. F. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding position at mid-travel; with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 lb nominal force to operate. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). 2.04 ELECTRIC OPERATION -STANDARD OVERHEAD COILING GRILLE A. Operator, Controls, Actuators, and Safeties: Comply with UL 325; provide products listed by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Electric Operators: 1. Mounting: Side mounted. 2. Motor Enclosure: a. Interior grilles: NEMA MG 1 Type 1; open drip proof. 3. Motor Rating: 1/3 hp; continuous duty or as required by manufacturer for size of grille. 4. Motor Voltage: 208 volt, single phase, 60 Hz. 5. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter. 6. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 1. 7. Opening Speed: 8 inches per second. 8. Brake: Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller. 9. Manual override in case of power failure. C. Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN-STOP-CLOSE)with key ON-OFF constant pressure control for each operator. 1. 24 volt circuit. 2. Recessed. D. Safety Edge: Located at bottom of curtain, full width, electro-mechanical or manufacturer's standard sensitized type, wired to reverse operator upon striking object, hollow rubber covered. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 33 26 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 33 26 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 2.05 ELECTRIC OPERATION - EMERGENCY RESPONSE AUTOMATIC OVERHEAD COILING GRILLE A. Operator, Controls,Actuators, and Safeties: Comply with UL 325; provide products listed by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Electric Operators: 1. Mounting: Side mounted. 2. Motor Enclosure: a. Interior grilles: NEMA MG 1 Type 1; open drip proof. 3. Motor Rating: 1/3 hp; continuous duty or as required by manufacturer for size of grille. 4. Motor Voltage: 208 volt, single phase, 60 Hz. 5. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full voltage, reversing magnetic motor starter. 6. Controller Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 1. 7. Opening Speed: 8 inches per second. 8. Brake: Adjustable friction clutch type, activated by motor controller. 9. Manual override in case of power failure. C. Emergency Exit Push-Button Station with Keyed Reset, Local Horn/Strobe Alarm and Signage that reads "Push To Exit—Alarm Will Sound" D. Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN-STOP-CLOSE)with ON-OFF key switch constant pressure control for each operator. 1. 24 volt circuit. 2. Recessed. E. Concealed Self Locking Mechanism: Provide AutoLock manual lifting jamb lock assemblies that will prevent forced opening of a closed grille. Lock mechanism shall not interfere with normal electric operation, fail-safe or emergency response self opening features. F. Safety Edge: Located at bottom of curtain, full width, electro-mechanical or manufacturer's standard sensitized type, wired to reverse operator upon striking object, hollow rubber covered. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install grille unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only. D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. E. Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 26 27 17. F. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch. D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft straight edge. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust grille, hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 33 26 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 33 26 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean grille and components. B. Remove labels and visible markings. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Standard Electric Operation: 102B, 126C & 160B. B. Emergency Response Electric Opertation (fail-safe): 101C, 102A& 143A END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 33 26-4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 34 73 SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES SECTION 08 34 73 SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wood sound-control doors. B. Steel frames and sound-control seals. C. Sound control windows. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include sound ratings, construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, veneer species and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of sound-control seals, door bottoms, and thresholds. 3. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 4. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 5. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 6. Details of each different wall opening condition. 7. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5 inches. D. Schedule: Provide a schedule of sound-control assemblies prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with the Door Hardware Schedule. E. Product Certificates: For each type of sound-control assembly, from manufacturer, certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Test Reports: 1. Certified laboratory reports, performed in accordance with ASTM E90 and ASTM E413, from independent testing laboratory qualified under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP)supporting compliance of assemblies to specified requirements. 2. Minimum five field tests, performed in accordance with ASTM E336 and ASTM E413 by five separate independent testing agencies, substantiating acoustical performance when installed at no less than four FSTC ratings below the specified STC rating. G. Maintenance Data: For sound-control assemblies to include in maintenance manuals. H. Warranty: Samples of special warranty. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years documented experience producing systems specified in the Section. B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years documented experience installing systems specified in the Section and approved by manufacturer. C. Source Limitations: Obtain sound-control assemblies, including doors, frames, sound-control seals, hinges, thresholds, and other items essential for sound control, from single source from single manufacturer. D. Sound Rating: Provide sound-control assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested as sound-retardant units by an acoustical testing agency, and have the following minimum rating: 1. Provide sound-control door and window assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested as sound-retardant units by an acoustical testing agency, and have the following minimum rating: Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 34 73 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 34 73 SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES a. Door STC Rating: STC-48 where indicated in the Door, Frame and Relite Schedule and as determined by ASTM E413 when tested as an operable door assembly in accordance with ASTM E90 and ASTM E413. b. Window STC Rating: STC-49 as indicated in the Door, Frame and Relite Schedule as determined by ASTM E413 when tested as an operable door assembly in accordance with ASTM E90 and ASTM E413. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store frames and doors in accordance with requirements of NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished wood doors. C. Store doors and frames under cover at Project site. Place units in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch-high, wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. 1. If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide a minimum of 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood sound-control wood doors until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sound-control assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet sound rating requirements. b. Faulty operation of sound seals. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use or weathering. d. Wood doors that are warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 2. Warranty Period for Wood Doors: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Industrial Acoustics Company: www.industrialacoustics.com. 2. Jamison Door Company: www.jamisondoor.com. 3. Krieger Specialty Products Company: www.kriegerproducts.com. 4. Overly Manufacturing Co.: www.overly.com. 5. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 WOOD SOUND-CONTROL DOORS A. Design Requirements: Acoustical door assemblies to include doors, frames, glass and door hardware, including gasketing systems, retainers and retainer covers, door bottoms, cam-lift hinges, thresholds and sills as required to achieve specified performance requirements. B. Provide 2-inch thick doors constructed of wood veneer of species indicated with a sound-deadening core. 1. Core: 1-3/4 inch thick acoustical core of stiffened cold-rolled steel face sheets with continuous vertical steel sections. Fill spaces between stiffeners with acoustical material. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 34 73 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 34 73 SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES 2. Veneer Materials: Comply with Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors for grade, faces, veneer matching, fabrication, finishing, and other requirements unless otherwise indicated. All adhesives as well as warp tolerances, shall be in accordance with WDMA 1.S.1. C. Hardware Reinforcement: Mortise and reinforce doors for fully templated hardware only in accordance with the approved hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. D. Steel Materials: 1. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed applications. 2. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. E. Glazing: Factory-assemble lites in doors indicated to have lites, using glazing materials and assembly methods as required by sound-control door assembly manufacturer to comply with specified STC rating. Vision panels shall comprise of two panes of glazing with frames and seals that will not degrade the acoustical performance of the assembly. At dual glazed systems, each piece of glass shall be capable of being removed independently. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard loose stops, but not less than 12 gage steel, with corners mitered and factory drilled and countersunk holes for fasteners. 2. Provide manufacturer's recommended fasteners. 3. Glazing to meet IBC requirements for safety glazing in doors. F. Finishes: Factory finish sound-control wood doors to match doors specified in Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors. 2.03 SOUND-CONTROL FRAMES A. Design Requirements: Fabricate sound-control door and window frames with corners mitered, reinforced, and continuously welded full depth and width of frame. Provide temporary steel spreader welded to jamb feet for bracing during shipping and handling. Knock-down frames are not permitted. 1. Acoustical window assemblies shall include frames, glass and the gasketing system required to achieve specified performance requirements. 2. Weld frames according to NAAMM-HMMA 820. 3. Hardware Reinforcement: Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped for all templated hardware, only in accordance with templates provided by the hardware supplier. Where surface mounted hardware and non-templated mortised hardware is to be applied. reinforce frames with all drilling and tapping done in the field. 4. Jamb Anchors: a. Masonry Type: Adjustable jamb anchors, 16 gage, T-shape type. b. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 16 gage nominal thickness uncoated steel and spaced not more than 24 inches on center. 5. Floor Anchors: Not less than 16 gage nominal thickness metallic-coated steel. Provide clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 6. Plaster Guards: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum 22 gage. Weld in place at hardware mortises on frames to be set in masonry or concrete openings. B. Materials: 1. Interior Frames: 14 gage minimum thickness. a. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM Al008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, suitable for exposed applications. b. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011 M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. 2. Supports and Anchors: After fabricating, galvanize units to be built into exterior walls according to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B. 3. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329. Project No 11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 34 73 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 34 73 SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES 4. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers. C. Prime Finish: Remove all tool marks and surface imperfections and dress smooth exposed faces of all welded joints. Coat all accessible surfaces with rust-inhibitive primer which meets ASTM B117 salt spray for 150 hours, and ASTM D1735 water fog test for organic coatings for 200 hours, and which is fully cured prior to shipment. 1. Coordinate with primers specified in Section 09 96 00 for compatibility of primer with topcoats. 2.04 SOUND-CONTROL HARDWARE A. Description: Provide manufacturer's standard sound-control system, including head and jamb seals, door bottoms, cam-lift hinges, thresholds and sills as required by testing to achieve STC rating indicated. 1. Seals: As tested by manufacturer. Hinges, lock and head sides of door shall close against positive seals that are mounted in frames that are adjustable at intervals no greater than 12 inches on center by a minimum of 1/2 inch. 2. Door Bottoms: Neoprene or silicone gasket held in place by metal housing; mortised into bottom edge of door. An instantaneous 1/4 inch retraction of the seal shall be effected when the door is opened. 3. Cam-Lift Hinges: Full-mortise template type that raises door 1/2 inch when door is fully open; with hardened pin; fabricated from stainless steel. 4. Thresholds: Flat, smooth, unfluted type as recommended by manufacturer; fabricated from aluminum. a. Width: As required by door manufacturer. b. Finish: Clear anodic finish. B. Other Hardware: Comply with requirements in Section 08 71 00- Door Hardware and Section 08 71 01 - Hardware Schedule. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Grout: Comply with ASTM C476, with a slump of not more than 4 inches as measured according to ASTM C143/C143M. B. Corrosion Resistant Coating: High-build, water-resistant, resilient coating NFPA 101 Class A. 1. Product: Hi-Build Epoxoline II N69 manufactured by Tnemec or equal. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Sound-Control Wood Door Fabrication: Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with uniform clearances and bevels according to referenced quality standard, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with final door hardware schedules and hardware templates. B. Sound-Control Frame Fabrication: Fabricate sound-control frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles,with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. 1. Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 3. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Stud Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o c. and as follows: 1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches in height. 4. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare sound-control frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 34 73 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 34 73 SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES a. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 5. Plaster Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware cutouts and glazing-stop screw and sound-control seal preparations to close off interior of openings in frames to be grouted. 6. Tolerances: Fabricate frames to tolerances indicated in NAAMM HMMA 865. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of sound-control door assemblies. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation and with installation spreaders in place, adjust and securely brace sound-control door frames to the specified tolerances. C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. D. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with corrosion resistant coating at 4 mil DFT, prior to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install sound-control assemblies plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Frames: Install sound-control frames in sizes and profiles indicated. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. Install sound-control frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. b. Check squareness, twist, and plumbness of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Grouted Frames: Solidly fill space between frames and substrate with grout. Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces. 5. Fill voids between concealed side of frame and adjacent wall construction with dense fiberglass in accordance with shop drawings or manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust sound-control door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 34 73 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 34 73 SOUND CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. C. Doors: Fit sound-control doors accurately in frames, within clearances indicated below. Shim as necessary. 1. Fit non-fire-rated doors accurately in frames with the following clearances: a. Jambs: 1/8 inch. b. Head with Cam-Lift Hinges: As required by manufacturer, but not more than 3/8 inch. c. Sill: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install fire-rated doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. D. Install gasketing systems, retainers, retainer covers, door bottoms, cam-lift hinges, thresholds and sills in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. E. Sound-Control Seals: Where seals have been prefit and preinstalled in the factory and subsequently removed for shipping, reinstall seals and adjust according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Cam-Lift Hinges: Install hinges according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Thresholds: Set thresholds in full bed of sealant complying with requirements in Section 07 90 05-Joint Sealers. H. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08 80 00 - Glazing and with sound-control door assembly manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install gasketing in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Testing Services: Acoustical testing and inspecting agency shall select one sound-control door and window of each STC rating at random from sound-control door assemblies that are completely installed and perform testing for verification that assembly complies with STC rating requirements. 1. Field tests shall be conducted according to ASTM E336, with results calculated according to ASTM E413. Acceptable field STC values shall be within 5 dB of laboratory STC values. 2. Inspection Report: Acoustical testing agency shall submit report in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours after testing. 3. If tested door fails, replace or rework all sound-control door assemblies to bring them into compliance at Contractor's expense. a. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and adjust seals, door bottoms, and other sound-control hardware items right before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. B. Remove and replace defective work, including defective or damaged sound seals and doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. 1. Adjust gaskets, gasket retainers, and retainer covers to provide contact required to achieve STC rating. C. Clean grout off sound-control frames immediately after installation. D. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 34 73 - 6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 36 13 SECTIONAL DOORS SECTION 08 36 13 SECTIONAL DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Overhead sectional doors, manually operated. B. Operating hardware and supports. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and backup materials. B. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Lock cylinders. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection details, anchorage spacing, hardware locations, and installation details. B. Product Data: Show component construction, anchorage method, and hardware. C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard available panel finish samples, illustrating color and finish. D. Samples: Submit two panel finish samples, 12 x 12 inch in size, illustrating color and finish. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include any special procedures required by project conditions. F. Operation Data: Include normal operation, troubleshooting, and adjusting. G. Maintenance Data: Include data for transmission, shaft and gearing, lubrication frequency, spare part sources. H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section approved by manufacturer. C. Source Limitations: Obtain sectional doors from single source from single manufacturer. D. Standard for Sectional Doors: Fabricate sectional doors to comply with DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Overhead Door Corporation, www.overheaddoor.com. 2. Raynor: www.raynor.com. 3. Rite-Hite Corporation: www.ritehite.com. 4. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 36 13 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 36 13 SECTIONAL DOORS B. Structural Performance: Exterior sectional doors shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: Design sectional doors to withstand design wind loads without evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components. Deflection of door in horizontal position (open)shall not exceed 1/120 of the door width. C. Seismic Performance: Sectional doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. Seismic Component Importance Factor: As indicated on Structural Drawings. D. Operation Cycles: Provide sectional door components and operators capable of operating for not less than number of cycles indicated for each door. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. 2.03 ALUMINUM DOOR COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Doors: Stile and rail aluminum with glazed panels; lift operating style as indicated on Drawings with track and hardware; complying with DASMA 102, Commercial application. 1. Performance: Withstand positive and negative wind loads equal to 1.5 times design wind loads specified by local code without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330, using 10 second duration of maximum load. 2. Door Nominal Thickness: 1-3/4 inches thick. 3. Finish: Anodized, clear. 4. Glazed Lights: As indicated on drawings. 5. Operation: Pull rope. 6. Operation Cycles: 25,000. 7. 511 Series Aluminum Doors as manufactured by Overhead Door Corporation. B. Glazing: Type IT-2 specified in Section 08 80 00. 2.04 DOOR COMPONENTS A. Track: Rolled galvanized steel, 0.090 inch thick; 2 inch wide, continuous one piece per side; galvanized steel mounting brackets 1/4 inch thick. B. Hinge and Roller Assemblies: Heavy duty hinges and adjustable roller holders of galvanized steel; floating hardened steel bearing rollers, located at top and bottom of each panel, each side. C. Lift Mechanism: Torsion spring on cross head shaft, with braided galvanized steel lifting cables. 1. For Manual Operation: Requiring maximum exertion of 25 lbs force to open. D. Sill Weatherstripping: Resilient hollow rubber strip, one piece; fitted to bottom of door panel, full length contact. E. Jamb Weatherstripping: Roll formed steel section full height of jamb, fitted with resilient weatherstripping, placed in moderate contact with door panels. F. Head Weatherstripping: EPDM rubber seal, one piece full length. G. Panel Joint Weatherstripping: Neoprene foam seal, one piece full length. H. Lock: Inside side mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar with feature to retain in locked or retracted position; interior and exterior handle. I. Lock Cylinders: See Section 08 71 00. 1. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 36 13 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 36 13 SECTIONAL DOORS 2.05 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G60/Z180 coating, plain surface. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and tolerances are within specified limits. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Securely brace door tracks suspended from structure. Secure tracks to structural members only. D. Fit and align door assembly including hardware. E. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in Section 07 90 05. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/16 inch. C. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 ft straight edge. D. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door assembly for smooth operation and full contact with weatherstripping. B. Align and adjust motors, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Have manufacturer's field representative present to confirm proper operation and identify adjustments to door assembly for specified operation. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean doors and frames and glazing. B. Remove temporary labels and visible markings. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction. B. Do not permit construction traffic through overhead door openings after adjustment and cleaning. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 36 13 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass. B. Aluminum doors and frames. C. Aluminum windows/operable sashes. D. Aluminum sunshades. E. Weatherstripping. F. Perimeter sealant. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers: Perimeter air and vapor seal between glazing system and adjacent construction. B. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials. C. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this section. D. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association. B. AAMA 501.2 - Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems for Water Leakage; American Architectural Manufacturers Association (part of AAMA 501). C. AAMA 503 -Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Newly Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls and Sloped Glazing Systems. D. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association. E. AAMA 612 -Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Combined Coatings of Anodic Oxide and Transparent Organic Coatings on Architectural Aluminum. F. AAMA 812 -Voluntary Practice for Assessment of Single Component Aerosol Expanding Polyurethane Foams for Sealing Rough Openings of Fenestration Installations. G. AAMA 1503 -Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association. H. ASCE 7- Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil Engineers. I. ASTM A36/A36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. J. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. K. ASTM B209- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. L. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]. M. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. N. ASTM B221 M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 43 13 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS O. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. P. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. Q. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. R. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference. S. NFRC 100- Procedures for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors. T. NFRC 400 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Air Leakage. U. SSPC-Paint 20 -Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic,"and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure. B. Field Testing: Organize and conduct a field test of at least one installed storefront assembly using one of the following: 1. Monarch Nozzle spray apparatus in accordance with AAMA 501.2. 2. Using uniform or static air pressure difference using methods described in ASTM E1105 in accordance with AAMA 501.2. 1.05 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers; review preparation, installation procedures, coordination and scheduling necessary for related work. 1. Insure that all parties whose work interfaces with door, security and hardware systems are in attendance. These parties include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Owner. b. Architect. c. Contractor. d. Contractor's superintendent. e. Hardware supplier. f. Architectural Hardware Consultant. g. Access control system contractor. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide product performance criteria, component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, internal drainage details . B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required. 1. Shop Drawings shall reflect all detail conditions shown on Drawings including support framing and adjoining materials. Submittals which use manufacturer's standard catalog type details will be rejected. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed storefront indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics and engineering calculations, and identify dimensional limitations. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 43 13-2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 2. Submit submittals as "Deferred Submittals" in accordance with Section 107.3.4.2 of the IBC. 3. The deferred submittal items shall not be installed until their design and submittal documents have been approved by the building official. D. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for each door, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents. E. Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inches in size illustrating finished aluminum surface. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified requirements. G. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed storefronts, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-framed storefront and entrance system. H. Report of field testing for water leakage. I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in Oregon. B. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum five years of documented experience. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: See below under description of products. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. CRL US Alum: www.usalum.com. 2. EFCO Corporation: www.efcocorp.com. 3. Kawneer North America: www.kawneer.com. 4. Oldcastle Building Envelope: www.oldcastlebe.com. 5. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 STOREFRONT A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Glazing Rabbet: For 1 inch insulating glazing for exterior applications. 2. Glazing Rabbet: For 1/4 inch monolithic glazing for interior applications. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 43 13 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 3. Glazing Position: Centered (front to back). 4. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep. a. Provide a tubular section at all door frame jambs and heads 5. Design Wind Load: As indicated on Structural Drawings. 6. Water Leakage Test Pressure Differential: 8.00 lbf/sq ft. 7. Air Infiltration Test Pressure Differential: 6.24 psf. a. Air infiltration test pressure differential for Doors and operable windows: 1.57 psf. 8. Condensation Resistance Factor: 57 frame and 70 glass minimum 9. Overall U-Value Including Glazing: 0.40, maximum. 10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.40 maximum. 11. Finish: Class I natural anodized. 12. Basis-of-Design Products Exterior Storefront: a. EFCO 403T. b. Kawneer VG 451T. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed storefronts, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 2. Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. a. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of ASCE 7 and Structural Drawings. b. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to 1/175 in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials. 3. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 4. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at specified differential pressure across assembly in accordance with ASTM E283. a. Limit air infiltration at entrance doors and operable windows to 1.00 cu ft/min/sq ft of door or operable window area. 5. Condensation Resistance Factor: Measure in accordance with AAMA 1503 with 1 inch insulating glass installed. 6. Thermal Conductance: Provide thermally-broken aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having specified U-Value when tested according to NFRC 100. 7. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 at specified pressure differential. None when measured in accordance with AAMA 501.2 per ASTM E1105 with a test pressure of 8.0 minimum lbf/sq. ft. No reduction shall be taken in test pressures for field installation. 8. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system. 9. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound. 10. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and ;,sternal weep drainage system. 1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken. 2. Glazing stops: Flush. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 43 13 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 3. Structurally Reinforced Members: Extruded aluminum with internal reinforcement of structural steel member. B. Doors: Glazed aluminum. 1. Thickness: 2 inches. 2. Top Rail: 6 inches wide. 3. Vertical Stiles: 5 inches wide. 4. Bottom Rail: 12 inches wide. 5. Glazing Stops: Square. 6. Finish: Same as storefront. 7. Basis-of-Design Products: a. EFCO Durastile 518 Entrances. b. Kawneer 500 Tuffline Entrances. C. Operable Sash: Aluminum project-out awning; finished to match storefront; heavy duty 4-bar hinges, and cam turn handle latch. 1. Provide limit stop on all operable sashes to prevent sash from opening more than 4 inches. 2. Provide insect screens at all operable sashes. 3. Basis-of-Design Products: a. EFCO 2700. b. Kawneer 8225TL Isolock Awning Windows. D. Sunshades: Shop fabricated, shop finished, extruded aluminum outriggers, louvers, and fascia, free of defects impairing strength, durability or appearance. 1. Configuration: As indicated on drawings. 2. Louver Type: Airfoil. a. Louver Depth: 3 inches 3. Sunshade Angle: 45 degrees from horizontal and equally spaced to provide 70 degree sun cutoff angle. 4. Outrigger Shape: Straight/Rectangular. 5. Fascia: Rectangular. 6. Design Criteria: Design and fabricate to resist the same loads as storefront system as well as the following loads without failure, damage, or permanent deflection: a. Snow: As indicated on Structural Drawings. b. Live: As indicated on Structural Drawings. c. Thermal Movement: Plus/minus 1/8 inch, maximum. 7. Depth: 36 inches. 8. Sizes: As indicated on drawings. 9. Shop fabricate to the greatest extent possible; disassemble if necessary for shipping. 10. Finish: To match adjacent storefront. 11. Basis-of-Design Products: a. EFCO E-Shade. b. Kawneer Versoleil Sunshade. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Aluminum Products: Provide products with average recycled content of aluminum products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). C. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). D. Structural Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M; galvanized in accordance with requirements of ASTM A123/A123M. E. Fasteners: Stainless steel. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 43 13 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS F. Compensation Channel/Deflection Head: 0.032 inch thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing members. Allow for minimum 1-inch vertical deflection. G. Aluminum Sill Pan: Manufacturer's aluminum sill pan including end and back dams. Finish to match adjacent storefront. 1. Coordinate with Work of Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim for installation of prefinished steel sill pans and door sill pans provided as Work of that Section. H. Sill Attachment Angle: 0.032 inch thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing members. Subset fastener heads to be flush with angle at interior conditions. 1. Attachment Angle Cover: Aluminum to match frame color; L-shape, sized to conceal attachment angle. Install with silicone sealant. I. Exposed Flashings: 0.032 inch thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing members. J. Concealed Flashings: 0.018 inch thick galvanized steel. K. Perimeter Sealant: Silicone as specified in Section 07 90 05. 1. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. a. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. b. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. c. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. L. Glass: As specified in Section 08 80 00. 1. Glass in Exterior Framing and Entrances: Type IT-1. 2. Glass in Interior Framing and Entrances: Type T-1. M. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements. N. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 80 00. O. Jamb Fillers: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC). P. Jamb and Head Caps: Configuration to match end of framing member. Q. Expanding Foam Sealers: Polyurethane per AAMA 812. R. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, zinc rich. 2.05 FINISHES A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating or AAMA 612 clear anodic coating with electrolytically deposited organic seal; not less than 0.7 mils thick. 2.06 HARDWARE A. Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 71 00. B. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Fabricate items such as sill pans and closure flashings as single continuous shapes. Factory-drill weep holes prior to finishing where exposed to view. C. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. D. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. E. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint. F. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. G. Reinforce components internally for door hardware . H. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 43 13 -6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS I. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. 1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section. C. Clean aluminum surfaces free of dirt, grease, or oil from the factory to ensure that corner stops and applied flashings adhere properly. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Periodic Installation Review: Conduct periodic review of installed frames with Contactor and Installer present to confirm compliance with specified tolerances. 1. Include readjustment of non-complying frames at no added cost to Owner. 2. Review will cover minimum of 50 percent of frames as installation progresses. 3. Review will include in-progress work of components such as sill pans and related flashing. B. Carefully match exposed work to produce continuity of line and design with all joints. Raw edges visible at joints are not allowed. C. Fit joints between aluminum components to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortions. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. D. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. F. Provide sill attachment angle,jamb and head attachments, and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. G. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. H. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. I. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. Slope sill flashings to the exterior. J. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill flashing. K. Coordinate attachment, sealants and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. L. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly or use minimally expanding foam per AAMA 812 to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. M. Install operating sash in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. N. Install aluminum sunshades to comply with manufacturer's recommendations and as required to meet performance requirements. O. Install glass in accordance with Section 08 80 00, using glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. P. Install L-shaped attachment angle cover trim flush and in alignment with sill. Q. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 90 05. R. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 43 13 - 7 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 43 13 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Testing for Water Leakage: Organize and conduct a field test of at least one installed storefront assembly using one of the following: 1. Monarch Nozzle spray apparatus in accordance with AAMA 501.2. 2. Using uniform or static air pressure difference using methods described in ASTM E1105 in accordance with AAMA 501.2. B. Testing to be done by an AAMA accredited testing lab, and cost for testing shall be included in the Contract Price. 1. Conduct three (3)separate regimes of testing For each regime, test a minimum of three (3) installed units in conformance with AAMA 503 (Referencing ASTM E 1105) minimum requirements for air and water infiltration with the window manufacturer, Contractor, Architect and Owner present. Locations will be randomly determined by the Architect. a. Regime test dates to be determined by Architect in coordination with Contractor. 1) First Test: Take at initial installation. 2) Second Test: Take at 50 percent completion. 3) Third Test: Take at 80 percent completion. b. Test area shall extend beyond perimeter of glazing frame to include adjacent materials, flashing and sealants. c. Test areas shall not have interior finishes installed so as to permit visibility of test area. d. Tests shall be conducted with a minimum of 4 cycles each lasting a minimum of 5 minutes. 2. Testing pressure to be set at 2/3 lab rating (12 psf lab rating = 8 psf Field test) unless otherwise noted. a. In accordance with AAMA 503 (Referencing ASTN1 E1105), there shall be no uncontrolled water penetrating assemblies or water appearing on assemblies' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior. 3. If unit(s)fail testing, correct assembly of failed unit and any other unit with the same problem at no additional cost to Owner. Re-test failed assemblies and perform additional test(s) until window assembly achieves a "pass" result from testing. a. In the event of a failed test, Architect will select two additional locations for testing. (These two areas shall be in addition to a re-testing the failed location) b. Procedure will be repeated until all tested areas pass. c. Additional testing from failed results shall be conducted at no extra cost to the Owner. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 43 13 - 8 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 63 00 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS SECTION 08 63 00 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum skylight framing system. B. Fasteners, anchors, reinforcement, and flashings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 12 00 -Structural Steel Framing: Structural support framing for system. B. Section 05 40 00 -Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Structural perimeter curb. C. Section 07 54 00 -Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: Roofing system and base flashing at skylight curb. D. Section 07 62 00 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Skylight counterflashing. E. Section 08 80 00 -Glazing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 501.2 - Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems for Water Leakage; American Architectural Manufacturers Association. B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association. C. ASTM A36/A36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. D. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. E. ASTM B209- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. F. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]. G. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. H. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tube- [Metric]. I. ASTM D4479/D4479M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Coatings -Asbestos-Free. J. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate framed opening requirements and tolerances, spacing of all members, anticipated deflection under load, affected related work, expansion and contraction joint locations and details, and sizes and locations for field welding. B. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics and engineering calculations, and identify dimensional limitations. C. Report of field testing for water leakage. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design skylight system under direct supervision of a professional structural engineer experienced in design of work of the type specified in this section and licensed in Oregon. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with not fewer than three years of documented experience. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 63 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 63 00 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with not fewer than 5 years of experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Provide wrapping to protect prefinished aluminum surfaces. Do not use adhesive papers or spray coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Correct defective work, including leaks, discoloration, failure of seal at insulated glazing units, and excessive thermal or structural movement, within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal-Framed Skylights: 1. DeaMor Associated, Inc. (Basis-of-Design). 2. Super Sky Products, Inc: www.supersky.com. 3. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS A. Metal Framed Skylights: Factory-fabricated, glazed. 1. Frame: Extruded aluminum structural members with integral condensation collection and guttering system thermally separated from exterior pressure bar. 2. Glazing System: Pressure glazing bar system for sloped joints and structural adhesive glazing for horizontal joints. 3. Glazing: Insulating glass. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Delegated Design: Design metal-framed skylights, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 2. Maximum allowable deflection of any glazing support member: 1/180 of span. 3. Design system to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction over ambient temperature range of 100 degrees F, dynamic loading and release of loads, and deflection of structural support framing without damage to skylight system components or loss of weathertightness. 4. Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft for glazed area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf in accordance with ASTM E283. 5. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 at a test pressure difference of 2.86 lbf/sq ft. 6. Design and fabricate to prevent harmonic vibration, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement, thermal movement transmitted to other building elements, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system. 2.03 SKYLIGHT COMPONENTS A. Frame: Extruded aluminum structural members with integral condensation collection and guttering system thermally separated from exterior pressure bar. B. Glazing System: Pressure glazing bar system for sloped joints and structural adhesive glazing for horizontal joints. C. Glazing: Insulating glass. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: 6063-T5, 6063-T6, or 6061-T6 members complying with ASTM B221 (ASTM 8221 M). Minimum thickness 0.125 inch for structural members and 0.062 inch for non-structural members. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 63 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 63 00 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS B. Formed Aluminum: Sheet material of alloy 5052, 5005, or 6061-T651 complying with ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). C. Internal Reinforcement: ASTM A 36/A 36M; Steel shapes as required for strength and mullion size limitations, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M. D. Glass: Type IT-3 specified in Section 08 80 00. E. Glazing Accessories: As recommended by manufacturer of skylight system. F. Perimeter Sealant: Type Silicone as specified in Section 07 90 05. G. Protective Back Coating: Asphaltic mastic, ASTM D 4479 Type I. H. Fasteners: Stainless steel. I. Flashings: 0.40 inch thick aluminum, same finish as system components; secured with concealed fastening method. J. Anchorage Devices: Type recommended by manufacturer, exposed to view. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Rigidly fit and secure joints and corners with screw and spline. Make joints rigid, with connections that are flush, hairline, and weatherproof. B. Fabricate components to allow for expansion and contraction with minimum clearance and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly. C. Drain to exterior any water entering exterior joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system. D. Prepare components to receive concealed anchorage devices. Ensure that fasteners and anchorage devices will be concealed upon completion of installation. 2.06 FINISHES A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less than 0.7 mils thick; exterior surfaces only. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that structural curb is ready to receive skylight system. Coordinate installation of roofing and other adjacent work to ensure weathertight construction. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Apply 1 coat of protective coating to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Set skylight structure plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or glazing panels. Anchor securely in place in accordance with approved shop drawings. C. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. D. Install sill fleshings. E. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to ensure continuity of thermal barrier. F. Install glazing in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures. G. Mask adjacent surfaces, clean joint surfaces, and install backing and field-applied sealants in accordance with requirements of Section 07 90 05. H. Touch up damaged finishes so repair is imperceptible from 6 feet. Remove and replace components that cannot be satisfactorily touched up. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 63 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 63 00 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb, Level, or Line: 1/8 inch per 10 feet, or 3/8 inch total in overall dimension. B. Alignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: Within 1/16 inches. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 -Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and inspection. B. Test installed skylight for water leakage in accordance with AAMA 501.2. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down exposed surfaces; wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by methods recommended by skylight manufacturer. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 63 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for wood, hollow steel, and aluminum doors. B. Hardware for fire-rated doors. C. Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections. D. Thresholds. E. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets. F. Fire department key boxes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. B. Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors. C. Section 08 33 26 - Overhead Coiling Grilles: Lockable coiling grilles. D. Section 08 43 13 -Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Hardware for doors in storefront, including: 1. Integral weatherstripping. E. Section 08 71 01 - Hardware Schedule: Schedule of hardware sets. F. Division 28: Access control devices. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 -American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council. B. BHMA A156.18 -American National Standard for Materials and Finishes; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc(ANSI/BHMA A156.18). C. DHI (LOCS)- Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute. D. DHI WDHS.3 - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors; Door and Hardware Institute. E. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. F. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association. G. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. H. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. I. UL 305- Standard for Panic Hardware. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door hardware will be installed. B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation to manufacturers and fabricators of products requiring internal reinforcement for door hardware. C. Convey Owner's keying requirements to manufacturers. D. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. 1.05 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week prior to commencing work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 71 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. Clearly indicate hardware items represented within the submittal. Submittals containing complete product line catalogs will be rejected without review. B. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in the Contract Documents. 2. Content: Include the following information: a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door Grid frame, as applicable. b. Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item identified by BHMA designation. Include description and function of each lockset and exit device. c. Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including name and manufacturer. d. Fastenings and other pertinent information. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems. i. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. C. Keying Schedule: Submit for approval of Owner. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed equipment, services, and conduit. F. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 1. Submit manufacturer's parts lists and templates. 2. Bitting List: List of combinations as furnished. 3. Provide factory invoice number for each item. G. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Verification that hardware supplier meets specified requirements. H. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: Verification that architectural hardware consultant meets specified requirements. I. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. J. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. K. Maintenance Materials and Tools: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Tools: One set of all special wrenches or tools applicable to each different or special hardware component, whether supplied by the hardware component manufacturer or not. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 71 00 -2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE B. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with 5 years of experience in the vicinity of the Projects. Supplier must maintain factory direct status with manufacturers listed. 1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 2. Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity. Installer shall maintain a limited parts inventory of items supplied for future service to the Owner. 3. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. C. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. 1. Consultant must be an employee of the supplier and readily available for consultation with Architect, Owner and Contractor. 2. The Consultant will obtain keying information in a meeting with the Owner. 3. Consultant shall make at least two jobsite inspections during installation of hardware and one final inspection to see that all hardware has been installed according to manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Consultant shall be knowledgeable on local, State and Federal life safety, fire and accessibility codes and shall assist Architect as required. D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches or less above the sill. E. Accessibility Requirements: Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural &Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)"and ANSI A117.1. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf. 2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements for closers: a. Exterior Doors: 8.5 lbf applied perpendicular to the door. b. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. c. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch. d. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. F. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not require more than 15 Ibf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. G. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not require more than 30 lbf to set door in motion and not more than 8.5 lbf to open door to minimum required width. H. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. I. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. In addition to Owner, conference participants shall also include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. 2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 71 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE 3. Requirements for key control system. 4. Address for delivery of keys. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows: a. Electromagnetic Locks: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Exit Devices: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. d. Concealed Floor Closers: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. e. Power Operators: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hinges: 1. Bommer Industries, Inc: www.bommer.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com. 3. Ives: www.ives.ingersollrand.com. 4. McKinney: www.mckinneyhinge.com 5. Stanley Hardware: www.stanleyworks.com. B. Pivots: 1. Assa Abloy Rixson: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Ives: www.ives.ingersollrand.com. C. Lock and Latch Sets: 1. Best Access Systems: www.bestlock.com. 2. Sargent Manufacturing: www.sargentlock.com. 3. Schlage: www.schlage.com. D. Push/Pulls: 1. Ives: www.ives.ingersollrand.com. 2. Rockwood: www.rockwood.com. 3. Tice Industries: www.ticeindustries.com. 4. Trimco Inc.: www.trimcobbw.com. E. Cylindrical Locksets: 1. Best Access Systems: www.bestlock.com. 2. Sargent Manufacturing: www.sargentlock.com. 3. Schlage: www.schlage.com. F. Mortise Locksets: 1. Best Access Systems: www.bestlock.com. 2. Sargent Manufacturing: www.sargentlock.com. 3. Schlage: www.schlage.com. G. Magnetic Locks: 1. Assa Abloy Securitron: www.assaabloydss.com. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 71 00-4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE 2. Schlage Electronics: www.schlage.com. H. Electric Strikes: 1. Von Duprin: www.vonduprin.com. 2. HES: www.hesinnovations.com. I. Exit Devices: 1. Von Duprin: www.vonduprin.com. J. Closers: 1. LCN: www.lcnclosers.com. K. Overhead Holders/Stops: 1. ABH: www.abs-hardware.com. 2. Assa Abloy Rixson: www.assaabloydss.com. 3. Glynn-Johnson: www.glynn-johnson.com. L. Wall and Floor Stops/Holders: 1. Ives: www.ives.ingersollrand.com. 2. Rockwood: www.rockwood.com. 3. Trimco Inc.: www.trimcobbw.com. M. Manual and Automatic Bolts: 1. Door Controls International: www.doorcontrols.com. 2. Ives: www.ives.ingersollrand.com. 3. Trimco Inc.: www.trimcobbw.com. N. Gasketing and Thresholds: 1. National Guard Products, Inc: www.ngpinc.com. 2. Pemko: www.pemko.com. 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc.: www.reeseusa.com. 4. Zero International, Inc: www.zerointernational.com. O. Protection Plates: 1. Ives: www.ives.ingersollrand.com. 2. Rockwood: www.rockwood.com. 3. Tice Industries: www.ticeindustries.com. 4. Trimco Inc.: www.trimcobbw.com. P. Auto Door Operators: 1. LCN: www.lcnclosers.com. Q. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 DOOR HARDWARE -GENERAL A. Provide all hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant with applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated. B. Provide all items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer. C. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes. 2. ANSI/ICC A117.1, American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code. 4. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80. 5. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors : Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 6. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): Provide hardware that enables door assembly to comply with air leakage requirements of the applicable code. 7. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 71 00 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE D. Function: Lock and latch function numbers and descriptions of manufactures series as specified in Section 08 71 01 - Hardware Schedule. E. Electrically Operated and/or Controlled Hardware: Provide all power supplies, power transfer hinges, relays, and interfaces required for proper operation; provide wiring between hardware and control components and to building power connection. F. Finishes: Identified in schedule specified in Section 08 71 01 - Hardware Schedule. 1. Finish Definitions: BHMA A156.18. 2. Exceptions: a. Where base metal is specified to be different, provide finish that is an appearance equivalent according to BHMA A156.18. b. Hinges for Fire-Rated Doors: Steel base metal. 2.03 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking. 1. Hardware Sets indicate locking functions required for each door. 2. If no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset. 3. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to have no outside trim. 4. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to have no locking or no outside trim. B. Lock Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, six-pin standard core. 1. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices required. C. Keying: Grand master keyed. 1. Include construction keying. 2. Supply keys in the following quantities: a. 5 master keys per master key group. b. 2 grand master keys. c. 10 construction keys. d. 1 control keys and 5 extra cylinder cores. e. 3 change keys for each lock. D. Lockset/Latchset Design: 1. All locks to have a 2-3/4 inch backset, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide strikes with appropriate lip length to suit conditions. 2.04 KEY CONTROLS A. Facility Manager's Key Cabinet: Sheet steel construction, piano hinged door with key lock. 1. Mounting: Wall-mounted. 2. Capacity: Actual quantity of keys, plus 25 percent additional capacity. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, manufacturer's standard color. 4. Manufacturers: a. Telkee; www.telkee.com. b. Lund Equipment Company, Inc.: www.lundkeycab.net. c. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Fire Department Key Boxes: Designed for storage of 10 keys. Coordinate the order through the Fire Department. 1. Product: 3200 Series Knox Box; Knox Company; www.knoxbox.com. 2. Finish: Aluminum. 3. Style: Recessed. 4. Verify model with the Fire Marshall prior to ordering. Order form can be obtained from the Fire Department. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 71 00 - 6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire-rated doors and frames are present and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes. B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes applied to substrate are complete. D. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80. E. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: 1. For steel doors and frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames." 2. For wood doors: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." 3. Coordinate location and mounting height of Fire Department Key Boxes with Fire Department. F. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. G. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide an Architectural Hardware Consultant to inspect installation and certify that hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. B. Adjust gasketing for complete, continuous seal; replace if unable to make complete seal. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Clean finished hardware per manufacturer's instructions after final adjustments has been made. Replace items that cannot be cleaned to manufacturer's level of finish quality at no additional cost. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish. 3.07 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Section 08 71 01 - Hardware Schedule. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 71 00 - 7 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 71 01 HARDWARE SCHEDULE SECTION 08 71 01 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW SET: 01 DOOR NUMBER: 100A EACH TO HAVE: 2 SET PIVOT SET 7226 626 IVE 2 EA PIVOT 7226 INT 626 IVE 1 EA MULLION STABILIZER 154 689 VON 1 EA MULLION KR4954 689 VON 2 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98DT 626 VON 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-091 (FOR MULLION) 626 SCH 1 EA MULLION SEAL 5100 BLK NGP 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN 2 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4110-61 689 LCN 2 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX (INSTALL ON BOLLARD) 626 IVE 1 EA DRIP CAP 16A(OMIT IF OPENING IS PROTECTED) 628 NGP 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 95WH AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 896S MS/LA AL NGP WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME MANUFACTURER HW SET: 02 DOOR NUMBER: 100B 110A 127A 150A 150B 160A EACH TO HAVE: 2 SET PIVOT SET 7226 626 IVE 2 EA PIVOT 7226 INT 626 IVE 1 EA MULLION STABILIZER 154 689 VON 1 EA MULLION KR4954 689 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98DT 626 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98NL 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-091 (FOR MULLION) 626 SCH 1 EA MULLION SEAL 5100 BLK NGP 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN 2 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4110-61 689 LCN 2 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX (INSTALL ON BOLLARD) 626 IVE 1 EA DRIP CAP 16A(OMIT IF OPENING IS PROTECTED) 628 NGP 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 95WH AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 896S MS/LA AL NGP WEATHERSTRIP BY DOOR/FRAME MANUFACTURER Projed No 11015 Westside Christian High School Feb 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 71 01-1 SECTION 08 71 01 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW SET: 03 DOOR NUMBER: 101A 101B EACH TO HAVE: 2 SET PIVOT SET 7226 626 IVE 2 EA PIVOT 7226 INT 626 IVE 2 EA PULL/PUSHBAR 9190-2-NO 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 CUSH (AT BACK TO BACK DOOR) 689 LCN 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA (AT BACK TO BACK DOOR) 689 LCN 1 EA CUSH SHOE SUPPORT 4110-30 689 LCN 2 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4110-61 689 LCN 1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100S-ADJ (AT BACK TO BACK DOOR) 630 GLY 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 600A (SEE NOTE BELOW) 628 NGP WEATHERSTRIP BY DOORiFRAME MANUFACTURER NOTE: ADJUST SWEEPS TO MINIMUM CLEARANCE FROM FINISHED FLOOR WITHOUT DRAGGING TO PREVENT AIR INFILTRATION. HW SET: 04 DOOR NUMBER: 101C 102A 102B 118B 143B 143C 147B 152A 160B EACH TO HAVE: 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-091 626 SCH BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER NOTE: CONFIRM CYLINDER TYPE AND CAM REQUIREMENTS WITH DOOR MANUFACTURER. HW SET: 05 DOOR NUMBER: 103A 104A 105A 106A 107A 108A 109A 112A 113A 118A 120A 121A 122A 124A 125A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM SEC LOCK ND75PD RHO XN12-035 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School Feb 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 71 01-2 SECTION 08 71 01 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW SET: 06 DOOR NUMBER: 111A 111B EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA OFFICE LOCK ND5OPD RHO (SEE NOTE BELOW) 626 SCH 1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 900S 652 GLY 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE NOTE: THE LOCK PUSH BUTTON IS ON THE PREP ROOM SIDE. IN AN EMERGENCY AN INSTRUCTOR CAN USE THE PUSH BUTTON TO PREVENT SOMEONE FROM ENTERING THE PREP ROOM TO GAIN ACCESS TO THE ADJOINING CLASSROOM IN THE EVENT BOTH CLASSROOM SECURITY LOCKS ARE NOT SECURED. HW SET: 07 DOOR NUMBER: 115A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET ND1OS RHO 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 08 DOOR NUMBER: 116A 117A 151A 153A 155A 168A 174A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PASSAGE SET ND1OS RHO 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 09 DOOR NUMBER: 119A EACH TO HAVE: 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458-12" 626 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND7OPD RHO X 7/8" LIP STRIKE 626 SCH 1 EA ASTRAGAL 158SA CL NGP 2 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 34"X 1" LDW 630 IVE 2 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX 626 IVE 1 SET SEALS 5050B (HEAD & JAMBS) BRN NGP 2 EA SURF AUTO DR BTM 220SA 628 NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 411 MS/LA AL NGP Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School Feb 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 71 01-3 SECTION 08 71 01 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW SET: 10 DOOR NUMBER: 123A EACH TO HAVE: 2 SET PIVOT SET 7226 626 IVE 2 EA PIVOT 7226 INT 626 IVE 1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31 P (HM & NON RATED WD DOORS) 630 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP1 626 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND7OPD RHO X 7/8" LIP STRIKE 626 SCH 1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL (ALUM FRAME STOP SHIM MAY BE 628 IVE NEEDED) 2 EA MOUNTING BRACKET MB_ 689 IVE 1 EA ASTRAGAL 158SA CL NGP 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA(AT 90 DEGREE DOOR) 689 LCN 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA CUSH SHOE SUPPORT 4110-30 689 LCN 2 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4110-61 689 LCN 1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100S-ADJ (AT 90 DEGREE DOOR) 630 GLY 1 EA DRIP CAP 16A(OMIT IF OPENING IS PROTECTED) 628 NGP 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 95WH AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 896S MS/LA AL NGP WEATHERSTRIP BY DOORFRAME MANUFACTURER NOTE: DOOR IS NEVER LOCKED ON EXTERIOR COURTYARD SIDE. LOCKING EXTERIOR COURTYARD SIDE WILL REQUIRE A CODE APPEAL. HW SET: 11 DOOR NUMBER: 131B 133B EACH TO HAVE: 1 SET PIVOT SET 7226 626 IVE 1 EA PIVOT 7226 INT 626 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98NL 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN 1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4110-61 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX (INSTALL ON BOLLARD) 626 IVE 1 EA DRIP CAP 16A (OMIT IF OPENING IS PROTECTED) 628 NGP 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 95WH AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 896S MS/LA AL NGP WEATHERSTRIP BY DOORFRAME MANUFACTURER Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School Feb 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 71 01-4 SECTION 08 71 01 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW SET: 12 DOOR NUMBER: 128A 139A 145A 154A 157A 157B 158A 158B EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND7OPD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 13 DOOR NUMBER: 129A 130A 156A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA OFFICE LOCK ND5OPD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS401CCV 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 14 DOOR NUMBER: 131A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM SEC LOCK ND75PD RHO XN12-035 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS401 CVX 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School Feb 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 71 01-5 SECTION 08 71 01 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW SET: 15 DOOR NUMBER: 132A EACH TO HAVE: 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA MULLION STABILIZER 154 689 VON 1 EA MULLION KR4954 689 VON 2 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98L 996L-06 626 VON 2 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-091 (FOR MULLION) 626 SCH 1 SET MEETING STILES 115NA 628 NGP 1 EA MULLION SEAL 5100 BLK NGP 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA X ST1631 689 LCN 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW 630 IVE 2 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX 626 IVE 1 SET SEALS 700SA (HEAD & JAMBS) CL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 896S MS/LA AL NGP NOTE 1: SOUND CONTROLLED OPENING. COORDINATE DOOR UNDERCUT WITH THRESHOLD TO INSURE DOOR MAKES CONTACT WITH SEAL STRIP. NOTE 2: INSTALL PERIMETER SEALS BEFORE CLOSERS. DO NOT NOTCH SEALS. CLOSERS INSTALL ON TOP OF SEALS. ADJUST TEMPLATES ACCORDINGLY. FIT SEALS ACCURATELY AT MULLION SHOE. HW SET: 16 DOOR NUMBER: 133A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND7OPD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 17 DOOR NUMBER: 143A EACH TO HAVE: 1 SET PIVOT SET 7226 626 IVE 1 EA PIVOT 7226 INT 626 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE LD98EO X 1439 STRIKE 626 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN 1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4110-61 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX (INSTALL ON BOLLARD) 626 IVE 1 EA DRIP CAP 16A(OMIT IF OPENING IS PROTECTED) 628 NGP 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 95WH AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 896S MS/LA AL NGP WEATHERSTRIP BY DOORIFRAME MANUFACTURER Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School Feb 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 71 01-6 SECTION 08 71 01 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW SET: 18 DOOR NUMBER: 134A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND8OPD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS401 CVX 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 19 DOOR NUMBER: 135A EACH TO HAVE: 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31P (HM & NON RATED WD DOORS) 630 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP1 626 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM SEC LOCK ND75PD RHO XN12-035 626 SCH 1 EA ROLLER LATCH RL32 (TOP MOUNT-INACTIVE LEAF) 626 IVE 1 EA ASTRAGAL 158SA(PUSH SIDE-INACTIVE LEAF) CL NGP 2 EA OVERHEAD STOP 900S 652 GLY 1 SET SEALS 137NA(HEAD &JAMBS) 628 NGP 2 EA SURF AUTO DR BTM 220SA 628 NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 411 MS/LA AL NGP NOTE: SOUND CONTROLLED OPENING. HW SET: 20 DOOR NUMBER: 135B EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND8OPD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX 626 IVE 1 SET SEALS 137NA(HEAD & JAMBS) 628 NGP 1 EA SURF AUTO DR BTM 220SA 628 NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 411 MS/LA AL NGP NOTE: SOUND CONTROLLED OPENING. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School Feb 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 71 01-7 SECTION 08 71 01 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW SET: 21 DOOR NUMBER: 136A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 HW 5 X 4.5 630 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND8OPD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011T (180 DEG) 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 5050B (HEAD & JAMBS) BRN NGP HW SET: 22 DOOR NUMBER: 137A 144A 171A 176A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND8OPD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 23 DOOR NUMBER: 138A 169A EACH TO HAVE: 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458-12" 626 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND8OPD RHO X 7/8" LIP STRIKE 626 SCH 1 EA ASTRAGAL 158SA CL NGP 2 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX 626 IVE 4 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 24 DOOR NUMBER: 140A 170A 173A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 4" X 16" 630 IVE 1 EA PULL PLATE 8302-6 4"X 16"X TYPE G MOUNTING 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School Feb 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 71 01-8 SECTION 08 71 01 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW SET: 25 DOOR NUMBER: 141A 142A 148A 149A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PRIV WITH INDICATOR L9496P 06A L583-363 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 26 DOOR NUMBER: 146A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 4"X 16" 630 IVE 1 EA PULL PLATE 8302-6 4"X 16" X TYPE G MOUNTING 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 689 LCN 1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 900S 652 GLY 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 27 DOOR NUMBER: 154B EACH TO HAVE: 2 SET PIVOT SET 7226 626 IVE 2 EA PIVOT 7226 INT 626 IVE 1 EA MULLION STABILIZER 154 689 VON 1 EA MULLION KR4954 689 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98DT 626 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98NL 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-091 (FOR MULLION) 626 SCH 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN 2 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 4110-61 689 LCN 2 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX 626 IVE PERIMETER SEAL PROVIDED WITH ALUM FRAME Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School Feb 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 71 01-9 SECTION 08 71 01 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW SET: 28 DOOR NUMBER: 161A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND8OPD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 900S 652 GLY 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 29 DOOR NUMBER: 159A 159B EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98NL 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 30 DOOR NUMBER: 163A EACH TO HAVE: 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA MULLION STABILIZER 154 689 VON 1 EA MULLION KR4954 689 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98DT 626 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98NL 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-091 (FOR MULLION) 626 SCH 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 689 LCN 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW 630 IVE 2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 31 DOOR NUMBER: 165A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98NL 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School Feb 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 71 01-10 SECTION 08 71 01 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW SET: 32 DOOR NUMBER: 166A 166B 166E EACH TO HAVE: 6 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA MULLION STABILIZER 154 689 VON 1 EA MULLION KR4954 689 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98DT 626 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98NL 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-091 (FOR MULLION) 626 SCH 1 EA MULLION SEAL 5100 BLK NGP 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA X ST1631 689 LCN 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW 630 IVE 2 EA WALL STOP WS401 CVX (INSTALL ON BOLLARD) 626 IVE 1 SET SEALS 700SA (HEAD & JAMBS) CL NGP 1 EA DRIP CAP 16A(OMIT IF OPENING IS PROTECTED) 628 NGP 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 95WH AL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 896S MS/LA AL NGP NOTE: INSTALL PERIMETER SEALS BEFORE CLOSERS. DO NOT NOTCH SEALS. CLOSERS INSTALL ON TOP OF SEALS. ADJUST TEMPLATES ACCORDINGLY. FIT SEALS ACCURATELY AT MULLION SHOE. HW SET: 33 DOOR NUMBER: 166C 166D EACH TO HAVE: 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA MULLION STABILIZER 154 689 VON 1 EA MULLION KR9954 689 VON 2 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE 98L-F 996L-06 626 VON 2 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-091 (FOR MULLION) 626 SCH 1 EA MULLION SEAL 5100 BLK NGP 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 CUSH (AT BACK TO BACK DOOR) 689 LCN 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX 626 IVE 1 SET SEALS 5050B (HEAD &JAMBS) BRN NGP Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School Feb 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 71 01-11 SECTION 08 71 01 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW SET: 34 DOOR NUMBER: 163B EACH TO HAVE: 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA MULLION STABILIZER 154 689 VON 1 EA MULLION KR4954 689 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98DT 626 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 98NL 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 26-091 (FOR MULLION) 626 SCH 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 2 EA WALL STOP WS401CVX 626 IVE 2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 35 DOOR NUMBER: 172A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70PD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 SET SEALS 5050B (HEAD & JAMBS) BRN NGP HW SET: 36 DOOR NUMBER: 164A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM SEC LOCK ND75PD RHO XN12-035 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 37 DOOR NUMBER: 175A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA OFFICE LOCK ND50PD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS401CCV 626 IVE 1 SET SEALS 5050B (HEAD &JAMBS) BRN NGP Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School Feb 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 71 01-12 SECTION 08 71 01 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW SET: 38 DOOR NUMBER: 178A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND7OPD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 689 LCN 1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 900S 652 GLY 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW SET: 39 DOOR NUMBER: 147A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND7OPD RHO 626 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 689 LCN 1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 900S 652 GLY 1 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 34"X 2" LDW 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School Feb 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 71 01-13 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass. B. Frameless glass relites. C. Glazing compounds and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and borrowed lites. B. Section 08 14 16 - Flush Wood Doors: Glazed lites in doors. C. Section 08 36 13 - Sectional Doors: Glazed lites in doors. D. Section 08 43 13 -Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Glazing furnished by storefront manufacturer. E. Section 08 63 00 - Metal-Framed Skylights: Glazing furnished by skylight manufacturer. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 800 -Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants. B. ASCE 7- Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2005. C. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. D. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. E. ASTM C1281 - Standard Specification for Preformed Tape Sealants for Glazing Applications. F. ASTM E119- Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. G. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings. H. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation. I. GANA (SM)- GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America. J. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable)without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ICC's International Building Code by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria: 1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Structural Drawings. C. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch, whichever is less. D. Delegated Design: Design frameless glass relites, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. 1. Design frameless glass relites to comply with ICC's International Building Code Section 2403. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 80 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements B. Product Data on Frameless Glass Relites: Provide structural characteristics, size limitations and special handling or installation instructions. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Product Test Listings: From UL or Warnock Hersey(IT) indicating fire-rated glass complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product. E. Shop Drawings: Provide complete shop drawings showing coordination with adjoining architectural finishes and items furnished as Work of other Sections for the following: 1. Frameless glass relites. a. Provide detailed shop drawings and analysis or test data substantiating safe performance for the specific installation prepared by a registered design professional licensed in Oregon. F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For frameless glass relites, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. G. Selection Samples: Provide manufacturer's full range of colors for glazing sealants. H. Glazing Schedule: For glazed openings, prepare a schedule that lists each type and thickness for each size opening and location. I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. 1. Provide safety glazing at locations defined in Section 2406 of the International Building Code and elsewhere as indicated. B. Insulating Glass Fabricator: Company whose location and equipment are certified by coated glass manufacturer. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years experience. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. B. Provide a ten (10)year warranty to include deterioration of coated glass including peeling, cracking and other indications of deterioration in coating. C. Warranty Period for Fire Rated Glass Assembly: Five years from date of shipment by manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES A. Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with ASCE 7. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 80 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING 1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E1300 to determine glass type and thickness. 2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery of glazing materials. 3. Thicknesses listed are minimum. B. Air and Vapor Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections. 2. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of the air barrier and vapor retarder seal. 3. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. C. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites. 1. Provide fully tempered glass at outer light at all windows. 2.02 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass Manufacturers/Fabricators: 1. AGC Flat Glass North America: www.afgglass.com. 2. Guardian Industries Corp: www.sunguardglass.com. 3. Hartung Glass Industries: www.hartung-glass.com. 4. Oldcastle Building Envelope: www.oldcastle.com. 5. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com. 6. Viracon, Inc.: viracon.com. 7. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Heat-Treated Glass: 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Roll Wave Maximum Distortion Tolerance: 0.003 inch target with 0.005 inch maximum peak to valley measurement. 3. Bow and Warp Maximum Tolerance: 50 percent of the maximum allowed in ASTM C1048. C. Clear Tempered Safety Glass Type T-1 and Type T-2. 1. Comply with ASTM C1048; Type I, Quality-Q3; Class I (clear). 2. Thickness: a. T-1: 1/4-inch, 6 mm. 1) Locations of Use: Interior non-rated doors, interior storefront, interior sidelights and elsewhere as indicated b. T-2: 1/2-inch, 12.7 mm. 1) Locations of Use: Frameless glass relites between 8 foot and 10 foot in height. 3. Fabricate glass for frameless relites with clean cut or flat ground edges in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs. D. Fire-Resistive Laminated Ceramic Glass Type CG-1: Composed of multiple sheets of high visible light transmission glass laminated with an intumescent interlayer. 1. Fire-Resistive-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E119 in fire rated wall assemblies and UL 263. 2. Impact Safety Resistance: ANSI Z97.1 and 16 CFR 1201 (Cat. I and II). 3. Thickness: 1-1/2 to 2-1/8 inches, as standard with manufacturer. 4. Fire-Rating: 90 minutes Fire Protective. 5. Locations of Use: 90 minute fire rated doors. 6. Available Products: a. FireLite Plus as manufactured by the Pilkington Group and distributed by Technical Glass Products: www.fireglass.com. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 80 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING b. Pyran Platinum L manufactured by SaftiFirst: www.safti.com. c. Keralite FR-L120 manufactured by Vetrotech/Saint Gobain: www.vetrotechUSA.com. d. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 7. Frame: Manufacturer's standard steel frame similar in profile to other relites in the project tested in accordance with ASTM E119. a. Available Products: 1) Heat Barrier Series Frame System manufactured by Herman Forster AG and supplied by Technical Glass Products. 2) GPX Framing 120-Min Frame manufactured by SaftiFirst: www.safti.com. 3) VDS 120 manufactured by Vetrotech/Saint Gobain. 4) Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. b. Finish to match adjacent hollow metal frames. 2.03 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Any of the manufacturers/fabricators specified for float glass. 2. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Locations: Exterior, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency lo comply with ASTM E2190. 3. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners. 4. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant. C. Insulated Clear Tempered Safety Glass Units Type IT-1: Double pane with silicone sealant edge seal. 1. Outer pane of 6 mm clear tempered float glass with glass, inner pane of 6 mm clear tempered float glass. 2. Place low E coating on No. 2 surface within the unit. 3. Interspace Content: Argon. 4. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency 10 comply with ASTM E2190. 5. Purge interpane space with dry air. 6. Total unit thickness of 1 inch. 7. Visible Light Transmittance: 70 percent minimum. 8. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.25 maximum. 9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.37 maximum. a. Clear Comfort Ti-AC 40 manufactured by AGC Flat Glass North America. b. SunGuard Clear SN 68 manufactured by Guardian Industries. c. Solarban 60 (2) Clear manufactured by PPG Industries. d. VE 1-2M manufactured by Viracon. D. Insulated Clear Tempered Safety Glass Units Type IT-2: Double pane with silicone sealant edge seal. 1. Locations of Use: Sectional door. 2. Outer pane of 3.1 mm clear tempered float glass with glass, inner pane of 3.1 mm clear tempered float glass. 3. Place low E coating on No. 2 surface within the unit. 4. Interspace Content: Argon. 5. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 6. Purge interpane space with dry air. 7. Total unit thickness of 1/2 inch. 8. Visible Light Transmittance: 69 percent minimum. 9. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.33 maximum. 10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.39 maximum. a. Clear Comfort Ti-AC 40 manufactured by AGC Flat Glass North America. b. SunGuard Clear SN 68 manufactured by Guardian Industries. c. Solarban 60 (2) Clear manufactured by PPG Industries. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 80 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING d. VE 1-2M manufactured by Viracon. E. Insulated Clear Tempered Safety Glass Units Type IT-3: Double pane with silicone sealant edge seal. 1. Locations of Use: Metal-Framed Skylights. a. Refer to Section 08 63 00 - Metal-Framed Skylights and Structural drawings for loads. 2. Outer Pane: Clear, thickness to be engineered for project specific loads. 3. Place low E coating on No. 2 surface within the unit. 4. Interspace Content: Argon. 5. Inner Pane: Clear glass laminated with a minimum 0.030 "white diffused" PV interlayer. Glass thickness to be engineered to meet project specific loads. 6. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 7. Purge interpane space with dry air. 8. Total unit thickness of 1 inch. 9. Visible Light Transmittance: 60 percent minimum. 10. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.25 maximum. 11. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.37 maximum. a. Clear Comfort Ti-AC 40 manufactured by AGC Flat Glass North America. b. SunGuard Clear SN 68 manufactured by Guardian Industries. c. Solarban 60 (2) Clear manufactured by PPG Industries. d. VE 1-2M manufactured by Viracon. 2.04 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Glazing Sealant for Frameless Glass Relites: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Products: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilGlaze II SCS2800. c. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2. 2. Locations of Use: a. Butt joint in frameless glass relites. 3. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. 2.05 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. B. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. C. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). D. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C1281 and AAMA 800. E. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; black color. 2.06 FRAMELESS GLAZED ASSEMBLIES A. Provide complete systems as specified and detailed on Drawings. 1. All components for each assembly type shall be supplied by the same manufacturer. 2. Field measure all openings prior to fabrication. 3. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, maintaining recommended clearances. 4. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: CR Laurence Co.: www.crlaurence.com. a. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 80 00 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING B. Frameless Relites with Glazing Channels: 1. Glazing Channels and Accessories: Satin anodized aluminum for interior use as frames for butt joint frameless glass relites. Attach to structural components as detailed. a. Head Section: 1-5/8-inch high. 1) Basis-of-Design Product: UCSA3812SL Regular U-Channel with Top Load Roll-in Glazing Gasket manufactured by CR Laurence. b. Sill Section: 11/16-inch high. 1) Basis-of-Design Product: SCSA3812SL Shallow U-Channel with Top Load Roll-in Glazing Gasket manufactured by CR Laurence. 2. Provide aluminum and neoprene setting block at sills, sized for glass thickness. 3. Glazing Gasket: EPDM black roll-in dry glaze gasketing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing. C. At frameless glass relites, verify that adequate bracing is provided in the ceiling structure for attachment of aluminum channels to ceiling system. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate corpatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual and manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING) A. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. B. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain full contact. C. Do not exceed edge prec ores stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. D. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. E. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. F. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact. 3.04 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE) A. Set two-way mirror glass with mirror facing classroom. B. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above sight line. C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. E. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above. F. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact. G. Knife trim protruding tape. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 80 00-6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING 3.05 INSTALLATION - FRAMELESS RELITES A. Comply with manufacturer's recommended installation as required to comply with structural design criteria. B. Fill butt joints between and joint between adjacent wall and glass lite at frameless glass relites with silicone sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Set patterned glass units in each series true in line with uniform orientation, pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 80 00 - 7 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 83 00 MIRRORS SECTION 08 83 00 MIRRORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass mirrors. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z97.1 -American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test. B. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; Current Edition. C. GANA(GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America. D. GANA(SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America. E. GANA(TIPS)- Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors; National Association of Mirror Manufacturers (http://www.mirrorlink.org/members/technical.htm). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data on Mirror Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. B. Product Data on Glazing Accessories: Provide functional characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and GANA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Fabricate, store, transport, receive, install, and clean mirrors in accordance with recommendations of GANA(TIPS) "Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors." 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install mirrors when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of same. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Mirror Glass - General: Select materials and/or provide supports as required to limit mirrored glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. B. Mirror Glass : Organically coated mirrors complying with ANSI Z97.1 and 16 CFR 1201 standards, clear annealed type with copper and silver coating, adhesive backed polyethylene material backing, square and lapped edges, 6 mm thick, minimum. 1. Locations and Sizes: As indicated on Drawings. Field verify final sizes prior to fabrication. 2.02 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel clips. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 83 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 08 83 00 MIRRORS B. Mirror Adhesive for Glass Mirrors: Chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall substrate. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. 3.02 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install mirrors in accordance with GANA recommendations. B. Set mirrors plumb and level, free of optical distortion. C. Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or backsplashes. D. Frameless Glass Mirrors: Set mirrors with adhesive, applied in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. Provide clips for added support as recommended by installer for conditions. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove wet glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after work is complete. C. Clean mirrors and adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 08 83 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 00 01 FINISH LEGEND SECTION 09 00 01 FINISH LEGEND 1. Metal Wall Panel: MP-1 Architectural Metal Solutions-#31 Champagne MP-2 Architectural Metal Solutions -#20 Slate Grey 2. Elastomeric Coating EC-1 Color to be selected by Architect EC-2 Color to be selected by Architect EC-3 Color to be selected by Architect EC-4 Color to be selected by Architect 3. Sealed Concrete: SC-1 Sealed Concrete 4. Plastic Laminate: PL-1 Wilsonart 4842-60 Canyon Zephyr(countertops) PL-2 Wilsonart 7941-38 Tan Echo (cabinets &open shelves) PL-3 Wilsonart Chem Surf, 4879-38 Steel Mesh (science counter tops) 5. Plastic Paneling: FRP-1 Glasbord; color 66 Silver 6. Ceramic Tile: CT-1= Random Blend of 2x2 Tiles as follows: CT-1a 50%- Floor: Daltile Keystones Mottled Medium Brown D050 CT-1b 20%- Floor: Daltile Keystones Marble D325 CT-1c 10% - Floor: Daltile Keystones Artisan Brown Speckle D204 CT-1d 20% - Floor: Daltile Keystones Suede Gray Speckle D208 CT-2 = 6x6 Tiles—See Drawings for Pattern CT-2a Walls: Daltile 0144 Artisan Brown CT-2b Walls: Daltile 0166 Elemental Tan CT-2c Walls: Daltile 0182 Suede Gray 7. Acoustical Ceilings ACT-1 2X4 Lay-in Acoustical Tile ACT-2 2X4 Lay-in Acoustical Tile ("Second Look") 8. Resilient Hardwood Floor: WAF-1 Wood Athletic Flooring 9. 12x12 Vinyl Composition Tile: VCT-1 Armstrong, Standard Excelon; 51811 Antique White Azrock; Standard Price; V-205 0-So Beige VCT-2 Armstrong, Standard Excelon; 51927 Field Gray Azrock; Standard Price; V-224 Stonework VCT-3 Armstrong; Standard Excelon; 51880 Maraschino Azrock; Standard Price; V-2621 Pomegranate VCT-4 Armstrong; Standard Excelon; 57506 Colorado Stone Azrock; Standard Price; V-2616 Lagoon 10. 12x24 Large Format Tile: LFT-1 Armstrong; Striations; T3610 Haze Azrock; Textile; V-281 Warm Wool LFT-2 Armstrong; Striations; T3616 Tea Time Project No. 11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 00 01 - 1 Printed 02/22/13 SECTION 09 00 01 FINISH LEGEND Azrock; Textile; V-295 Polly Ester LFT-3 Armstrong; Striations; T3603 Twilight Azrock; Textile; V-288 Worsted Wool LFT-4 Armstrong; Striations; T3604 Midnight Azrock; Textile; V-294 Alpaca Brown 11. Base: B-1 4" Rubber Base; Flexco 078 Umber B-2 Coved Floor Tile, Random mix to match CT-1 B-3 6" Coved to match SV-1 B-4 4"vented base at gymnasium floor, Black B-5 6" Rubber Base; Flexco 078 Umber 12. Rubber Stair Nosing, Stringer& Riser: STR-1 Color to match B-1 13. Sheet Vinyl: SV-1 Armstrong, Possibilities Petit Point 88201 Cream hint 14. Carpet: CPT-1 Carpet Tile, Tandus Divide, color Park Bench 79003 15. Acoustic Wall Panel AWP-1 Maharam, Tek Wall Parable 398650, color 007 Manner AWP-2 Maharam Tek Wall Parable 398650, color 007 Manner(High Impact) 16. Paint: P-1 Field Color: Miller 0195 Mossy Shade P-2 Interior HM Frames, Interior Doors &Accent Color: Miller 0563 Vigilant P-3 Accent Color: Miller 0067 Lover's Kiss P-4 Accent Color: Miller 0204 Marshy Habitat P-5 Accent Color: Miller 0570 Grey Locks HPC-5 Exterior, TBD HPC-6 Exterior, TBD 17. Tack Board TB-1 To match TS-1 18. Tack Surface TS-1 Koroseal, Network, N541-94 19. Walk Off Mat WM-1 Connexus Super No 52, color: Autumn • 20. Lockers Hall Lockers List Industries#713 Sand Beige END OF SECTION Project No. 11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 00 01 - 2 Printed 02/22/13 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall framing. B. Grid suspension system for ceilings. C. Shaft wall system. D. Acoustic insulation. E. Exterior gypsum sheathing. F. Tile backing board. G. Gypsum wallboard. H. Joint treatment and accessories. I. Impact rated wallboard J. Moisture resistant wallboard K. Shear panel board 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Exterior wind-load-bearing metal stud framing. B. Section 07 25 00 -Weather Barriers: Weather-resistive barrier over sheathing. C. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Top-of-wall assemblies at fire rated walls. D. Section 07 90 05 - Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute. (replaced SG-971). B. ANSI A118.9 -American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units. C. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. D. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. E. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. F. ASTM C665- Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. G. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products. H. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. I. ASTM C919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. J. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm)to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness. K. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. L. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 21 16 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES M. ASTM C1177/C1177M -Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. N. ASTM C1178/C1178M - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel. O. ASTM C1278/C1278M - Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel. P. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing. Q. ASTM C1325 - Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cement Substrate Sheets. R. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. S. ASTM C1629/C1629 - Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant Nondecorated Interior Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels; 2006. T. ASTM C1658/C1658M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels. U. ASTM D1730 - Standard Practices for Preparation of Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Surfaces for Painting. V. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. W. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. X. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. Y. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. Z. GA-216 -Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association. AA. GA-234 -Control Joints for Fire-Resistance Rated Systems. AB. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association. AC. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code. AD. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov. AE. SFIA- Steel Framing Industry Association. AF. SSMA- Steel Stud Manufacturers Association. AG. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing and acoustic seals. B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, glass mat faced gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system. 1. Indicate profiles and products for wall and ceiling trim accessories. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing compliance with requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assemblies indicated according to ASTM E119 by an independent testing agency acceptable to agencies having jurisdiction. C. Acoustic Assemblies: Construct walls indicated to receive acoustic insulation as acoustic assemblies. Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 21 16 -2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216. 1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements. B. Interior Partitions : Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics: 1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC as indicated calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90, unless otherwise indicated. C. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies complying with the hourly rating indicated on the Drawings and one of the following: 1. ICC IBC Item Numbers: Comply with applicable requirements of ICC IBC for the particular assembly. 2. Gypsum Association File Numbers: Comply with requirements of GA-600 for the particular assembly. 3. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular assembly in the current UL Fire Resistance Directory. 2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. B. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories: All products to be manufactured by current members of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA)or the Steel Framing Industry Association (SFIA). 1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems: www.clarkdietrich.com. 2. Marino: www.marinoware.com. 3. SCAFCO Corporation: www.scafco.com. 4. Steeler, Inc.: steeler.com 5. The Steel Network, Inc.: www.SteelNetwork.com. 6. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. C. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf. 1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness (Gage): 0.0312 inch (20 gage), unless otherwise indicated 1) Provide 0.0312 inch (20 gage) supporting tile backer board. b. Depth: As indicated. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 21 16- 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs. 3. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch. 4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1 1/2-inch deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Resilient channels shall be of flat, 24 to 26 gage sheet metal constructed with a 1-1/4 inch to 2-1/2 inch wide screw flange on one side and a 1/2 inch to 3/4 inch screw flange on the other side separated by a slotted metal bridge. Slots in bridge shall be 2-1/2 inch to 3-1/4 inch long and 0.25 inch to 0.32 inch wide and installed along the bridge on 3-1/2 inch to 4 inch center spacings. b. Configuration: Asymmetrical. c. Products: 1) Auralex Acoustics, Inc.: RC8. 2) Dietrich Metal Framing; Type RCSD. 3) USG Corporation; RC-1. 4) Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 5. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8, minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (25 gage), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. a. Refer to Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing for Z-Shaped Furring members exterior to the air barrier. 6. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (20 gage), unless otherwise indicated. D. Loadbearing Studs for Application of Gypsum Board: As specified in Section 05 40 00. E. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 and specified performance requirements. 1. ASW Clips: Area separation wall clips, 0.05 inch aluminum, 2-inch wide with 2-inch by 2-1/2 inch legs. F. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventing rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition. 1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. G. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Products: a. Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series. b. Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 2. Provide components UL-listed for use in UL-listed fire-rated head of partition joint systems of fire rating and movement required. 3. Deflection and Firestop Track: a. Provide mechanical anchorage devices as described above that accommodate deflection while maintaining the fire-rating of the wall assembly. b. Products: 1) Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak attached to studs with Posi Clips: www.firetrak.com. 2) Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System: www.metallite.net. 3) Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. H. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Products: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 21 16 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES b. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. c. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.03 BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board: 1. CertainTeed Gypsum: www.certainteed.com/gypsum. 2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com. 3. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com. 4. USG Corporation: www.usg.com. 5. Sure-Board . www.sureboard.com 6. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Gypsum Board, General: Provide Type X or Type C as required for fire-resistant ratings indicated on Drawings. C. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. a. Mold-resistant board is required whenever board is being installed before the building is enclosed and conditioned. 3. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed. 4. Thickness: a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch. b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch. c. Multi-Layer Assemblies: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. 5. Edges: Tapered. 6. Paper-Faced Products: a. CertainTeed Gypsum; ProRoc Brand Gypsum Board or CertainTeed Gypsum Board. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock, ToughRock Fireguard, and ToughRock FireGuard C Gypsum Wallboard. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Gypsum Wallboard. d. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Panels. e. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. D. Moisture Resistant Wallboard: 1. Application: Walls in toilet rooms not indicated to receive tile, locker rooms, laundry rooms, adjacent to drinking fountains and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Edges: Tapered. 4. Mold-Resistant Paper-Faced Products: a. CertainTeed Gypsum; ProRoc Brand Moisture & Mold Resistant Gypsum Board with M2 Tech or M2Tech Gypsum Board. b. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand XP Gypsum Board. c. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels. d. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. E. Impact-Rated Wallboard: Tested to Level 3 soft-body and hard-body impact in accordance with ASTM C1629. 1. Application: Gym walls, halls to 4 feet above finished floor.. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. Paper-Faced Type: Gypsum wallboard as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M. 4. Unfaced Type: Interior fiber-reinforced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1278/C1278M. 5. Type: Fire-resistance rated Type X, UL or WH listed. 6. Thickness: 5/8 inch. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 21 16 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 7. Edges: Tapered. 8. Products: a. CertainTeed Gypsum; AirRenew Impact Resistant Gypsum Board. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensArmor Plus Impact-resistant Interior Panels. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Hi-Impact Brand XP Wallboard. d. USG Corporation; Fiberock Brand Panels--VHI Abuse-Resistant. e. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. F. Tile Backing Board For Non-Wet Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thin-set tile. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 4. Edges: Tapered. 5. ANSI Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based; aggregated portland cement panels with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C1325. a. Thickness: 5/8 inch. b. Products: 1) National Gypsum Company; PermaBase Brand Cement Board. 2) USG Corporation; Durock Brand Cement Board. 3) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 6. Glass-Mat-Faced Board: Coated glass mat water-resistant gypsum backing panel as defined in ASTM C1178. a. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch. b. Products: 1) CertainTeed Gypsum; Diamondback Tile Backer. 2) Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer. (a) Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. G. Structural Shear Panel: Steel sheet and gypsum board composite. 1. Application: Structural shear panels as indicated on the structural drawings. 2. Manufacturer: Sure-Board Series 200 3. Galvanized Steel: No. 22 gage 0.027 inch base-metal thickness minimum per ASTM A653 CS Grade 33/hot dipped galvanized G40 minumum per ASTM A 924. 4. Wallboard Compliance: Exterior rated wallboard to comply with ASTM C 1369, C 1177 and C 1278. 5. Thickness: 5/8 inch 6. Edges: Square. H. Exterior Sheathing Board: Sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 1. Application: Exterior sheathing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. Glass-Mat-Faced Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum substrate as defined in ASTM C1177/C1177M. 4. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch. 5. Edges: Square, for vertical application. 6. Glass-Mat-Faced Products: a. CertainTeed Gypsum; GlasRoc Sheathing. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensGlass Sheathing. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand e2XP Extended Exposure Sheathing. d. USG Corporation; Securock Glass-Mat Sheathing. e. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. I. Shaftwall and Coreboard: Type X; 1 inch thick by 24 inches wide, beveled long edges, ends square cut. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 21 16 - 6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 1. Glass Mat Faced Type: Glass mat shaftliner gypsum panel or glass mat coreboard gypsum panel as defined in ASTM C1658/C1658M. 2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 3. Products: a. CertainTeed Gypsum; GlasRoc Shaftliner. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensGlass Shaft liner(mold-resistant). c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand e2XP Extended Exposure Shaftliner. d. USG Corporation: Sheetrock Glass-Mat Liner Panels. e. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unlaced. Thickness to fill wall cavity, unless otherwise indicated. B. Acoustic Sealant: As specified in Section 07 90 05. 1. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. a. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. b. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. c. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. C. Electric Outlet Box Pads: Provide pads to seal backs of outlet boxes penetrating acoustical walls. 1. Products: a. SpecSeal Series SSP Putty Pads manufactured by STI Specified Technologies, Inc.: www.stifirestop.com b. Lowry's Outlet Box Pads manufactured by Lowry's. c. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. D. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, paper-faced galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Cornerbead. 2. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. 3. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. 4. Expansion (control)joint. 5. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. a. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B221 (ASTM B221 M), Alloy 6063-T5. b. Finish: Chemical conversion coat suitable for field painting, ASTM D1730 Type B. c. Types: 1) Reveal Channel Screed: Fry Reglet DCS-625-50 for use at ceilings and at intermediate soffit joints. 2) Reveal Molding: Fry Reglet DRM-625-50 for use at walls. 3) "F" Reveal: Fry Reglet FDM-625-75 for use at perimeters of soffits. E. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions. 1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. 3. Chemical hardening type compound. F. Basecoat/Surfacer: Flat latex basecoat for use on surfaces indicated to receive Level 4 and 5 finish. Basecoat/surfacer does not replace skim coating for Level 5. Basecoat is in addition to primer specified in Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating. 1. Products: a. "PrepRite High Build Interior Latex Primer/Surfacer", B28W601; Sherwin Williams. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 21 16- 7 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES b. "SHEETROCK Brand Primer-Surfacer, Tuff-Hide; USG Corporation. c. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. G. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping type. H. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 Inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs. I. Screws for Attachment of Shear Panels to Steel Members: Self-drilling/self-tapping pilot point bugle head screws, #8 minumum diameter 1.138-inch with a minimum 0.3145-inch head diameter, 1.5-inch long and 3/8-inch minimum drill tip, complying with SAE J78 and ASTM C954. 1. ER 5280 by John Grabber&Associates or equal. J. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence. Start of wall and ceiling system Work will indicate acceptance of surfaces and conditions within each area. B. Protection: Provide temporary covering to eliminate splattering of joint compound onto adjacent surfaces. 3.02 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION A. Shaft Wall Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 1. Fasten runners to structure with short leg to finished side, using appropriate power-driven fasteners at not more than 24 inches on center. 2. Install runners at end walls and back-to-back at intermediate horizontal joints in shaftwall assembly following manufacturer's instructions. B. Shaft Wall Liner: Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially between special friction studs. 1. Install "H" studs and shaftliner board sequentially, pressure-fitting panels into stud flanges. Install two 1-inch panels per stud. 2. Fasten ASW clips to H-stud using 3/8-inch Type "S" screws into flange. 3. Fasten ASW clips to wood stud framing and cross-blocking with 1-1/4-inch Type "S" screws. 4. Provide ASW clips at maximum 5 feet on center vertically for the first 23 feet of wall height, and at maximum of 10 feet on center vertically for remainder of wall. Provide cross-blocking as required. 5. Seal perimeter of shaft wall and penetrations with acoustical sealant. C. Area Separation Wall Assemblies: 1. Follow requirements for UL Assembly Design Number U347, Configuration "B"- Exposed to fire from both sides. 3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry or concrete walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Installing Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: 1. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support. 2. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. 3. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 21 16 - 8 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 4. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: a. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. 1) Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. b. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. D. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center, unless otherwise indicated. 1. At areas to receive tile backing panels, space studs at 16 inches on center. 2. Extend partition framing bottom of roof deck. 3. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. E. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels using not less than double 0.0312 inch (20 gage) studs at jambs. F. Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete and masonry walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center. 1. Orientation: Horizontal. 2. Spacing: At 16 inches on center. G. Acoustic Furring: Install resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center. Locate joints over framing members. 1. Attach resilient channels horizontally to the narrow flange side of the stud at 1-1/2 inches above the floor(with the open side of the channel facing down) and 6 inches below ceiling runner and 24 inches on center with the open side of channel facing up. 2. Attach single layer of gypsum board screw attached 12 inches on center on perimeter and at resilient channels 6 inches from stud. Set each gypsum board layer perimeter on a bead of acoustical sealant. Perimeter edge of wall shall not be set back from interface surface by more than 1/4 inch to allow sealant to join both surfaces. 3. Install resilient channels and apply acoustical sealant in compliance with recommendations of USG Company SA923. H. Blocking: Install mechanically fastened steel sheet blocking for support of: 1. Framed openings. 2. Wall mounted cabinets. 3. Plumbing fixtures. 4. Toilet partitions. 5. Grab bars. 6. Toilet accessories. 7. Wall mounted door hardware, including wall stops and electromagnetic door holders. 3.04 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Acoustic Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. B. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. C. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Place two beads continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members. 2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 21 16 - 9 Punted 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 3. In non-fire-rated construction, seal around all penetrations by items such as conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes. D. Electrical Outlet Box Pads: Install pads to the back of installed electrical boxes, mold to box and fold around conduit cable entering the box. 3.05 GYPSUM BOARD AND GLASS MAT FACED BOARD INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations. B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board perpendicular to framing, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. C. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing. D. Exterior Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C1280. Install sheathing vertically, with edges butted tight and ends occurring over firm bearing. E. Glass Mat Faced Backing Board: Install over steel framing members where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install with 1/4 inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. F. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board . G. Installation on Resilient Channels: Use 1-inch screws for the first layer of 5/8-inch gypsum board and 1-5/8-inch screws for the second layer of 5/8-inch gypsum board. Do not allow fasteners to touch the wall studs. H. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF STRUCTURAL SHEAR PANELS A. Provide minimum 1 1/2 inch wide flat strapping of same gage as the framing materials at all joints of all panels. B. Install with metal sheet set against metal framing. C. Fasten shear panels with screws at spacing indicated on structural drawings 3.07 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated. In public areas, confirm locations with Architect for visual effect. Frame both sides of joints independently. 1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long. 2. Fire-Rated Joints: Comply with Gypsum Association GA-234 for control joints in fire-rated assemblies. B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths. C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated. 1. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 2. L-Bead: Use at all exposed terminations of gypsum board, at all floor joints and joints to receive sealants. D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated. 3.08 JOINT TREATMENT A. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Exterior Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded and finished with chemical hardening type joint compound. B. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. C. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, except as indicated below and as follows: Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 21 16 - 10 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 1. Level 5: Walls and ceilings in all public areas such as lobbies and corridors with high incident lighting. a. Application of basecoat/surfacer will not constitute or substitute for application of a skim coat. b. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating. c. At areas requiring use of abuse resistant gypsum board, bed joint tape with setting type joint compound and fill and finish with heavy weight ready mixed vinyl-based joint compound. Apply a finish coat of basecoat/surfacer after application of skim coat. 2. Level 4: Walls and ceilings at all other public areas, surfaces scheduled to receive wall coverings and exterior soffits. a. Apply one coat of specified basecoat/surfacer to entire surface at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate of mil thickness. b. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 90 00- Painting and Coating and are in addition to basecoat/surfacer. 3. Level 2: In utility areas such as Janitors Closets, Electrical Closets and Storage Rooms, in areas behind cabinetry and wainscots and on backing board to receive tile finish. 4. Level 1: Wall areas above finished ceilings and permanently concealed areas, whether or not accessible in the completed construction, except provide a higher level of finish as to comply with fire resistance ratings and acoustical ratings. D. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. E. Fill and finish joints and corners of tile backing board as recommended by manufacturer. 3.09 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 21 16 - 11 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING SECTION 09 30 00 TILING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile for floor applications. B. Tile for wall applications. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers. B. Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies: Tile backer board. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 -American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium). 1. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar. 2. ANSI A108.1b -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. 3. ANSI A108.1c- Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement. 4. ANSI A108.4 -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive. 5. ANSI A108.5-American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. 6. ANSI A108.6 -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy. 7. ANSI A108.8-American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout. 8. ANSI A108.9-American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout. 9. ANSI A108.10 -American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework. 10. ANSI A118.3-Ame.;can National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive. 11. ANSI A118.4 -American National Standard Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. 12. ANSI A118.12 -American National Standard Specifications for Crack Isolation Membranes for Thin-set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation. 13. ANSI A118.13-American National Standard Specifications for Bonded Sound Reduction Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile Installation. 14. ANSI A137.1 -American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile. B. TCNA(HB)- Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation. 1.04 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives. 1. For sealants, include printed statement of VOC content. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 30 00 - 1 Piloted 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING B. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions,junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details. C. Selection Samples: Provide manufacturer's full range of available colors for grout selection. D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on one plywood panels, minimum 24 x 24 inches in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Provide 2 percent of each size, color, and surface finish of tile specified. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of The Tile Council of North America Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Installer specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5 years of documented experience and approved by product manufacturer. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TILE A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. B. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer. 1. Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com. 2. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. C. Ceramic Mosaic Tile Type CT-1: ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. Keystones manufactured by Daltile or approved equivalent product. 2. Size and Shape: 2 inch square. 3. Edges: Cushioned. 4. Surface Finish: Unglazed. 5. Colors: As indicated in Section 09 00 01 - Finish Legend. 6. Mounted Sheet Size: As recommended by manufacturer. D. Glazed Wall Tile Type CT-2: ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. Semi-Gloss manufactured by Daltile or approved equivalent product. 2. Size and Shape: 6 inch square. 3. Edges: Cushioned. 4. Surface Finish: High gloss. 5. Color mix: As indicated in Section 09 00 01 - Finish Legend. 6. Pattern: As indicated on Drawings. 2.02 SETTING MATERIALS A. Available Manufacturers: Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 30 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING 1. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. 2. Flextile Ltd: www.flextile.net. 3. Laticrete International, Inc: www.laticrete.com (Basis-of-Design). 4. TEC: www.tecspecialty.com. 5. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Provide setting materials made by the same manufacturer as grout. C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.4. 1. Application(s): Use this type of bond coat where indicated and where no other type of bond coat is indicated. 2. Products: a. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE 254 Platinum: www.laticrete.com or equal by other named manufacturers. b. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.03 GROUTS A. Available Manufacturers: 1. Flextile Ltd.: www.flextile.net. 2. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. 3. LATICRETE International, Inc: www.laticrete.com. (Basis-of-Design) 4. TEC: www.tecspecialty.com. 5. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3 chemical resistant and water-cleanable epoxy grout. 1. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. 2. Products: a. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE SpectraLOCK 2000 IG: www.laticrete.com or equal by other named manufacturers. b. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 3. Locations of Use: All floors and walls. 2.04 THIN-SET ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Crack Isolation Membrane at Floors: Specifically designed for bonding to thin-set setting mortar; not primarily a waterproofing material and having the following characteristics: 1. Sound Reduction: Comply with ANSI A118.13, bonded membrane. 2. Crack Isolation: Comply with ANSI A118.12. 3. Water Resistance: Comply with ANSI A118.10, bonded waterproofing. 4. Uncoupling Function: Allow for separation between membrane and the mortar adhering tile to the membrane when subjected to excessive substrate movement. 5. Type: Fluid-applied. 6. Do Not Use: Gypsum or cementitious based self-leveling underlayment. 7. Products: a. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE Hydro Ban: www.laticrete.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile. C. Verify that masonry substrate joints have been struck flush. D. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 30 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. E. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 1. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. 2. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. F. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. G. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. H. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. 3.03 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and The Tile Council of North America Handbook recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor and base joints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout. E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/8 inch. G. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. H. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. I. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. 2. Space control joints at 12 foot to 16 foot intervals in each direction, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide joints at perimeter walls and at fixtures or structural elements. J. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours. K. Grout tile joints. L. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 30 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 30 00 TILING 3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS -THIN-SET METHODS A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method F115, with epoxy grout. 3.05 INSTALLATION -WALL TILE A. Over coated glass mat backer board on studs, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method W245. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 30 00 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical units. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers: Acoustical sealant. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads." B. ASTM C635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. C. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels. D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010. E. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions. F. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products. G. CAL (CHPS LEM)- Low-Emitting Materials Product List; California Collaborative for High Performance Schools (CHPS). H. CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies - Seismic Zones 3 &4. I. Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau, Technical Bulletin 401 - Suspension Systems for Acoustical Lay-in Ceilings. J. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is providea, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design acoustical ceiling suspension systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using the seismic standards indicated in the Quality Assurance Article. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning. B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For ceiling suspension system, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Submit submittals as "Deferred Submittals" in accordance with Section 107.3.4.2 of the IBC. 2. The deferred submittal items shall not be installed until their design and submittal documents have been approved by the building official. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 51 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS D. Samples: Submit three samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate perimeter conditions requiring special attention. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Acoustical Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed. G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling and components and anchor and fastener type. H. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistive Assemblies: Complete assembly listed and classified by UL for the fire resistance indicated. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84: 1. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. C. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions according to the following: 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E580. 2. CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies--Seismic Zones 3&4." 3. ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads." 4. Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau, Technical Bulletin 401 - Suspension Systems for Acoustical Lay-in Ceilings. D. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. E. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.: www.armstrong.com. 2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. 3. USG: www.usg.com. 4. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Acoustical Units- General: ASTM E1264, Class A. 1. Units for Installation in Fire-Rated Suspension System: Listed and classified for the fire-resistive assembly the suspension system is a part:of. C. Acoustical Tile ACT-1: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type III, Form 1, with the following characteristics: 1. VOC Content: Certified as Low Emission by one of the following : a. GreenGuard Children and Schools; www.greenguard.org. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 51 00 -2 Printed 212212013 SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS b. Product listing in the CHPS Low-Emitting Materials Product List at; www.chps.net/manual/lem_table.htm. 2. Size: 24 x 48 inches (600 x 1200 mm). 3. Thickness: 3/4 inches. 4. Composition: Water felted. 5. Light Reflectance: 0.82 - 0.86, determined as specified in ASTM E1264. 6. NRC Range: 0.70, determined as specified in ASTM E1264. 7. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 30 - 35, determined as specified in ASTM E1264. 8. Recycled Content: Minimum 60 percent. 9. Edge: Square. 10. Surface Color: White. 11. Surface Pattern: Pattern El or CE. 12. Products: a. Cirrus Square Lay-In Item No. 533 manufactured by Armstrong: www.armstrong.com. b. Cashmere Item No. CM-497 NRCDP manufactured by CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. c. Eclipse ClimaPlus Item No. 78575 manufactured by USG: www.usg.com. D. Acoustical Tile ACT-2: Painted mineral fiber, ASTM E1264 Type III, Form 2, with the following characteristics: 1. VOC Content: Certified as Low Emission by one of the following : a. GreenGuard Children and Schools; www.greenguard.org. b. Product listing in the CHPS Low-Emitting Materials Product List at; www.chps.net/manual/lem_table.htm. 2. Size: 24 x 48 inches (600 x 1200 mm). 3. Thickness: 3/4 inches. 4. Composition: Water felted. 5. Light Reflectance: 0.84 to 0.89, determined as specified in ASTM E1264. 6. NRC Range: 0.55 - 0.60, determined as specified in ASTM E1264. 7. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 35 - 38, determined as specified in ASTM E1264. 8. Recycled Content: Minimum 28 percent. 9. Edge: Angled Tegular. 10. Surface Color: White. 11. Surface Pattern: Pattern C, E, K or C, D, E, K or CDK. 12. Products: a. Fine Fissured Second Look Item No. 1761 manufactured by Armstrong: www.armstrong.com. b. Fine Fissured Customline Item FFCL-224 BIO manufactured by CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. c. Radar ClimaPlus Illusion Item No. 2842 manufactured by USG: www.usg.com. 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S) A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation: www.chicagometallic.com. 3. USG: www.usg.com. 4. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Suspension Systems - General: ASTM C 635; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, hold down clips, and seismic struts as required. C. Recycled Content: Provide products made from steel sheet with average recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. D. Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; heavy-duty. 1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 51 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 2. Construction: Double web. 3. Finish: White painted. 4. Products: a. Prelude XL manufactured by Armstrong: www.arrnstrong.com. b. Seismic 1200 manufactured by Chicago Metallic: www.chicagometallic.com. c. DX manufactured by USG: www.usg.com. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. 1. Wire Gage: 12 gage (0.1055-inch) minimum. B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid. Provide type complying with seismic design requirements. 1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid. C. Perimeter Moldings at Clouds: Extruded aluminum trim. 1. Color: White. 2. Depth: Nominal 4 inches. 3. Available Products: a. Axiom Classic Trim manufactured by Armstrong: www.armstrong.com. b. Infinity Aluminum Trim manufactured by Chicago Metallic: www.chicagometallic.com. c. Compasso Elite manufactured by USG: www.usg.com. D. Acoustical Sealant For Perimeter Moldings: Specified in Section 07 90 05. E. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. 3.02 INSTALLATION -SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636/C 636M and ASTM E 580/E 580M and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions, CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook" and NWCB Technical Bulletin 401. 1. Comply with restrictions of ASCE 7 on use of power actuated fasteners. 2. Power actuated fasteners shall not be used for sustained tension loads or for brace applications unless approved for seismic loading, with the following exceptions: a. Power actuated fasteners in concrete where the service load on any individual fastener does not exceed 90 lb. b. Power actuated fasteners in steel where the service load on any individual fastener does not exceed 250 lb. B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360. C. Lay out system to a balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of acoustical unit size. D. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. E. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. F. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 51 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. G. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. H. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. I. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. J. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. K. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently. L. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners. M. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions. 1. Install in bed of acoustical sealant. 2. Use longest practical lengths. 3.03 INSTALLATION -ACOUSTICAL UNITS A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces. D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete. E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents. F. Cutting Acoustical Units: 1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges. 2. Double cut and field paint exposed reveal edges, including perimeter edges. G. Install hold-down clips on panels within 20 ft of an exterior door. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections and prepare reports: 1. Suspended ceiling system. 2. Hangers, anchors and fasteners. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. C. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed with installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers for the next area until test results for previously completed installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers show compliance with requirements. 1. Extent of Each Test Area: When installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor has reached 20 percent completion but no panels have been installed. a. Within each test area, testing agency will select 1 or every 10 power-actuated fasteners and postinstalled anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 51 00 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS them for 100 lbf of tension; it will also select 1 of every 2 postinstalled anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 250 Ibf of tension. 1) When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency. b. Within each test area, testing agency will select 5 percent of power-actuated and post-installed anchors used to attach hangers to concrete over metal deck and will test them for a minimum 250 lbs for not less than 10 seconds. Test samples will be selected from dispersed locations. 1) When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing agency will test a minimum of 6 anchors in the immediate vicinity of the failed anchor. In the event of any additional failure, all anchors placed on the same day will be tested. c. Replace all failed anchors. D. Remove and replace acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 51 00 - 6 Printed 222/2013 SECTION 09 64 66 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING SECTION 09 64 66 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wood athletic floor assembly WAF-1. 1. Work of the Section includes all tools and services to install a complete wood floor system from the concrete surface upward through the sanding and finishing, game lines, and installation of perimeter moldings and thresholds. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 -Cast-in-Place Concrete: Floor flatness requirements. B. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware: Thresholds to be installed as Work of this Section. C. Section 08 71 01 - Hardware Schedule: Schedule of thresholds to be installed as Work of this Section. D. Section 11 66 23 -Gymnasium Equipment: Athletic equipment installed through flooring assembly. E. Section 12 66 13 - Telescoping Bleachers: Coordination for locations of blocking under telescoping bleachers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D4397 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications. B. ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. C. ASTM F2170 - Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes. D. DIN 18032 P2 - Sport Halls; Halls for Gymnastics and Games; Floors for Sporting Activities; Requirements, Testing. E. MFMA (SPEC) -Guide Specifications for Maple Flooring Systems; Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association. F. MFMA PUR Standards (Performance and Uniformity Rating Standards). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for wood athletic floor assemblies. 1. Submit MFMA Recommendations for correct preparation, finishing and testing of concrete subfloor surfaces to receive wood flooring. 2. Submit manufacturer's recommendations and requirements for flooring preparation, testing and slab conditions to meet warranty requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details including location and layout of each type of floor assembly and accessory. Include the following: 1. Expansion provisions and trim details. 2. Layout, colors, widths, and dimensions of game lines and markers. 3. Locations of floor inserts for athletic equipment installed through flooring assembly. 4. Locations of blocking under telescoping bleachers. C. Selection Samples: Manufacturer's color charts showing colors and glosses available for the following: 1. Floor finish. 2. Game-line and marker paint. 3. Vented base. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 64 66 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 64 66 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING D. Samples for Verification: For each type of athletic floor assembly and accessory required; approximately 12 inches and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. 1. Include sample sets showing the full range of normal color and texture variations expected in wood flooring. 2. Include sample sets showing finishes and game-line paint and marker paint colors applied to wood flooring. E. Certifications: 1. Submit MFMA PUR Compliance Letter with bid and as part of the submittal procedures. 2. Submit documentation indicating compliance with International Standard DIN 18032, Part 2, 2001. F. Qualification Data: For Installer. G. Maintenance Data: For wood athletic floor assemblies and finish systems to include in maintenance manuals. 1. Include recommendations for types of tape that can be used by Owner for temporary line marking without damaging floor finish. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed wood athletic floor assembly installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in installations with a record of successful in-service performance and who is approved by the wood flooring manufacturer. 1. Installers shall be MFMA Mill Accredited Installation Company with MFMA Accredited Installers on-site for the duration of the wood floor installation. 2. Installer responsibilities include installation and field finishing of athletic floor assembly components and accessories, and application of game lines and markers. B. Maple Flooring: Comply with MFMA grading rules for species, grade, and cut. 1. Provide flooring that carries MFMA mark on each bundle or piece. C. Performance Testing: 1. Flooring system shall have been independently tested and shall meet or exceed Athletic Performance requirements according to the International Standard DIN 18032, Part 2, 2001 or MFMA PUR Standards. 2. Performance testing engineer shall be an ISO 17025 System member rated for each performed test conducted. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver assembly materials in unopened cartons or bundles. B. Protect wood from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver wood components until after concrete, masonry and similar wet work is complete and dry. C. Store wood components in a dry, warm, well-ventilated, weathertight location and in a horizontal position. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditioning period begins not less than seven days before athletic floor assembly installation, is continuous through installation, and continues not less than seven days after athletic floor installation. 1. Environmental Conditioning: Maintain an ambient temperature between 65 and 75 deg F and relative humidity planned for building occupants, but not less than 35 percent or more than 50 percent, in spaces to receive athletic floor assemblies during the conditioning period. 2. Wood Conditioning: Move wood components into spaces where they will be installed, no later than beginning of the conditioning period. a. Do not install athletic floor assernI,;ies until wood components adjust to relative humidity of, and are at same temperature as, spaces where they are to be installed. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 64 66 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 64 66 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING b. Open sealed packages to allow wood components to acclimatize immediately on moving wood components into spaces in which they will be installed. B. After conditioning period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for building occupants. C. Install athletic floor assemblies after other finishing operations, including painting, and all overhead work such as mechanical have been completed. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard warranty that material is free from manufacturing defects. 1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products WAF-1: 1. Action Floor Systems LLC; Concord II; www.actionfloors.com. 2. Connor Sports Flooring, Inc.; Product Alliance System; www.connorfloor.com. 3. Robbins, Inc.; Product Eclipse (Anchored); www.robbinsfloor.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 WOOD FLOORING A. Strip Flooring: Northern hard maple (Acer saccharum), kiln dried, random length, tongue and groove, and end matched. 1. Grade: MFMA-RL Second and Better. 2. Thickness: 25/32 inch. 3. Face Width: 2-1/4 inches. 4. Preservative Treatment: Clear, penetrating, water-repellent wood preservative that protects against mold, mildew, staining, and decay fungi; complying with MFMA's written recommendations and applied by immersion. 2.03 SUBFLOOR SYSTEM A. Plywood Nailers and Sleepers: Manufacturer's standard. B. Subfloor: 15/32-inch thick, CD face, Exposure I, APA rated plywood sheathing or plywood as recommended by flooring manufacturer. C. Resilient Pads: Manufacturer's recommended rubber, EPDM or polyurethane pads installed at manufacturer's standard spacing for product designation indicated above. PVC pads are not acceptable. 1. Material: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Thickness: As recommended by manufacturer. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Retarder: ASTM D4397, polyethylene sheet not less than 6 mils thick. B. Resilient Wall Base: Molded, vented, rubber or vinyl cove base; 4 by 3 by 48 inches; with premolded outside corners. 1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. C. Thresholds: As specified in Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware and scheduled in Section 08 71 01 - Hardware Schedule. D. Fasteners: Type and size recommended by manufacturer, but not less than those recommended by MFMA for application indicated. E. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compound: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation approved by athletic floor manufacturer. F. Floor-Finish System: System of compatible components recommended in writing by flooring manufacturer and MFMA approved. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 64 66 -3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 64 66 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 1. Type: MFMA Group 5, Water Based Finishes; polyurethane, unless otherwise recommended by flooring manufacturer. 2. Game-Line and Marker Paint: Industrial enamel compatible with finish coats and recommended in writing by manufacturers of finish coats and paint for this use. 3. VOC Content: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Floor Sealers and Finish Coats: VOC content of not more than 350 g/L. b. Game-Line and Marker Paint: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 4. Available Floor Finish Products: a. 1907 Gym Finish manufactured by Hillyard, Inc. or equal. b. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of athletic floor assemblies. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Concrete Slabs: Verify that concrete slabs comply with requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests in accordance with ASTM F1869, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 2. Relative Humidity Testing (In-Situ Probe Test): Perform tests in accordance with ASTM F2170. Use a prepackaged relative humidity testing kit (ASTM F2170) and follow the manufacturer's instructions. a. Relative humidity level shall be 80 percent or lower before installation, unless manufacturer has more stringent requirements. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Grind high spots and fill low spots on concrete substrates to produce a maximum 1/8-inch deviation in any direction when checked with a 10-foot straight edge. 1. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. B. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Coordinate with installer of telescoping bleachers for required locations of blocking. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with athletic floor assembly manufacturer's written instructions, but not less than written recommendations of MFMA applicable to flooring type indicated. B. Pattern: Lay flooring parallel with long dimension of space to be floored, unless otherwise indicated. C. Expansion Spaces: Provide 1-1/2-to 2-inch expansion void as required by manufacturer's written instructions and MFMA's written recommendations at walls and other obstructions, and at interruptions and terminations of flooring. 1. Cover expansion spaces with vented base. D. Vapor Retarder: Install vapor retarder over entire area to be covered by wood athletic flooring, with joints lapped a minimum of 6 inches and sealed. E. Position subfloor panels per manufacturer's instructions, integrating top layer with adjacent panels. Allow for a 1/4" (6mm) gap at subfloor panel end joints. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 64 66-4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 64 66 WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING F. Blocking: Install solid blocking at doorways and under bleachers in the stacked position and under wheel trucks full width of extended bleachers. Provide blocking minimum 6-inches wide each side of truck. G. Strip Flooring: Mechanically fasten perpendicular to supports. H. Installation Tolerances: 1/8 inch in 10 feet of variance from level. I. Vented Cove Base: Install manufacturer's recommended vented cove base, using premolded outside corners and mitered inside corners. J. Thresholds: Install thresholds furnished as Work of Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware at all transitions of wood athletic flooring to other flooring to span expansion voids and to provide an even, accessible transition. 1. Attach thresholds to adjacent floor surfaces to allow for movement of wood flooring system. Do not attach to wood athletic flooring. 3.04 SANDING AND FINISHING A. Follow applicable recommendations in MFMA's "Industry Recommendations for Sanding, Sealing, Court Lining, Finishing, and Resurfacing of Maple Gym Floors." B. Allow installed flooring to acclimate to ambient conditions for at least 10 days before sanding. C. Machine sand with coarse, medium, and fine grades of sandpaper to achieve a level, smooth, uniform surface without ridges or cups. Remove sanding dust by tack or vacuum. D. Finish: Apply seal and finish coats of finish system according to finish manufacturer's written instructions. Provide not less than four coats total and not less than two finish coats. 1. Water-Based Finishes: Use finishing methods recommended by finish manufacturer to reduce grain raise and sidebonding effect. 2. Game Lines and Markers: Apply game-line and marker paint between final seal coat and first finish coat according to paint manufacturer's written instructions. a. Mask flooring at game lines and markers, and apply paint to produce lines and markers with sharp edges. b. Where game lines cross, break minor game line at intersection; do not overlap lines. c. Apply game lines and markers in widths and colors according to requirements of Oregon School Activities Association (OSAA) and National Federation of State High School Association. d. Apply finish coats after game-line and marker paint is fully cured. E. School Mascot, Initials or Logo: Provide layout of graphics and painting the center court circle. Allow for maximum of 6 colors and shades of paint. Line work and graphics to replicate school mascot in detail, scaled to fit inside the circle. 1. Graphics will be provided in digital format by Owner. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect athletic floors during remainder of construction period to allow finish to cure and to ensure that flooring and finish are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Do not cover athletic floors after finishing until finish reaches full cure, and not before seven days after applying last finish coat. 2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over athletic floors. Protect fully cured floor finishes and surfaces with plywood or hardboard panels to prevent damage from storing or moving objects over athletic floors. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 64 66 - 5 ' Printed 2/22'2013 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Resilient sheet flooring. B. Resilient tile flooring. C. Resilient base. D. Resilient stair accessories. E. Installation accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 61 16 -Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. B. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors. C. Section 09 00 01 - Finish Legend. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. B. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. C. ASTM F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile. D. ASTM F1303 - Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing. E. ASTM F1516 - Standard Practice for Sealing Seams of Resilient Flooring Products by the Heat Weld Method (when Recommended). F. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base. G. ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. H. ASTM F1913 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing. I. ASTM F2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes. J. CAL (CHPS LEM) - Low-Emitting Materials Product List; California Collaborative for High Performance Schools (CHPS). K. GE! (SCH) - GREENGUARD "Children and Schools" Certified Products; GREENGUARD Environmental Institute. L. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association. M. SCS (CPD) - SCS Certified Products; Scientific Certification Systems. N. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions. 1. Provide product data for adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content and chemical components. 2. Provide product data for linoleum flooring, including printed statement of costs for each rapidly renewable material. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 65 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial selection for moldings and transition strips. D. Verification Samples: Submit two samples, 8 x 8 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each resilient flooring product specified. E. Concrete Testing Standard: Submit a copy of ASTM F710. F. Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub-floor is acceptable. G. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing. H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Flooring Material: 30 square feet of each type and color. 2. Extra Wall Base: 10 linear feet of each type and color. 3. Extra Stair Materials: Quantity equivalent to 5 percent of each type and color. 4. Maintenance Products: One year's annual required maintenance products of type recommended by flooring manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F. B. Store materials for not less than 72 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 68 degrees F. C. Moisture Testing: Maintain temperatures and humidity expected during normal use for testing. If this is not possible, then the test conditions should be 75 +/- 10 deg F and 50 +/- 10 percent relative humidity. Maintain these conditions 48 hours prior to and during testing. D. Close spaces to traffic during resilient flooring installation and for time period after installation recommended in writing by flooring manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET FLOORING A. Vinyl Sheet Flooring SV-: Homogeneous without backing, with color and pattern throughout full thickness, and: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1303, Type II, without backing, or ASTM F1913. 2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 3. VOC Content: Certified as Low Emission by one of the following: a. GreenGuard Children and Schools; www.greenguard.org. b. SCS Floorscore; www.scscertified.com. 4. Total Thickness and Wear Layer Thickness: 0.080 inch nominal. 5. Sheet Width: 72 inch minimum. 6. Static Load Resistance: 125 psi minimum, when tested as specified in ASTM F1303. 7. Heat welded seams. 8. Integral coved base with cap strip. 9. Colors: As indicated in Finish Legend. 10. Manufacturer: As indicated in Finish Legend. a. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Vinyl Welding Rod: Solid vinyl bead produced by manufacturer of vinyl flooring for heat welding seams, in color matching field color. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 65 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING 2.02 TILE FLOORING A. Vinyl Composition Tile VCT-VCT-: Homogeneous, with color extending throughout thickness, and: 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1066, of Class corresponding to type specified. 2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 3. Size: 12 x 12 inch. 4. VOC Content: Certified as Low Emission by one of the following: a. GreenGuard Children and Schools; www.greenguard.org. b. SCS Floorscore; www.scscertified.com. c. Product listing in the CHPS Low-Emitting Materials Product List at; www.chps.net/manual/lem_table.htm. 5. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 6. Color: As indicated in Finish Legend. 7. Manufacturer: As indicated in Finish Legend. a. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Bio-Based Tile LFT- :Bio-Based chips, through color with acrylic finish. 1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1700, of Class corresponding to type specified. 2. Size: 12" x 24" 3. Overall Thickness: 1/8". 4. Wear Layer Thickness: 1/8". 5. Color: As indicated in Finish Legend. 6. Manufacturer: Armstrong 7. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.03 STAIR COVERING A. Stair Risers: Full height and width of tread in longest pieces possible, matching stair nosing in material and color: 1. Thickness: 0.080 inch. 2. Manufacturer: As indicated in Finish Legend. a. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Stair Stringers RSS: Full height in one piece and in maximum available lengths, matching stair nosing and risers in material and color: 1. Thickness: 0.080 inch. 2. Manufacturer: As indicated in Finish Legend. a. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. C. Stair Nosings: 1-1/2 inch horizontal return, 1-1/8 inch vertical return, full width of stair tread in maximum available lengths: 1. Material: Rubber. 2. Nominal Thickness: 0.125 inch. 3. Pattern: Raised. 4. Color: As indicated in Finish Legend. 5. Manufacturer: As indicated in Finish Legend. a. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.04 RESILIENT BASE A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove, and as follows: 1. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 2. Height: 4 inch. 3. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 65 00 - 3 Printed 2/22'2013 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING 4. Finish: Satin. 5. Length: Roll. 6. Color: As indicated in Finish Legend. 7. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops. 8. Manufacturer: As indicated in Finish Legend. a. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: Cement based; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer. B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer. 1. VCT and Vinyl Adhesives: Use adhesives that have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Bio-Based Tile Adhesives: Use adhesive S-521 High-Moisture, S-700 Thin Spread as recommended by BBT manufacturer. C. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Rubber. 1. Provide transitions and edge strips at all exposed edges of resilient flooring and carpet and at transitions from one material to another. a. Coordinate with Work of Section 09 30 00-Tiling for transitions adjacent to tile. 2. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of available colors. D. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories: 1. Cove Strip: 1-inch radius provided or approved by manufacturer. 2. Cap Strip: Square metal cap provided or approved by manufacturer. E. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic. F. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are reaay to receive resilient base. C. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH. 1. Test in accordance with ASTM F710. 2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. E. Install resilient flooring material and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor coverings. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 65 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING 4. Moisture Testing: Perform the following tests: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. a. Anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. Limit maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate to 5 lb. of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours for linoleum. b. Perform additional tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Relative Humidity Testing: Perform testing of relative humidity in concrete slabs for file tests in accordance with ASTM F2170 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes. 1. The relative humidity measured from the center of the concrete slab should not exceed 75 percent. D. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks,joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. E. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. F. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. G. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Unroll floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting. D. Lay out floor coverings as follows: 1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction. 2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates. 3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. 4. Avoid cross seams. E. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. F. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. G. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. H. Fit joints tightly. I. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. J. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door. K. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated. 1. Resilient Strips: Attach to substrate using adhesive. L. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 65 00 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING 3.04 SHEET FLOORING A. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions,to produce minimum number of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns carefully at seams. B. Roll resilient flooring using 100 lb. roller as required by flooring manufacturer. C. Double cut sheet at seams. D. Lay flooring with tightly butted seams,without any seam sealer unless otherwise indicated. E. Seamless Installation: Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare,weld, and finish seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces. F. Double cut sheet; provide heat welded seams. G. Coved Base: Install using coved strip as backing at floor to wall junction. Extend sheet flooring 6 inches vertically, and cover top edge with metal cap strip. 3.05 TILE FLOORING A. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless manufacturer's instructions say otherwise. B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half of a tile at perimeter C. Lay tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. 1. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. D. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures, including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings. E. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. F. Install tile to pattern indicated on the drawings. 3.06 RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.07 STAIR COVERINGS A. Install stair coverings in one piece for full width of tread. B. Install stringers configured tightly to stair profile. C. Adhere over entire surface. Fit accurately and securely. 3.08 ACCESSORIES A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 1. Install reducer strips at edges of resilient flooring and carpet that would otherwise be exposed. 2. Install transition strips at joints between one material to another. B. Install stair nosings in one piece for full width of tread. Adhere over entire surface. Fit accurately and securely. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 65 00-6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING 3.09 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Perform initial maintenance on installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, prior to owner's acceptance. Remove construction site debris from project site and legally dispose of debris. 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaning methods recommended by flooring manufacturer. 2. Sweep vacuum floor after installation. 3. Do not perform initial maintenance for a minimum of 5 days after installation has been completed to allow the adhesive the proper time to set. 4. Damp mop flooring to remove black marks and soil. D. Apply floor polish as recommended by manufacturer and number of coats recommended. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation. B. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. C. Cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 65 00 - 7 Printed 2/2 212 01 3 SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpet tile, fully adhered. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials. B. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. C. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. D. ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. E. CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute. F. CRI (GLP) - Green Label Plus Carpet Testing Program -Approved Products; Carpet and Rug Institute. G. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. 1. For carpet tile, provide documentation indicating compliance with testing and product requirements of Carpet and Rug Institute's "Green Label Plus" program. 2. For installation adhesive, include printed statement of VOC content. B. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. D. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Carpet Tiles: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed of each color and pattern installed. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with minimum 5 years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet approved by manufacturer. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. B. Moisture Testing: Maintain temperatures and humidity expected during normal use for testing. If this is not possible, then the test conditions should be 75+/-10 deg F and 50+/-10 percent relative humidity. Maintain these conditions 48 hours prior to and during testing. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 68 13 - 1 Printed 2/2212013 SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, excess static discharge and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Tandus; Product: Divide; www.tandus.com. B. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Carpet Tile Type CPT-1: Tufted, manufactured in one color dye lot. 1. Product: Divide manufactured by Tandus. 2. Tile Size: 24 x 24 inch, nominal. 3. Color: See Section 09 00 01 Finish Legend. 4. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in accordance with ASTM E648 or NFPA 253. 5. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D2859 (the "pill test"). 6. VOC Content: Provide CRI Green Label Plus certified product; in lieu of labeling, independent test report showing compliance is acceptable. 7. Fiber: Antron Lumena Nylon. 8. Dye Method: 100% Solution Dyed 9. Max. Electrostatic Charge: 3 Kv. at 20 percent relative humidity. 10. Rows: 10.8 per inch. 11. Gage: 5/64 inch. 12. Pile Weight: 23 oz/sq yd. 13. Tuft Density: 138.24 tufts/sq in 14. Primary Backing: Synthetic Non-Woven. 15. Secondary Backing Material: Flex-Aire Cushion Modular. 16. Installation Method: Peel and Stick, full coverage. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Sub-Floor Filler: Cement based; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. B. Edge Strips: Rubber, color as selected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet tile. B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces. C. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. D. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. 4. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 5. Moisture Testing: Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 68 13-2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING a. Engage an independent testing agency to perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Flooring installer shall perform additional tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks,joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler. C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D. Vacuum clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet Installation Standard. C. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. D. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. E. Lay carpet tile in square pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set parallel to building lines. F. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. G. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate. H. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions. I. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 68 13 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 84 00 ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS SECTION 09 84 00 ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabric-covered fiberglass core panels and mounting accessories AWP-1. B. Fabric-covered fiberglass high-impact core panels AWP-2. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. ASTM E795 - Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorp4 on Tests. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed data sheets for products specified. B. Shop Drawings: Fabrication and installation details, panel layout, and fabric orientation. C. Verification Samples: Fabricated samples of each type of panel specified; 12 x 12 in, showing construction, edge details, and fabric covering. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company with not less than 5 years of experience in manufacturing acoustical products similar to those specified. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect acoustical panels from moisture during shipment, storage, and handling. Deliver in factory-wrapped bundles; do not open bundles until panels are needed for installation. B. Store panels flat, in dry, well-ventilated space; do not stand panels on end. C. Protect panel edges from damage. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of acoustical wall panels that fail in performance, materials, or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures in materials include, but are not limited to, fabric sagging, distorting, or releasing from panel edge; or warping of core. 2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acoustical Panels: 1. CDC Corporation: www.conweddesignscape.com. 2. Decoustics: www.decoustics.com. 3. Jasco, Inc.: www.jasco-usa.com. 4. Kinetics Noise Control: www.kineticsnoise.com. 5. Lamvin, Inc.: www.lamvin.com. 6. Wall Technology: www.walltechnology.com. 7. Provide all acoustical panels by one manufact.urer. B. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS A. Panels: Prefinished, factory assembled fabric-covered panels. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 84 00 - 1 Printed 2/2212013 SECTION 09 84 00 ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less and smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. B. Fiberglass Core Panels AWP-1: 1. Products: a. Respond ACT manufactured by Conwed. b. Acoustical Panel AP manufactured by Decoustics. c. Quiet Touch manufactured by Jasco. d. Hardside manufactured by Kinetics. e. Sonic Series manufactured by Lamvin. f. A100 Series Acoustical Panels manufactured by Wall Technology. 2. Density: 7-10 lb/cu ft. 3. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): 0.80-0.90 when tested in accordance with ASTM C423 for Type A mounting, per ASTM E 795. 4. Panel Width: As detailed. 5. Panel Height: As detailed. 6. Panel Thickness: 2 inch. 7. Edges: Perimeter edges reinforced by a formulated resin hardener. 8. Corners: Square. 9. Mounting: Back mounting. 10. Finish: Seamless fabric facing material, for bonded covering of core material with all edges wrapped to back. C. Fiberglass High Impact Core Panels AWP-2: 1. Provide similar panel to AWP-1, except include a perforated co-polymer plastic with 1/8-inch holes on 3/16-inch centers with 40 percent open area installed over acoustical core. 2. Products: a. Respond High Impact manufactured by Conwed. b. High Impact Resistant/Tackable as manufactured by Decoustics. c. Quiet Touch Extra manufacturer by Jasco. d. High Impact Hardside manufactured by Kinetics. e. Tackable High-Impact Panel manufactured by Lamvin. f. IR 108 Series manufactured by Wall Technology. 3. Density: 6 to 7 lb/cu ft. 4. Noise Reduction Cc. 'fficient (NRC): 1 to 1.10 when tested in accordance with ASTM C423. 5. Panel Width: As detailed. 6. Panel Height: As detailed. 7. Panel Thickness: 2 inches. 8. Edges: Perimeter edges reinforced by a formulated resin hardener. 9. Corners: Square. 10. Finish: Seamless fabric facing material, for bonded covering of core material with all edges wrapped to back. D. Fabric Covering: Seamless fabric facing material, for stretched or bonded covering of core material. 1. Fabric: Product: Tek-Wall Parable as manufactured by Maharam.. 2. Color: As specified in Section 09 00 01 - Finish Legend.. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate panels to sizes and configurations indicated, with fabric facing installed without sagging, wrinkles, blisters, or visible seams. B. Tolerances: Fabricate to finished tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 in for thickness, overall length and width, and squareness from corner to corner. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 84 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 84 00 ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Back-Mounting Accessories for AWP-1 and AWP-2: Manufacturer's standard accessories for concealed support, designed to allow panel removal by one of the following methods: 1. Two-part clip and base-support bracket system; brackets designed to support full weight of panels and clips designed for lateral support, with one part mechanically attached to back of panel and the other attached to substrate. 2. Metal impaling clips designed to support full weight of panels, mechanically attached to substrate and adhesively bonded to back of panels. 3. Hook and loop strips adhered to substrate and to back of panels. 4. Z-clip hanger and magnet system with magnets recessed into panel frame and designed to engage steel mounting plates secured to substrate with screws. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for conditions detrimental to installation of acoustical panels. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical panels in locations indicated, following installation recommendations of panel manufacturer. Align panels accurately, with edges plumb and top edges level. Scribe to fit accurately at adjoining work and penetrations. B. Install panels to construction tolerances of plus or minus 1/16 in for the following: 1. Plumb and level. 2. Flatness. 3. Width of joints. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean fabric facing upon completion of installation from dust and other foreign materials, following manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove surplus materials, trimmed portions of panels, and debris resulting from installation. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Provide protection of installed acoustical panels until completion of the work. B. Replace panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired to satisfaction of the Architect. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 84 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation and the application of paint systems indicated as "P" (Paint) on the following substrates: 1. Concrete. 2. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 3. Steel. 4. Galvanized metal. 5. Wood. 6. Previously finish wood. 7. Gypsum board. B. Paint all exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, Architect will select from colors and finishes scheduled for other areas of the project. Painting includes the following: 1. Field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish. 2. Painting of game line and marker paint lines is Work of other Sections. 3. Painting and finishing of all exposed to view elevator equipment and components such as doors and door frames unless prefinished. C. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished. 2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. 5. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, and lead items. 6. Floors, unless specifically so indicated. 7. Ceramic and other tiles. 8. Brick. 9. Glass. 10. Acoustical materials, unless specifically so indicated. 11. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items. B. Section 09 00 01 - Finish Legend. C. Section 09 96 00 - High-Performance Coatings. D. Section 09 96 53 - Elastomeric Coatings: Coating for tilt-up concrete and concrete masonry. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section. B. Paint Gloss and Sheen: Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with the following MPI values: Gloss Level Description Units © 60 Degrees Units @ 85 Degrees G1 Matte or Flat Finish 0 to 5 10 maximum G2 Velvet Finish 0 to 10 10 to 35 Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 90 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING G3 Eggshell Finish 10 to 25 10 to 35 G4 Satin Finish 20 to 35 35 minimum G5 Semi-Gloss Finish 35 to 70 G6 Gloss Finish 70 to 85 G7 High-Gloss Finish .85 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications. C. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Include printed statement of VOC content and chemical components. B. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, provide three 8-inch by 10-inch color drawdowns with texture to simulate actual conditions, and representing color and sheen. C. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures and substrate conditions requiring special attention. E. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces. 1. At project completion, provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, paint type and color coding for all colors used for Owner's later use in maintenance. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Paint and Coatings: 1 gallon of each color; store where directed. All extra stock containers are to be new and unopened. 2. Label each container with color, type, room locations, and sheen in addition to the manufacturer's label. 1.06 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all relevant installers. Agenda items will include field conditions, substrate conditions, coordination of shop applied primers with finish coatings, application methods, and field quality control testing and inspection, schedule of painting applications and notifications to Owner of start of painting operations. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: 1. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" and paint manufacturer's recommendations for products and paint systems indicated. B. Surface Preparation: Obtain written confirmation of the specific surface preparation procedures and primers used for all fabricated steel items from the fabricator(s)to ascertain appropriate and manufacturer compatible finish coat materials to be used before painting any such work. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum three years documented experience. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 90 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 1.08 MOCK-UP A. Interior s�Mockups Apply der"�r�trat�aeg er felin7,benchmark sa PAINTING ANON 09 sp each pain will select of effects and sselections smade u paint CHAT/NG 2 b- O all an theta ec s ands 9uality st de under system;n Apply ben r It sea/q t n aaceS to represent surface°r nd eond bm or an and each co/or and B a- pf a el m nary CO pl es io er perman nt lightin r are at sl required. t 100 sq. h. application of Integrated. Fi additional colors r selections will be b 9 and other environmental 1.09 indicated Exterior ors se% Ons are based°n not ADE�t�ERy, STORAGE, of d itional olor sel e tS d byArchit Architect approved,benchmark samples. Services have B. Deliver producRA pE�AND HANDLING surfaces included n in dried codatQ additional benchmark anode' coverage, tncluted in seated and tG integrated exterior mockups samples C instructions e manufacturer's °ckups as Su abeie Paint ns for mixing prepay d containers; . 1 1U degree Materials: Store ng and reducing.preparation, drying type s, inspect to '4. Et°:No1TIttedru9 cleanupabnd namcceptabilityrD 9eeppl, ma eriat and as requiretemperature manufacturer's of requirements, cal�°rt bey brand Sub t e required by the when arQrtace and Y rnanufactu e5 degrees p and a maximum designation, and C. D° tea, moisture recommended product manufacturer. temperatures cti°nh r of not ure in a ambient 90 app/ substrates, procedures D. humidity ranges Y exterior are outside the temperature PART E Provide between 5p and 95 deg ep temperature product manufacturer.nosy °r when mitati alts, including e 2.01 MANUFACTURERS PRODUCTS tang eve/° p ure of surface relative humidity ng testing of A. p ft candles measured be painted and ambient Y is outside the B- Products:nu facture paint no exceptions. coatis mid-height at Substrate air temperatures are C Manufacturers'PrDVi ceptiong products used i surface. Provide e of 1. an Ca tune s names shoed products lase n any individual oysters 2 boline from the s es ar erred din P 3 Coronado Company e used in versions art 2. same 4 Glidden rPaint f (Coronado)line�an 2: (shown in parentheses)of the following Mill 8 Benjamin ib o°off&�(Kelly). Paints)/Devoe High 9. R rid Industries,°nc USA(Parker). Performance Coatings EB`2 p'�o,s Paint�C/over(PPG).ee in key)- g nnred 3 t Co. (Rodda). �2yiot� Westside Christian Addition/Re odel school 09 90 00 3 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING 10. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W). 11. Tnemec Co., Inc. (Tnemec). D. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS -GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating. 1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 3. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run. 4. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions. B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. 1) Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2) Nonflat Paints, Coatings are not included, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 3) Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L. 4) Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 5) Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 6) Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 7) Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. 8) Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 9) Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited: 1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride. D. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics. E. Colors: As indicated in Section 09 00 01 - Finish Legend. 1. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed by Architect. 2. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under, unless otherwise indicated. 3. In utility areas, finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in colors according to the color coding scheme indicated. 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS -INTERIOR A. Concrete: Provide the following paint systems over interior concrete surfaces: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. Project No 11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 90 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING a. Primer: Alkali-resistant, acrylic-latex, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. 1) Coronado: Elastite 100% Acrylic Masonry Sealer 48-11. 2) GP: High Hide 1000 Acrylic Primer/Sealer. 3) Kelly: 95-100 Pre-Cote Wallboard & Masonry Primer/Sealer. 4) Miller: 6040 Kril Primer. 5) Moore: Fresh Start 100%Acrylic Primer N023 6) Parker: Flex Lox C251 Acrylic-Epoxy High pH Masonry Primer/Sealer. 7) PPG: Perma-Crete Alkali-Resistant Primer 4-603. 8) Rodda: Surfbond II Acrylic Primer 501801. 9) S-W: Contractors Interior Latex Primer B28WF0162. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. 1) Coronado: SuperKote 5000 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel 32 Line 2) GP: Ultra Hide 1416 S.G. Acrylic Enamel. 3) Kelly: 1050 KM Professional Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel. 4) Miller: 4580 Premium Semi-Gloss. 5) Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Semi-Gloss N539 6) Parker: UltraTech C119 Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 7) PPG: 6-500 Speedhide Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss EnameI. 8) Rodda: Unique II Exterior/interior Semi-Gloss 542001. 9) S-W: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss B31 Series. B. Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry block units: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a block filler. a. Block Filler: High-performance, latex-based, block filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 5.0 mils. 1) Coronado Super Kote 5000 Production Block Filler 958-11 2) GP: Devoe Bloxfil 4000-1000 H.D. Acrylic Block Filler. 3) Kelly: 521 Fill & Prime Acrylic Block Filler. 4) Miller: 6015 Interior Block Filler. 5) Moore: Super Spec Masonry Block Filler 160. 6) Parker: UltraTech C302 Int./Ext. 100% Acrylic Block Filler. 7) PPG: 6-7 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Masonry Latex Block Filler. 8) Rodda: Sprayable Block Filler 50901. 9) S-W: S-W PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25 (43 g/L). b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. 1) Coronado: SuperKote 5000 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel 32 Line 2) GP: Ultra Hide 1416 S.G. Acrylic Enamel. 3) Kelly: 1050 KM Professional Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel. 4) Miller: 4580 Premium Semi-Gloss. 5) Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Semi-Gloss. 6) Parker: UltraTech C119 Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 7) PPG: 6-500 Speedhide Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 8) Rodda: Unique II Exterior/Interior Semi-Gloss Acrylic 542001. 9) S-W: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss B31 Series. C. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Eggshell, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 90 00 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING a. Primer: Latex-based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 1) Coronado: SuperKote 5000 Latex Primer Sealer 40-11 2) GP: High Hide 1000 Acrylic Primer Sealer. 3) Kelly: 95-100 Pre-Cote Wallboard & Masonry Primer/Sealer. 4) Miller: 6020 Premium H.B. PVA. 5) Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Primer N534. 6) Parker: UltraTech C152 Latex Primer/Sealer. 7) PPG: 6-2 Speedhide Interior Latex Primer Sealer. 8) Rodda: Heavy Body Scotseal 507801. 9) S-W: Contractors Interior Latex Primer B28WF0162. b. First and Second Coats: Eggshell or satin, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.8 mils. 1) Coronado: SuperKote 5000 Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel 30 Line 2) GP: Ultra Hide 1412 Acrylic Eggshell Enamel. 3) Kelly: 1010 KM Professional Interior Acrylic Eggshell Enamel. 4) Miller: 4480 Premium Satin or 3880 Premium Eggshell. 5) Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Low Sheen N536. 6) Parker: UltraTech C106 Latex Eggshell Enamel. 7) PPG: 6-411 Speedhide Latex Eggshell Enamel. 8) Rodda: Lasyn Int. Latex Eggshell Enamel 533001. 9) S-W: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel B20 Series. D. Woodwork and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over interior wood surfaces: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a wood undercoater. a. Undercoat: Alkyd- or acrylic-latex-based, interior wood undercoater, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 1) Coronado: Grip & Seal Acrylic Latex Primer 116-11 2) GP: 3210 Gripper Multi-Purpose Primer. 3) Kelly: Sierra Performance S30 Griptec Sandable Primer. 4) Miller: 2840 Acrylic Enamel Undercoat. 5) Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Primer N534 6) Parker: UltraTech C312 Int./Ext 100% Acrylic Wood Primer. 7) PPG: 17-951 Seal Grip Interior Primer/Finish. 8) Rodda: Unique II 100% Acrylic Enamel Undercoater 502001. 9) S-W: PrepRite Multi-Purpose Latex Primer B51W8020. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. 1) Coronado: SuperKote 5000 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel 32 Line 2) GP: Ultra Hide 1416 Interior Semi-Gloss. 3) Kelly: 1685 Dura-Poxy+100%Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel. 4) Miller: 7200 Semi-Gloss Acrinamel. 5) Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Semi-Gloss N539. 6) Parker: UltraTech C119 Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 7) PPG: 6-500 Speedhide Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 8) Rodda: Unique II Exterior/Interior Semi-Gloss Enamel 542001. 9) S-W: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66 Series. E. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: One finish coat over an enamel undercoater and a primer. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 90 00 -6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING a. Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd- or acrylic-based or epoxy-metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 1) Coronado: Corotech Acrylic Metal Primer V110. 2) Devoe: Devflex 4020 DTM Primer Finish. 3) Kelly: 1725 Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Metal Primer. 4) Miller: 5000 Acrimetal Primer/Finish. 5) Moore: PO4 Acrylic Metal Primer. 6) Parker: UltraTech C309 Universal Water-Based Metal Primer. 7) PPG: 90-912 Series Pitt-Tech Plus DTM Industrial Primer. 8) Rodda: Metal Master Primer 508901. 9) S-W: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer B66. b. Undercoat: Alkyd, interior enamel undercoat or semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 1) Coronado: SuperKote 5000 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel 32 Line. 2) GP: 1416 Ultra Hide Semi-Gloss. 3) Kelly: 1725 Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Metal Primer. 4) Miller: 7200 Semi-Gloss Acrinamel. 5) Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Semi-Gloss N539. 6) Parker: UltraTech C119 Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 7) PPG: 6-500 Speedhide Interior Semi-Gloss Latex Enamel. 8) Rodda: Unique II Exterior/Interior Semi-Gloss 542001. 9) S-W: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer B66. c. Finish Coat: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 1) Coronado: SuperKote 5000 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel 32 Line. 2) GP: 1416 Ultra Hide Semi-Gloss. 3) Kelly: 1685 Dura-Poxy+100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel. 4) Miller: 7200 Semi-Gloss Acrinamel. 5) Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Semi-Gloss N539. 6) Parker: UltraTech C119 Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 7) PPG: 6-500 Speedhide Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 8) Rodda: Unique II Exterior/Interior Semi-Gloss 542001. 9) S-W: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66 Series. F. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over zinc-coated metal: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 1) Coronado: Corotech Acrylic Metal Primer V110. 2) Devoe: Devflex 4020 DTM Primer Finish. 3) Kelly: 1725 Acry-Shield 100%Acrylic Metal Primer. 4) Miller: 5000 Acrimetal Primer/Finish. 5) Moore: PO4 Acrylic Metal Primer. 6) Parker: UltraTech C309 Universal Water-Based Metal Primer. 7) PPG: 90-912 Series Pitt-Tech Plus DTM Industrial Primer. 8) Rodda: Metal Master Primer 508901. 9) S-W: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer B66. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 90 00 - 7 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING 1) Coronado: SuperKote 5000 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel 32 Line. 2) GP: 1416 Ultra Hide Semi Gloss. 3) Kelly: 1520 Enviro-Cote Interior Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel. 4) Miller: 7200 Semi-Gloss Acrinamel. 5) Moore: Ultra Spec 500 Semi-Gloss N539. 6) Parker: UltraTech C119 Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 7) PPG: 6-500 Speedhide Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel. 8) Rodda: Unique II Exterior/Interior Semi-Gloss 542001. 9) S-W: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66 Series. 2. Flat Acrylic Dry Fall Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended primer. b. Top Coats: 2 coats of acrylic dry fall coating. 1) Coronado: SuperKote 5000 Latex Dry Fall Flat 110 Line. 2) GP: 1280 Waterborne Dryfall Flat Primer and Finish. 3) 480 DRY FOG II Flat Latex Maintenance Finish. 4) Miller: Aqua Fall#624. 5) Moore: Sweep-Up Spray Latex Flat 153. 6) Parker: UltraTech C157 Latex Dry Fall Flat. 7) PPG: Speedhide Interior Super Tech WB Acrylic Flat Dry Fog 6-725X1. 8) Rodda: Water Base Dry Fog Coating 513801x. 9) S-W: Low VOC Waterborne Dryfall (B42W81). 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Latex filler. C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished, with Applicator present, prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Concrete and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application. C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. D. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 90 00 - 8 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING E. Remove surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. 1. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. F. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. G. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. H. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. I. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove curing compounds, dirt, !Dose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. 1. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. J. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. K. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. L. Corroded Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Prepare using at least SSPC-PC 2 (hand tool cleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (power tool cleaning)followed by SSPC-SP 1 (solvent cleaning). M. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or power tool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs. N. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Remove loose primer and rust using cleaning methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Prime bare steel surfaces. Comply with methods that comply with SSPCs recommendations. 1. Prepare interior surfaces as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning." 2. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning," unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. 3. Level of surface preparation specified is a minimum. If the coating manufacturer requires a higher degree of preparation, comply with the coating manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. O. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides and backsides of wood. P. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 90 00 - 9 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING 2. If spray equipment is utilized, a spray/backroll application is considered one coat of paint. 3. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 4. Continue paint finish behind all wall-mounted items. 5. Apply block filler to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled (pinhole free). B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. C. Paint access doors, prime coated hardware, exposed piping and electrical panels to match adjacent surfaces in color, texture and sheen, unless otherwise noted or where pre-finished. 1. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. D. When the color of a door frame changes from side to side, the change shall be made at the edge of the stop, where the transition is not visible when the door is in a closed position. E. Back-prime and paint plywood service panels such as electrical, telephone and cable vision panels, as applicable, including edges, to match painted wall it is mounted on or flat gray where mounted on unpainted wall. F. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. G. Paint the inside of all ductwork behind louvers, grilles and diffusers for a minimum of 18 inches or beyond sightline, whichever is greater, using flat black (non-reflecting) paint. H. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. J. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. K. Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as many coats as necessary for complete hide. L. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. M. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. N. Painting Mechanical, Plumbing, Fire Protection and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in interior occupied spaces and equipment rooms and where exposed to view in all exterior areas including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical, Plumbing and Fire Protection Work: a. Uninsulated metal piping. Protect sprinkler heads. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. f. Ductwork, hangers and supports. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. h. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 2. Electrical Work: a. Switchgear. b. Panelboards. c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. d. Conduit and hangers. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 90 00 - 10 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING 3. In unfinished areas, leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment in original finish and touch up scratches and marks. 4. Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as supplied by manufacturer of equipment. 5. Do not paint over nameplates. 6. Color and texture to match adjacent surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. O. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Painted surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness if any of the following defects are apparent to Architect. 1. Brush/roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding or shadowing by inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, or foreign materials in paint coatings. 2. Evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices, pockets, corners, reentrant angles or similar conditions. 3. Damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other contributory cause. 4. Damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection from the weather. 5. Damage and/or contamination of paint due to blown contaminants (dust, spray paint, etc.). B. Painted surfaces shall be considered unacceptable if any of the following are evident under natural lighting source for exterior surfaces: 1. Visible defects are evident on vertical or horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles from a distance of not less than 39 inches. 2. Visible defects are evident on ceilings, soffits and other overhead surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles. 3. When the final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of color, sheen texture and hiding across full surface area. 4. Dry mil thicknesses do not meet manufacturer's recommended thickness or specified thickness. C. Owner will provide field inspection and testing. 1. Painted surfaces will be tested for dry mil thickness for each coat. 2. Shop primers and painted surfaces will be tested for adhesion. 3. Surfaces will be tested at frequency discussed in the preinstallation conference and as deemed appropriate by Owner. 3.05 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project. 3.07 SCHEDULE - INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Concrete - Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish. B. Concrete Masonry Units - Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 90 00 - 11 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND COATING C. Gypsum Board - Eggshell Acrylic Finish: 1. Provide primer without finish coats at areas indicated to receive wall coverings, fixed equipment, cabinetry, markerboards, tackboards and similar fixed items. D. Woodwork and Hardboard - Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 1. Wood doors indicated to receive opaque finish. E. Ferrous Metal - Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 1. Steel joists exposed to view. 2. Steel floor deck exposed to view. 3. Steel framing and countertop supports. 4. Access doors, color to match adjacent wall surfaces. F. Steel Doors and Frames: Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish G. Zinc-Coated Metal - Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 1. Access doors, color to match adjacent wall surfaces. H. Zinc-Coated Metal - Flat Acrylic Dry Fall Finish: 1. Ceiling areas, exposed ductwork, exposed trusses, exposed roof deck, exposed piping (protect fire sprinkler heads from paint). END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 90 00 - 12 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. High performance coatings for the following conditions: 1. Exterior Substrates: a. Steel. b. Galvanized steel. B. Special preparation of surfaces. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. B. Section 05 31 00 - Steel Decking: Shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. C. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. D. Section 09 00 01 - Finish Legend. E. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating. F. Section 09 96 53- Elastomeric Coatings: Exterior concrete and concrete masonry. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. B. ASTM D3359 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test; 2009e2. C. SSPC-PA 2 - Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages. D. SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings. E. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; Society for Protective Coatings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data indicating coating materials . B. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of finish coat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on shop primed and galvanized steel, 8 inches square. C. Product List: For each product indicated. Cross-reference products to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. D. Samples: Submit two samples 8 by 8 inch in size illustrating colors for selection. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and surface preparation requirements. F. Maintenance Data: Include cleaning procedures and repair and patching techniques. 1. At project completion, provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, coating type and color coding for all colors used for Owner's later use in maintenance. G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Coating Materials: 1 gallon of each type and color. All extra stock containers are to be new and unopened. 2. Label each container with manufacturer's name, product number, color number, and room names and numbers where used. Protect No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 96 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 1.05 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all relevant installers. Agenda items will include field conditions, substrate conditions, coordination of shop applied primers with finish coatings, application methods, and field quality control testing and inspection. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Master Painters Institute (MPI) Standards: 1. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and coating systems indicated. B. Surface Preparation: Obtain written confirmation of the specific surface preparation procedures and primers used for all fabricated steel items from the fabricator(s)to ascertain appropriate and manufacturer compatible finish coat materials to be used before painting any such work. C. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA 2 for measurement of coating thickness. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating and substrate. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. B. Locate where directed. C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install materials when temperature is below 55 degrees F or above 90 degrees F. B. Maintain this temperature range, 24 hours before, during, arid 72 hours after installation of coating. C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. D. Restrict traffic from area where coating is being applied or is curing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Provide one of the products listed in Part 2. B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses)of the following manufacturers' names are used in Part 2: 1. Carboline Company(Carboline) 2. ICI Devoe (Devoe). 3. Kelly-Moore Paints (Kelly). 4. Miller Paint Co. (Miller). 5. Benjamin Moore &Co. (Moore). 6. Parker Paint/Comex USA (Parker). 7. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG). 8. Rodda Paint/Cloverdale Paint Co. (Rodda). 9. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S-W). 10. Tnemec Company, Inc. (Tnemec). C. Substitutions: Not permitted. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 96 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 2.02 MATERIALS A. Coatings - General: Provide complete multi-coat systems formulated and recommended by manufacturer for the applications indicated, in the thicknesses indicated. 1. For shop primed items, omit specified primer if shop primer is compatible with finish coats and in good condition as determined by finish coating manufacturer. B. Material Compatibility: Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited at interior applications: 1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride. E. Colors: As indicated in Section 09 00 01 - Finish Legend. 2.03 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on appropriately shop-primed items. 1. Semigloss, Two-Component, Pigmented Aliphatic Acrylic, Polyurethane: One finish coat, over intermediate coat and metal primer with total dry film thickness not less than 6.5 mils, unless noted otherwise. a. Prime: Manufacturer's recommended metal primer. 1) Carboline: Carbozinc 859. 2) Devoe: 302H Catha-Coat Reinforced Zinc Primer. 3) Kelly: K-M 15 Chemical Mastic High Build Epoxy. 4) Moore: M18 Epoxy Zinc Rich Primer. 5) Parker: Comex Industrial ZR-20 Inorganic Zinc-Rich Primer. 6) PPG: 95-242/249 Pitt-Guard Rapid Coat D-T-R Primer or 97-699 Durethane MCZ. 7) Rodda: ClovaZinc 3 Organic Zinc Rich Primer 83003. 8) S-W: Zinc Clad II Ethyl Silicate HS B69V3 3.0-6.0 mils. 9) Tnemec: Series 394 PerimePrime at 2.5 to 3.5 mils. b. Intermediate Coat: 1) Carboline: Carboguard 890 High Build Epoxy. 2) Devoe: 224HS Devran High Solids Epoxy. 3) Kelly: K-M 15 Chemical Mastic High Build Epoxy. 4) Moore: Waterborne Urethane Semi-Gloss (P77). 5) Parker: Comex Industrial E-10 High Solids Epoxy Coating. 6) PPG: 97-130 Series Aquapon High Build Semi-Gloss Epoxy. 7) Rodda: Clovaguard High Build Epoxy 8310 Series. 8) S-W: Recoatable Epoxy Primer B67 4.0-6.0 mils. 9) Tnemec: Series 27 Typoxy WB at 3 to 5 mils. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 96 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 T / p N 09 96/1/G4-PERFORMANCE-CCA T ING 4) One over 3)3) S c. Finish Coat:1) Carbollne. ghane 133 at 3 to 4 mils.2) Devoe: 3 78� ave Aliphatic Urethane Semi,G/oss Enamel.Kelly K M 375 High Build Gloss Polyurethane Enamel.a°pre: Waterborn Uret ne Semi_ lss(P 5) Parker: Com 2 Industrial U 10 High So ds Pol urethane Gloss. 6) 95,81eries Pittha ne Ultra Gl oss Fna in .� Rodda. Cloverdale Armo Shield Aliphatic Urethane.S-W' Hi-Solids 'olyure h ane Semi Gloss B65 3 4 mils.9) T neme : Series 5 0 Endur a'Shiel at 2 to 3 mils.d" T� oats. Man ufa rs recommended clear topcoat, it any, as required tO assure coO a °f final coating system. B. ZinC_Coat ed Met at Provide the following finish systems ov er exterior coat ed(gai.ani Ze q)metal surfaces: 1. Two-Component, Pigmented/Aliphatic Ac f lc. POlyuretha ve. n ash coat te cand metaw ith total d y r thi ckness not le tha 6.5 otherwise.a. Prime: Manufacturer's recommended meta/priner arboli Ga/o wB at 0 5 to 1.0 C evoe: HS Ue Epoxy Coating. l oKM15 emical Mastic High Epoxy.) Moo . - e Ol Meta/Prime er i 33 5paer" 4 X IndustriaE-10 High Solids Epoxy Coati r .6) pG 9 .1P Series Pitt-Guard D-T-R s Yanide Epo g) Rogda. Clo van 21 Epoxy Primer 83021.S,W D rra Plate 235 yulti,pur se EPox Primer(High Soli ds).g� Tne mec S ies 27 Typo y WB at 2 t0 2 5 Mils.b. Intermediate Coat: 1) C arboline, h ireq 2 Devoe: 3 g LeAliphatic Urethane SeOSS Enamel.ly M 15 Chemi tMastic Build Epoxy Urehae Semi-G! (P77)5) Parke . Comex U-10 High Soii ds Pols etPPG_ 95-8800 Series Pitthane High Build Polyurethane Gloss.C/ovaG and Nigh Build Epoxy Series.S IN: Pol urethS Glos B65 3-4 mils.9) nemec: None requc' Fi ) a live. Carbotha ne 133 GC t 3 to¢ mil s"2 Devoe: 3 78 De with ane Aliphatic Urethane semi G/oss Enamel Kelly: K M 375 High Build Gloss P /urethane ethane/. "4) Moore; WaterborneUrethane semi-Gloss Com 8 t ndustrial 10 High Solids POIYur �ane Gloss. 6) PPG: 95,8p0 ' e Hi i h Build Se mGloss Vrehate.? ROdda: Cloverdale Armour Shield Aliphatic Urethane.8) S W: Hi-Solids Polyurethane Sem Semi-Gloss 865 3 mils.g) nemec. c Brien 750 Endure-Shield at 2 to 2.5 mils.q. Topcoats: Manufacturer's recommended t°pc ' any as required to assure off t coating sS1) Q oe: hevthane 379 Clear S-W DiernondClad Clear g5T 705 1 to 2 mils.roject Nn „o,s Westside Christian o'e/School FB 2013 Aq ditionver 09 96 00 4 Pent ed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the coating manufacturer. Obtain and follow manufacturer's instructions for examination and testing of substrates. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating. 1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers skilled in the trades involved. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce coating systems indicated. 2. At exterior steel, provide surface preparation equivalent to SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning." D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. 1. Prepare interior surfaces as recommended by coating system manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning." 2. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by coating system manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP 6"Commercial Blast Cleaning," unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. 3. Level of surface preparation specified is a minimum. If the coating manufacturer requires a higher degree of preparation, comply with the coating manufacturer's recommendations. E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied coatings. F. Remove finish hardware, fixture covers, and accessories and store. G. Protect adjacent surfaces and materials not receiving coating from spatter and overspray; mask if necessary to provide adequate protection. Repair damage. 3.03 PRIMING A. Apply primer to unprimed surfaces, unless specifically not required by coating manufacturer. Apply in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 COATING APPLICATION A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, to thicknesses specified. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. B. Apply in uniform thickness coats, without runs, drips, pinholes, brush marks, or variations in color, texture, or finish. Finish edges, crevices, corners, and other changes in dimension with full coating thickness. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color and appearance. D. When the color of a door frame changes frc-i side to side, the change shall be made at the edge of the stop, where the transition is not visible when the door is in a closed position. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 96 00 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Painted surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness if any of the following defects are apparent to Architect. 1. Brush/roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding or shadowing by inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, or foreign materials in paint coatings. 2. Evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices, pockets, corners, reentrant angles or similar conditions. 3. Damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other contributory cause. 4. Damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection from the weather. 5. Damage and/or contamination of paint due to blown contaminants (dust, spray paint, etc.). B. Painted surfaces shall be considered unacceptable if any of the following are evident under natural lighting source for exterior surfaces: 1. Visible defects are evident on vertical or horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles from a distance of not less than 39 inches. 2. Visible defects are evident on ceilings, soffits and other overhead surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles. 3. When the final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of color, sheen texture and hiding across full surface area. 4. Dry mil thicknesses do not meet manufacturer's recommended thickness or specified thickness. 5. Lack of adhesion. Test surfaces indicating lack of adhesion in accordance with ASTM D3359 or as recommended by coating manufacturer. 3.06 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. B. Clean surfaces immediately of overspray, splatter, and excess material. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. After coating has cured, clean and replace finish hardware, fixtures, and fittings previously removed. E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect finished work from damage. 3.08 EXTERIOR SCHEDULE A. Steel: Semigloss, Two-Component, Pigmented Aliphatic Acrylic, Polyurethane: 1. Canopy framing. 2. Architecturally exposed structural steel framing. 3. Exposed steel deck. 4. Exposed steel joists. 5. Steel bollards. 6. Steel lintels. 7. Pipe downspouts. 8. Steel handrails and guardrails. 9. Enclosure gates. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 96 00 - 6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 96 53 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS SECTION 09 96 53 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation and application of elastomeric coatings, indicated as EC on drawings and schedules, to exterior concrete and concrete unit masonry surfaces. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Paint systems indicated as P-X on Drawings and schedules. B. Section 09 96 00 - High-Performance Coatings: Coating systems indicated as HPC-X on Drawings and schedules. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D522 - Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings. B. ASTM D1653 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Organic Coating Films. C. ASTM D2370 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Organic Coatings. D. ASTM G155 - Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials. E. PDCA (MAN) -Architectural Specification Manual. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric coating systems with the following properties as determined by test methods indicated: 1. Elongation: Not less than 100 percent with a tensile strength of 200 psi and not less than 88 percent recovery after 1 hour and 90 percent recovery after 24 hours when tested according to ASTM D2370 using parameters established by MPI 113. 2. Accelerated Weathering: No cracking, peeling, blistering, chalking, or visual deterioration after 1000 hours when tested according to procedures in ASTM G155. 3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: No crack formation when tested according to ASTM D522. 4. Moisture-Vapor Transmission: Not less than 5.0 perms according to ASTM D1653. 5. Wind-Driven Rain Resistance: No water penetration according to procedures in FS TT-C-555. 6. Minimum Solids Content by Volume: Not less than 45 percent. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each elastomeric coating system specified. Include crack fillers, and primers. 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Technical information including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. 3. Certification by elastomeric coating manufacturer that products supplied comply with local VOC regulations. B. Selection Samples: For each type of finish-coat material indicated. 1. After color selection, Architect will furnish color chips indicating colors selected. C. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, provide 8-inch by 10-inch color drawdowns representing color, texture and sheen. 1. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 96 53 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 96 53 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests by a qualified testing agency for each elastomeric coating material indicating compliance of elastomeric coatings with requirements based on comprehensive testing within the last five years of current product formulations. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying elastomeric coating systems similar in material and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain crack fillers, primers and other undercoat materials from same manufacturer as finish coats. C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide full-coat benchmark finish samples for each type of coating on each substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved sample submittals. 1. Architect will select one concrete and concrete unit masonry exterior wall surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of elastomeric coatings. a. Wall Surfaces: Prepare samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of wall surface. 2. Apply benchmark samples according to requirements for the completed Work. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. 3. Approved benchmark samples will be used to evaluate coating systems. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of benchmark samples before starting application of coatings. 5. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 3. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 4. Thinning instructions (if permitted). 5. Application instructions. 6. Color name and number. 7. Handling instructions and precautions. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect elastomeric coating materials from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's written instructions. B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified before starting or continuing coating operation. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Elastomeric Coating Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric coatings that fail within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, water penetration through the coating. B. Warranty Period for Elastomeric Coatings: Five year(s)from date of Substantial Completion. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 96 53 -2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 96 53 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra elastomeric coating materials from same production run as materials applied and in quantities described below. Package materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with 1 gal. of each color of elastomeric coating materials applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Provide one of the products indicated in the Coating Schedule in Part 3. B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses)of the following manufacturers' names are used in the Coating Schedule in Part 3: 1. Glidden Professional (GP) (formally ICI Dulux Paints). 2. Miller Paint (Miller). 3. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore). 4. Kelly-Moore Paint Company(Kelly). 5. Parker Paint (Parker). 6. PPG Industries, Inc.; Pittsburgh Paints (PPG). 7. Rodda Paint (Rodda). 8. Sherwin-Williams (S-W). 9. BASF Building Systems (Sonneborn). 10. BASF Building Systems (Thoro). 11. Tnemec Company, Inc. (Tnemec). 2.02 ELASTOMERIC COATING MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide crack fillers, block fillers, primers, elastomeric finish-coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality elastomeric coating materials that are factory formulated, comply with requirements in FS TT-C-555, and are recommended by manufacturer for the application indicated. Material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification are not acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance of proposed substitutions. C. Colors and Textures: Custom color to match EC color indicated on Section 09 00 01 - Finish Legend. 2.03 CRACK FILLERS A. Crack Fillers: Factory-formulated acrylic emulsion crack fillers compatible with substrate and finish-coat materials indicated, and that are recommended by the coating system manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for coating application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4 and this specification. 1. Correct conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work as outlined in "Preparation"Article. Notify the Architect in writing of anticipated problems using coatings specified. 2. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are thoroughly dry. 3. Start of coating application will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surface conditions. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 96 53 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 96 53 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Cover and protect adjacent finished surfaces. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, light fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating. 1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items removed, using workers skilled in trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying coatings or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coating systems according to manufacturer's written instructions for the particular substrate conditions and as specified. All surfaces to be coated shall be free of grease, efflorescence, mildew, excessive chalk, laitance, oil, release agents, other foreign materials or deteriorated coatings. 1. Schedule cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminants from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces. C. Completely pressure wash existing surfaces with high pressure, high temperature water cleaning method. Provide 2000 psi water pressure at the nozzle using a 27 degree to 45 degree fan tip. Exercise care and precautions to execute work without causing any damage to adjacent areas. Incorporate cleaning solutions as required to achieve satisfactory results. Remove all surface contamination and organic growth. D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to manufacturer's written instructions for particular substrate conditions and as specified. After application of primer, review areas for cracks not apparent prior to application. 1. Cementitious Surfaces: Prepare concrete and concrete unit masonry surfaces to receive elastomeric coatings. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, release agents, grease, oils, and similar impediments to good adhesion by water blasting followed by a clear water rinse. a. Remove mildew and neutralize surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions before patching materials are applied. b. Roughen as required to remove glaze. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by coating manufacturer. c. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve concrete curing, use mechanical methods for surface preparation. d. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be coated by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not apply coatings over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Crack Repair: Fill cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions before coating surfaces. 3. Deep Hairline Cracks: Remove dust and dirt from around cracks. Remove mildew by sterilizing before filling. Apply manufacturer's recommended primer to cracks before patching. If shrinkage occurs after applying crack filler, apply additional filler material to cracks before initial application of elastomeric coatings. a. Cracks up to 1/16 Inch: Clean surface around cracks. Apply crack filler primer penetrating cracks as deeply as possible, overflowing crack 2 inches on each side. When crack filler primer is dry, apply manufacturer's recommended sealant, forced well into cracks using a brush, putty knife, or trowel. Feather out to 0-inch thick and out 2-inches on either side of the crack as required for appearance. Allow for sealant shrinkage when applying. b. Cracks up to 3/8 Inch: Open cracks to 1/4 to 3/8 inch wide and 1/4 inch deep. Clean cracks and surrounding area removing dust, dirt, and other impurities. Apply crack filler primer recommended by manufacturer with a brush to obtain uniform coverage and spread approximately 2 inches on each side of cracks. Fill cracks with manufacturer's recommended crack filler applied with a putty knife or trowel, and Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 96 53 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 96 53 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS allow for shrinkage or with elastomeric sealant with bond breaker. Feather out as indicated for smaller cracks. If excessive shrinkage occurs, reapply crack filler. c. Notify the Architect when structural cracks are encountered for direction on how to proceed. d. To repair cracks resulting from structural movement or damage, remove previously applied sealant material and reseal with acrylic elastomeric sealant, followed by approved knife grade sealant to bridge cracks, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. E. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare materials according to coating manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying elastomeric coatings in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. If surface film forms, do not stir film into material. If necessary, remove film and strain coating material before using. 3. If manufacturer permits thinning, use only thinners recommended by manufacturer, and only within recommended limits. 3.03 APPLICATION A. General: Apply elastomeric coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Do not paint over conditions detrimental to formation of a durable coating film, such as dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, and scuffed surfaces. 2. Provide finish coats compatible with primers used. B. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Scheduling Coating: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Number of coats and film thickness required are same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. Provide additional coats as required until minimum dry film thickness has been achieved. 2. If undercoats or oth7-conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until coating film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 3. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until coating has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. D. Application Procedures: Apply elastomeric coatings by brush, roller, or spray according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for material being applied. 2. Rollers: Use professional-quality quick-release rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool covers with a 1-to 1-1/4-inch nap as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. A spray/backroll application is considered one coat. E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness as recommended by manufacturer, using as many coats as required to achieve the minimum dry film thickness. Protect No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 96 53 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 96 53 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS 1. Wherever spray application is used, apply each coat to provide equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats. Do not double back with spray equipment, building up film thickness of two coats in one pass. F. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. G. Prime Coats: If recommended by manufacturer, apply a primer to material being coated before applying finish coats. 1. Use brush and backrolling procedure during first coat of application. Work material well into all pitted areas. Do not overroll or extend the application of each roller application. Dress down lightly to be certain of a uniform coating with no heavy build-up at the end of the roller trail. H. Brush Application: Brush out and work brush coats into surfaces in an even film. Eliminate cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Neatly draw glass lines and color breaks. I. Roller Application: Keep cover wet at all times; do not dry roll. Work in sections. Lay on required amount of material, working material into grooves and rough areas; then level material, working it into surface. J. Spray Application: Use spray equipment for application only when permitted by manufacturer's written instructions and authorities having jurisdiction. K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Romove, refinish, or recoat work not complying with specified requirements. 3.04 INSPECTION A. Manufacturer's technical representative shall check coating system for compliance to dry film thickness, film continuity, adhesion, and moisture content of substrate and report discrepancies to the Architect. Applicator's paint distributor or supplier sales representative is not considered a technical representative. 1. If results show materials do not comply with requirements, the Contractor may be directed to stop work, remove noncomplying materials, pay for testing, recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials, or remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with specified materials, the 2 coatings are not compatible. B. Applicator shall be instructed in the use of, and possess a wet mil gauge to insure that proper mil thickness for the specified coating material is being obtained and maintained. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during coating operations: 1. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample coating material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by Owner: a. Elongation. b. Accelerated weathering. c. Low-temperature flexibility. d. Moisture-vapor transmission. e. Wind-driven rain resistance. f. Minimum solids content by volume. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop coating application if test results show materials being used do not comply with requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with specified materials, the two coatings are not compatible. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 96 53 -6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 96 53 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS 3.06 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. 1. After completing coating work, clean glass and spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods, being careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades from damage whether being coated or not. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating as approved by Architect. Leave in an undamaged condition. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing coating operations. 1. After construction activities of other trades are complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.08 COATING SCHEDULE A. Concrete: Provide the following elastomeric coating systems over exterior concrete surfaces: 1. Smooth Elastomeric Finish: One or 2 finish coats, as recommended by manufacturer, over primer, with additional coats as required to achieve the required dry film thickness. a. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated primer applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness as required to provide the specified warranty. 1) GP: 6001.Hydrosealer Exterior Primer. 2) Kelly: 247 Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Masonry Primer. 3) Miller: 6040 Kril Primer. 4) Moore: Moore's Acrylic Masonry Sealer#066. 5) Parker: 9145 Epo Tilt Alkali Resistant Primer 6) PPG: Perma-Crete Alkali-Resistant Primer 4-603 7) Rodda: Surfbond II Surface Conditioner 501801X. 8) Sonneborn: Chalky Surface Primer VOC if required by manufacturer. 9) S-W: Loxon Masonry Primer A24. 10) Parker: 9145 Epo Tilt Alkali Resistant Primer 11) Thoro: Thoro Primer 2K if required by manufacturer. 12) Tnemec: Elasto-Grip Series 151. b. First Coat: Smooth,factory-formulated, 100 percent acrylic elastomeric coating applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness as required to provide the specified warranty. 1) GP: 2260 Decra-Flex Elastomeric Coating. 2) Kelly: 1128 Kel-Seal Terpolymer 100%Acrylic Elastomeric Coating. 3) Miller: Milastic Elastomeric Coating #8800 Milastic. 4) Moore: Moorlastic Elastomeric Waterproof Coating#056. 5) Parker: 9905 100% Acrylic Elastomeric. 6) PPG: Perma-Crete Pitt-Flex Elastomeric Coating Smooth 4-110. 7) Rodda: Super Roflex Elastomeric Coating 501301. 8) Sonneborn: Flexcoat Waterproof Elastomeric Coating. 9) S-W: SherLastic A5-100. 10) Parker: 9905 100% Acrylic Elastomeric. 11) Thoro: Thorolastic Waterproof Elastomeric Coating. 12) Tnemec: Enviro-Crete Series 156. c. Second Coat: Smooth, factory-formulated, 100 percent acrylic elastomeric coating applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness as required to provide the specified warranty. 1) GP: 2260 Decra-Flex Elastomeric Coating. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 96 53 - 7 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 96 53 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS 2) Kelly: 1128 Kel-Seal Terpolymer 100%Acrylic Elastomeric Coating. 3) Miller: Milastic Elastomeric Coating #8800 Milastic. 4) Moore: Moorlastic Elastomeric Waterproof Coating#056. 5) Parker:. 9905 100%Acrylic Elastomeric. 6) PPG: Perma-Crete Pitt-Flex Elastomeric Coating Smooth 4-110. 7) Rodda: Super Roflex Elastomeric Coating 511301. 8) Sonneborn: Flexcoat Waterproof Elastomeric Coating. 9) S-W: SherLastic A5-100. 10) Parker: 9905 100% Acrylic Elastomeric. 11) Thoro: Thorolastic Waterproof Elastomeric Coating. 12) Tnemec: Enviro-Crete Series 156. B. Concrete Masonry: Provide the following elastomeric coating systems over exterior concrete masonry surfaces: 1. Smooth Elastomeric Finish: 2 finish coats over block filler, with additional coats as required to achieve the required dry film thickness. a. Block Filler: Manufacturer's recommended, factory-formulated, masonry block filler applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness as required to provide the specified warranty. 1) Devoe: Bloxfil 4000 H.D. 100% Acrylic Block Filler. 2) Kelly: 521 Acrylic Block Filler. 3) Miller: Exterior Block Filler Product#6015. 4) Moore: Moorcraft Super Craft Latex Block Filler 285. 5) Parker: 9135 Block Filler 6) PPG: 16-90 Pitt-Glaze Block Filler. 7) Rodda: Sprayable Smooth Block Filler 501901. 8) Sonneborn: 749 Block Filler. 9) S-W: Loxon Block Surfacer A24W200. 10) Parker: 9135 Block Filler 11) Thoro: Thoro Block Filler or Thoro Super Quick Seal Intermix. 12) Tnemec: 130 Enviro Fill Block Filler. b. First Coat: Smooth, factory-formulated, 100 percent acrylic elastomeric coating applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness as required to provide the specified warranty. 1) GP: 2260 Decra-Flex Elastomeric Coating. 2) Kelly: 1128 Kel-Seal Terpolymer 100% Acrylic Elastomeric Coating. 3) Miller: Milastic Elastomeric Coating #8800 Milastic. 4) Moore: Moorlastic Elastomeric Waterproof Coating#056. 5) Parker: 9905 100%Acrylic Elastomeric 6) PPG: Perma-Crete Pitt-Flex Elastomeric Coating Smooth 4-110. 7) Rodda: Super Roflex Elastomeric Coating 511301. 8) Sonneborn: Flexcoat Waterproof Elastomeric Coating. 9) S-W: SherLastic A5-100. 10) Parker: 9905 100% Acrylic Elastomeric. 11) Thoro: Thorolastic Waterproof Elastomeric Coating. 12) Tnemec: Enviro-Crete Series 156. c. Second Coat: Smooth, factory-formulated, 100 percent acrylic elastomeric coating applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness as required to provide the specified warranty. 1) GP: 2260 Decra-Flex Elastomeric Coating. 2) Kelly: 1128 Kel-Seal Terpolymer 100%Acrylic Elastomeric Coating. 3) Miller: Milastic Elastomeric Coating#8800. 4) Moore: Moorlastic Elastomeric Waterproof Coating. 5) Parker: 9905 100% Acrylic Elastomeric. 6) PPG: Perma-Crete Pitt-Flex Elastomeric Coating Smooth 4-110. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 96 53 - 8 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 09 96 53 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS 7) Rodda: Super Roflex Elastomeric Coating 511301X. 8) Sonneborn: Flexcoat Waterproof Elastomeric Coating. 9) S-W: SherLastic A5-100. 10) Parker: 9905 100%Acrylic Elastomeric. 11) Thoro: Thorolastic Waterproof Elastomeric Coating. 12) Tnemec: Enviro-Crete Series 156. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 09 96 53- 9 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 1 VISUqL DISPLAY B� gRDS SECT/ON 1 p 11 01 VISUDISPLAY g pgRDS P�T 1GE O 1.01 SECT/ N INC UDES q arke;Oad T ackbOards 1.02 ,E` TED REQUIRE MENTS A. Section 09 2 1 Gypsum Yps u Board g s s e nh/ie s. h e a l e d supports in m et a l s tud walls. B. Og 72 00 Wall Coverings: Wall covering or ack 1,03 PE ENCE STNDARps A. q 14 American for Basi c Hardboard.. AST g24 Standard S pecification for Stee% Sheet, for Porcelain En amelin9� AST o,Standard Test ethod for ace 8009 °f Buifdn9 Materials in 4. .D, 40 CFR 59, Subpart D_National V°l ati/Organic Compound Emission Standards f°Arch/tec ur al Coatings; U Environmental Protection gcY.1.04 SUBMITTALS A. D ade mono fa cturers data o n markerboord, to ckb°ard, tackboard s urface hring, trim, nd accessories_ covering, Indicate a//elevations, Joint locations, spec,a/anch°r details.C. Manufacturer's printed na t n instructio S D Ma;ntenanAta: lnc/ude don regular cleaning, stain remoVaf 1.Og QUALI T Y ASSURANCE Manufacturer o yea pant spec;a' � anufacturin 9 the products Specifi ed in this st° with minimum five documented eperiance 1.Og WARRANTY Provide five f°r tboard to include warranty against discoloration due to nrn9, ron9 o cracking, nd Sa ng,PART? PRODUCTS 2 01MANUFAC y gVisual Display Bo �t1. r U V 5 aus and Equipment, Inc.: cland9epr .com Basis(Basis-of-Design)Systems:runs:Submit fr and receive appo gal prior to bidding.2 02 VISUAL DISPLAY o q Mboards: Pcela;n°name/on Steel laminated to core. able Writing Surface Products: _ CS_;/man nred by Clari dge b e Environmental Cera elefacture aoof ;Sion c Substitutions: Submit fo and cive approvt pr rddin9 2. Color. et3 or Sheet0 024 inch(24 gage Ce: H dbQad, Thickness:manufacturer's stand Ord thickness laminated to face sheet. . Backing: gnfoil, lam s ted t°co�_ As indicated on drawings.aluminum, with fasten ers g Rc sS Fi h � 2 natural.9. i °ryes- Pro rdemarkertray, ma p rail, map hooks, and flag holder.1015 Westside Chri stian High School P EB2013 Addition/Remodel 101101 . 1 nntea 2122/2013 SECTION 10 11 01 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS B. Tackboards TB-1: Fabric laminated to cork. 1. Cork Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Fabric: Network, manufactured by Korseal.. 3. Backing: Hardboard, 1/4 inch thick, laminated to tack surface. 4. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25, maximum, and smoke developed index of 450, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 5. Size: As indicated on drawings. 6. Frame: Same type and finish as for markerboard. 7. Frame Profile: Manufacturer's standard. 8. Fabric Color: As indicated in Section 09 00 01 - Finish Legend. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Porcelain Enameled Steel Sheet: ASTM A424, Type I, Commercial Steel, with fired-on vitreous finish. B. Hardboard for Cores: AHA A135.4, Class 1 - Tempered, S2S (smooth two sides). C. Foil Backing: Aluminum foil sheet, 0.005 inch thick. D. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive, for use with specific panels and substrate application, as recommended in writing by visual display surface manufacturer, and with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Map Rail: Extruded aluminum, manufacturer's standard profile, with cork insert and runners for accessories; 1 inch wide overall, full width of frame with end stops. 1. Provide a minimum of two map hooks for every 48 inches of map rail. B. Temporary Protective Cover: Sheet polyethylene, 8 mil thick. C. Flag Holders: Cast aluminum bored to receive 1 inch diameter flag staff, bracketed to fit top rail of board. D. Marker Tray: Aluminum, manufacturer's standard profile one piece full length of markerboard, closed ends; concealed fasteners, same finish as frame. E. Mounting Brackets: Concealed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that internal wall blocking is ready to receive work and] positioning dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install boards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure units level and plumb. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean board surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Cover with protective cover, taped to frame. C. Remove temporary protective cover at date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 10 11 01 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 10 11 43 TACKABLE WALL SURFACES SECTION 10 11 43 TACKABLE WALL SURFACES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabric-covered tackable wall surface TS-1. B. Accessories as required for complete installation. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 10 11 01 -Visual Display Boards: Prefabricated, framed tackboards and markerboards. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Specimen warranty. B. Shop Drawings: Elevations indicating proposed locations of panel edges and edge details. C. Verification Samples: 1. Each fabric specified, minimum size 8 inches square, representing actual product in color, texture, and pattern. 2. Tackable core backing material, minimum 12 inches square. 3. Edge trim, minimum 6 inches long. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to review installation procedures for tackable wall surfaces. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide all components of each type of tackable wall surfaces by a single manufacturer, including recommended adhesives. C. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in specified surfaces, with not less than 5 years of documented experience in installing wall systems of the type specified, and approved by the manufacturer. D. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide system with flame spread index of 25, maximum, and smoke developed index of 40, maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of application workmanship. 1. Install two adjacent panels including edge trim. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship and overall appearance are approved by Architect. 3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable workmanship. 4. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the completed Work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect materials from excessive moisture in shipment, storage, and handling. Do not deliver materials to project until wet work such as concrete and gypsum board finishing has been completed. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 10 11 43 - 1 Printed 2122/2013 SECTION 10 11 43 TACKABLE WALL SURFACES B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. C. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not begin installation until interior conditions have reached temperature and humidity that will be maintained during occupancy. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Fabric Covered Tackable Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of tackable wall surfaces that fail in performance, materials, or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures in materials include, but are not limited to, fabric sagging, distorting, or releasing from panel edge; or warping of core. 2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fabric Covered Tackable Wall Surfaces TS-1: 1. Jasco Classic Tackboard manufactured by Jasco: jasco-usa.com. (Basis-of- Design) 2. Soft-Tone Acoustical/Tackable Panels manufactured by Lamvin Inc: www.lamvin.com. 3. TK/AC Acoustical Panels manufactured by Wall Technology: www.walltechnology.com. 4. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Fabric Covered Tackable Wall Surfaces TS-1: 1. Substrate: a. Composition: Mineral fiber. b. Treatments: Factory protection against rot, fungi, and moisture absorption. c. Density: 30 pcf. d. Thickness: 1/2 inch. e. Size: 48 inches wide by height required to fabricate seamless panels to height as indicated on Drawings. f. Edge Treatment: Square. g. Fire Rating: Class A. h. Required Product: Micore 300. 2. Fabric for TS-1: a. Width: 54 inches. b. Manufacturer: Korseal, Product: Network c. Color: As indicated in Section 09 00 01 - Finish Legend. 3. Fasteners and Adhesives: As recommended by manufacturer of tack wall surface for project conditions. a. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, adhesive, as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer and panel manufacturer with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabrication of Fabric Covered Tackable Wall Surface Panels: 1. Apply adhesive to exposed face of substrate. 2. Wrap panel core material with fabric covering edges and returning fabric approximately 2 inches on back of panel. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 10 11 43- 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 10 11 43 TACKABLE WALL SURFACES PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of tackable wall surfaces. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that substrate has been prime painted prior to installation of tackable wall surfaces. C. Verify that all casework, markerboards, door and window jambs, finished ceiling, and other finished items abutting tackable wall surfaces have been installed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Remove wall plates and other obstacles, and prepare substrates to receive core material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Recess nails and screws. Repair irregular tape joints, sand and remove dust. D. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install tackable wall systems at locations indicated, complying with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install fabric covered tack surface panels in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb. Install top edges level and in alignment with other panels, scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations. 1. Installation of Panels: a. Apply adhesive to walls and panels or in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's recommendations. b. Set fabric covered tackboard on wall and secure with 6D finish nails to hold in place until adhesive cures. c. Set nails below surface of fabric. d. Stretch fabric to remove any wrinkles. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of tackable wall surfaces, complying with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and repair of minor finish damage. Use a dry brush, vacuum or both. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project, using methods that will ensure that the finished work will be without damage or deterioration at Date of Substantial Completion. B. Replace panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner acceptable to the Architect, prior to the time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 10 11 43- 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Room signs. B. Vinyl die cut letters and symbols. C. Dimensional super-graphics 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 36 CFR 1191 -Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Final Rule; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design). B. ANSI/ICC A117.1 -American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign. B. Shop Drawings: Layout drawings for each sign. C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication, including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and colors. 1. Provide a plan indicating final room names and numbers correlating to those used on the signs. 2. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on the drawings, include the drawing room number on schedule. 3. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from Owner through Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request, submit preliminary schedule. 4. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication. 5. Owner may modify text to any sign scheduled at the time of shop drawing review at no additional cost. D. Samples: Submit two sG.iples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project, illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment. 1. Include samples of die-cut vinyl letters. E. Selection Samples: Where colors are not specified, submit two sets of color selection charts or chips. F. Verification Samples: Submit samples showing colors specified. G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment devices. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. B. Single-Source Responsibility: For each different style of sign (flat signs, dimensional letters, etc.), obtain signs from one source from a single manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation. B. Package room signs in sequential order of installation. C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 10 14 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors and sign lamination. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Flat Signs: 1. Architectural Metalcrafters: www.amcrafters.com. 2. ASI Sign Systems: www.asisignage.com. 3. Best Sign Systems, Inc: www.bestsigns.com. 4. FastSigns, 1430 NW Glisan Street, Portland, OR 97209: www.fastsigns.com. 5. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc: ww.innerface-signage.com. 6. Martin Bros. Inc: www.martin-bros.com. 7. Mohawk Sign Systems, Inc: www.mohawksign.com. 8. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS A. Accessibility Compliance: All signs are required to comply with ADA Standards for Accessible Design and ANSI/ICC A 117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements. B. Room Signs: Provide signs as indicated in Signage Schedule located in the drawings. 1. Sign Type: Flat signs with photopolymer panel media as specified. 2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille. 3. Character Height: As indicated, meetng the following: 5/8" minimum to 2" maximum. 4. Sign Size: As indicated in Sign Types, unless message requires a different size. 5. Provide tactile signs at all panel sign locations. 2.03 SIGN TYPES A. Refer to Drawings for Sign Details. B. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame. 1. Edges: Square. 2. Corners: Square. 3. Comply with requirements indicated for materials, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction. a. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally. b. Position text and symbols as detailed. c. Braille color shall match background color. 4. Sign Types 1 through 5: a. Raised Copy: Signs shall be of one piece construction with raised characters and Grade 2 Braille. Added-on or eny-aved characters are not allowed. Conform to applicable codes for ADA compliance. b. Tactile characters and symbols, raised 1/32 inch minimum thickness from sign plate face. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 10 14 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE c. Font: Arial, upper case. d. Colors: As selected by Architect with character color contrasting with background color. 5. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Tape adhesive. a. At signs mounted on glass, provide adhesive that covers entire back of sign for a neat and finished appearance from the back side of the sign. 2.04 VINYL DIE-CUT LETTERS A. Vinyl Letters & Symbols; Sign Type 6: Die-cut characters from vinyl film with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing. 1. Material: 3M Series 7125 or equivalent. 2 mil, gloss cast vinyl film. 2. Message/Symbols/Dots: As indicated on the drawings. 3. Height: As indicated on the drawings.. 4. Font: To match Owner provide artwork.. 5. Dot Color: White 6. Message Color: Deep Red (PMS 201). 7. Manufacturer/Installer: Fast Signs, Gary Tomono, 1402 NW Glisan, Portland, OR 97209 503-221-3917 or approved. 2.05 DIMENSIONAL SUPER GRAPHICS A. Super Graphics; Sign Type 7: Lazer cut cast acrylic 1. Material: 3/16"thick cast acrylic (not continous cast), Color- clear that is back painted to match PMS 201. 2. Size: As indicated on the Drawings. 3. Method: Positive image of lazer cut profile of School Logo on Owner Provided Artwork (Eagle Profile inscribed in circle). 4. Manufacturer/Installer: Fast Signs, Gary Tomono, 1402 NW Glisan, Portland, OR 97209 503-221-3917 or approved. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Tape Adhesive: Double sided VHB tape, permanent adhesive. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level. C. Locate signs where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or (standing within swing of door. Mount with top of sign at 60 inches above finished floor. D. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for rough surfaces. 2. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular or porous surfaces. 3. At glass mounted signs, provide adhesive that covers entire back of sign for a neat and finished appearance from the back side of the sign. E. Vinyl Dots: Install on first surface of glass. Remove all air bubbles. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 10 14 00 - 3 Pnnted 2/22/2013 SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE F. Vinyl Lettering/Symbols: 1. Locate signs where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 3. Remove all air bubbles. Remove and replace lettering with creases or bubbles. G. Dimensional Super Graphics 1. Installation: Attach acrylic to painted gypsum board wall using non-voc/low odor adhesive H. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 10 14 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 10 21 13.19 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS SECTION 10 21 13.19 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Solid plastic toilet compartments. B. Urinal screens. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking and supports. B. Section 10 28 00 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in walls. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate partition plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall and floor supports, door swings. B. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's full range of available colors. D. Samples: Submit two samples of partition panels, 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Plastic Toilet Compartments: 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation; www.accuratepartitions.com. 2. Ampco Products, Inc.: www.ampco.com. 3. Hadrian Inc.: www.hadrian.com. 4. Scranton Products: www.scrantonproducts.com. (Basis-of-Design) 5. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Toilet Compartments: Solid molded high density polyethylene (HDPE) plastic panels, doors, and pilasters, floor-mounted headrail-braced. 1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. B. Door and Panel Dimensions: 1. Thickness: 1 inch with rounded edges. 2. Door Width: 24 inch. 3. Door Width for Handicapped Use: 36 inch. 4. Height: 55 inch for doors and dividing panels or as standard with manufacturer, 82 inches for pilasters. 5. Thickness of Pilasters: 1 inch. C. Urinal Screens: Wall mounted with continuous aluminum full height brackets. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Pilaster Shoes: Formed ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 in high, concealing floor fastenings. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 10 21 13.19- 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 10 21 13.19 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack 1:hrough steel saddles integral with pilaster. B. Head Rails: Hollow anodized aluminum tube, 1 x 1-5/8 inch size or as standard with manufacturer, with anti-grip strips and cast socket wall brackets. C. Pilaster Brackets: Natural anodized aluminum. D. Wall Brackets: Continuous type, plastic, to match. 1. Provide continuous aluminum brackets at urinal screens. E. Attachments, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless steel, tamper proof type. 1. For attaching panels and pilasters to brackets: Through-bolts and nuts; tamper proof. F. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard finish: 1. Hinges: Aluminum wrap-around hinges, adjustable for door close positioning; three per door. 2. Door Latch: Slide type with exterior emergency access feature. 3. Door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; mounted on pilaster in alignment with door latch. 4. Coat hook with rubber bumper; one per compartment, mounted on door. 5. Provide door pull for both sides of outswinging doors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures. C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing. 3.02 INSTALLATION - PARTITIONS A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain maximum 3/8 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters. C. Maintain uniform top to bottom clearance at vertical edges of doors not exceeding 3/8 inch. D. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices. E. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. F. No evidence of cutting, drilling or patching shall be visible on the finished work. G. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch. B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return accessible compartment doors to closed position. C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 10 21 13.19- 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 10 26 01 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS SECTION 10 26 01 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Corner guards. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions, features, and anchorage details. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Wall and Corner Guards: 1. Babcock-Davis: www.babcockdavis.com. 2. Construction Specialties, Inc.: www.c-sgroup.com. 3. InPro Corporation: www.inprocorp.com. 4. Korogard Wall Protection Systems: www.korogard.com. 5. Substutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Corner Guard - Flush Mounted: One piece unit installed with adhesive. 1. Material: Type 304 stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 2. Material Thickness: 16 gage. 3. Face Size: 1 1/2 inches. 4. Length: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Locations of Use: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Available Products: a. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc.; Product CGSS-F2: www.ardenarch.com. b. Babcock-Davis; Product CG-SS304: www.babcockdavis.com. c. Construction Specialties, Inc.; Product Model CO: www.c-sgroup.com. d. InPro Corporation; Product Model 180: www.inprocorp.com. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install componets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured rigidly in position. B. Fully adhere surface mounted corner guards to wall surface using manufacturer's recommended VOC compliant adhesive. C. Position corner guards from top of base to heights indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 10 26 01 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Accessories for toilet rooms. B. Grab bars. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed supports for accessories, including in wall framing and plates. B. Section 09 30 00 -Ceramic Tile: Coordination for installation of accessories. C. Section 10 21 13.19 - Plastic Toilet Compartments. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. B. ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. D. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. E. ASTM B456 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. F. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass. G. ASTM C1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror. H. ASTM F2285 - Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Diaper Changing Tables for Commercial Use. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Toilet Accessories: 1. A&J Washroom Accessories Inc.: www.ajwashroom.com. 2. American Specialties, Inc.: www.americanspecialties.com. 3. Bobrick (Basis-of-Design): www.bobrick.com. 4. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. 5. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 10 28 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 2.02 MATERIALS A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. B. Keys: Provide keys for each accessory to Owner; master key all lockable accessories. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304. D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, Type 304 or 316. E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating. F. Mirror Glass: Float glass,ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, protective and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503. G. Adhesive: Contact type, waterproof. H. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, security type. I. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricated Components: Grind welded joints smooth. B. Form exposed surfaces from a single sheet of stock, free of joints. C. Form surfaces flat, without distortion. Maintain true, flat surfaces without scratches or dents. D. Shop assemble accessories and package complete with all fasteners, anchors, and fittings. E. Provide all steel anchor plates, adapters, and other installation components. 2.04 FINISHES A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted. B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, SC 2, satin finish, unless otherwise noted. C. Baked Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy baked enamel. D. Galvanizing for Items Other than Sheet: Comply with ASTM Al23/A123M; galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices. E. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake. F. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. 2.05 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Double roll, surface mounted bracket type, chrome-plated zinc alloy brackets, spindleless type for tension spring delivery designed to prevent theft of tissue roll. 1. Product: B-2888 manufactured by Bobrick. B. Paper Towel Dispenser: Folded paper type, stainless steel, surface-mounted, with viewing slots on sides as refill indicator and tumbler lock. 1. Product: B-262 manufactured by Bobrick. C. Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser, wall-mounted, surface, with stainless steel cover and horizontal stainless steel tank and working parts; push type soap valve, check valve, and window gage refill indicator, tumbler lock. 1. Product: B-2111 manufactured by Bobrick. D. Mirrors: Stainless steel framed, 6 mm thick tempered glass mirror. 1. Size: As indicated on drawings. 2. Frame: 0.05 inch angle shapes,with mitered and welded and ground corners, and tamperproof hanging system; No. 4 finish. 3. Backing: Full-mirror sized, minimum 0.03 inch galvanized steel sheet and nonabsorptive filler material. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 10 28 00 -2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 4. Product: B-2908 Series manufactured by Bobrick. E. Seat Cover Dispenser: Stainless steel, surface-mounted, reloading by concealed opening at base, tumbler lock. 1. Product: B-221 manufactured by Bobrick. F. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, nonslip grasping surface finish. 1. Heavy Duty Grab Bars: Floor supports are not acceptable. a. Push/Pull Point Load: Minimum 1000 pound-force, minimum. b. Dimensions: 1-1/2 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.125 inch wall thickness, concealed flange mounting, 1-1/2 inch clearance between wall and inside of grab bar. c. Length and Configuration: As indicated on drawings. d. Products: 1) Series B-6808 manufactured by Bobrick. G. Combination Sanitary Napkin/Tampon Dispenser: Stainless steel, semi-recessed. 1. Door: Sean-less 0.05 inch door with returned edges and tumbler lock. 2. Cabinet: Fully welded, 0.03 inch thick sheet. 3. Operation: 25 cent coin required to operate dispenser. Provide locked coin box, separately keyed. 4. Identify dispensers slots without using brand names. 5. Minimum capacity: 20 napkins and 30 tampons. 6. Product: Semi-recessed Unit- B-3706 manufactured by Bobrick. H. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit: Stainless steel, surface-mounted, self-closing door, locking bottom panel with full-length stainless steel piano-type hinge, removable receptacle. 1. Product: B-254 manufactured by Bobrick for surface-mounted locations. 2. Product: B-354 manufactured by Bobrick for partition-mounted locations. I. Diaper Changing Station: Wall-mounted folding diaper changing station for use in commercial toilet facilities, meeting or exceeding ASTM F2285. 1. Style: Horizontal. 2. Material: Stainless steel shell with polyethylene body. 3. Mounting: Surface. 4. Minimum Rated Load: 250 lbs. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Model 100-SSC-SM manufactured by Foundations. 6. Manufacturers: a. Bradley Corporation : www.bradleycorp.com. b. Foundations Worldwide, Inc.: www.foundations.com. c. Koala Kare Products : www.koalabear.com. d. Submit for and receive approval of substitution request prior to bidding. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. C. See Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry for installation of blocking in walls. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 10 28 00 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES C. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 10 28 00 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. B. Fire blankets. C. Fire extinguisher cabinets. D. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 47 13 -Tilt-up Concrete: Roughed-in wall openings. B. Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry: Roughed-in wall openings. C. Section 09 21 16 -Gypsum Board Assemblies: Roughed-in wall openings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers. B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions. B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories: 1. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com. (Basis-of-Design) 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com. 3. Potter-Roemer: www.potterroemer.com. 4. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent. 1. Provide extinguishers labeled by UL for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers FE-1: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gage. 1. Class: B:C. 2. Size: 5 pound. 3. UL Rating: 2A-10BC 4. Finish: Baked polyester powder coat, red color. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: JL Industries Cosmic 5E 6. Locations of Use: a. One in each fire extinguisher cabinet. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 10 44 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal for cabinet body. B. Metal: Formed aluminum for door and trim. C. Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed type. 1. Sized to accommodate accessories. 2. Trim: Returned to wall surface, with 2 1/2 inch projection, 1 3/4 inch wide face. 3. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim and door stiles. D. Door: 0.036 inch thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinges. Provide roller type catch. E. Door Glazing: 1. FEC-1: Manufacturer's standard clear acrylic. 2. FEC-2: Manufacturer's standard clear acrylic. 3. FEC-3: None F. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors. G. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth. H. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Clear anodized aluminum. I. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel. J. Basis-of-Design Products for Cabinets: 1. FEC-1: JL Industries Academy Series. 2. FEC-2: JL Industries 3600 Series sized to fit FE-1 and including shelf and Fire Blanket. 3. FEC-3: JL Industries Academy Series with no vision panel. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fire Blanket: Fire retardant treated wool; gray, 62 x 84 inch size. B. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, galvanized and enamel finished. C. Cabinet Signage: 1. FEC-1 and FEC-3: Vertical sign copy reading "FIRE EXTINGUISHER." 2. FEC-2: Vertical sign copy reading "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" and horizontal sign copy reading "FIRE BLANKET." 3. Color of Sign Copy. Black die cut letters. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, at heights indicated on Drawings. C. Secure rigidly in place. D. Place extinguishers in cabinets and on brackets where indicated. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 10 44 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 10 51 00 LOCKERS SECTION 10 51 00 LOCKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Locker units with hinged doors. B. Metal ADA shelves. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood base construction. B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on locker types, sizes and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locker plan layout, numbering plan. 1. Confirm locations of ADA lockers prior to ordering. C. Selection Samples: Manufacturer's full range of available colors. D. Samples: Submit two samples 3 x 6 inches in size, of each color scheduled; applied to specified base metal. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate component installation assembly. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect locker finish and adjacent surfaces from damage. 1.06 WARRANTY A. KD (Knock Down) Lockers: Locker manufacturer shall warranty all KD lockers for a period of two years (from date of delivery) use of Owner. Manufacturer's Warranty shall cover all defects in material and workmanship, excluding only conditions arising from normal wear and/or abuse. Locks shall be similarly warranted by the lock manufacturer for a minimum of five years from date of delivery. Installation shall be warranted by the locker installer for a period of one year from date of first use or completion/final acceptance, in the case of punch list items requiring repair or replacement. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Lockers: 1. Superior: www.listindustries.com (Basis-of-Design). 2. Lyon Workspace Products: www.lyonworkspace.com. 3. Pemco Products, Inc: www.pencoproducts.com. 4. Republic Storage Systems Co: www.republicstorage.com. 5. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653 SS Grade 33/230, stretcher leveled; to the minimum thicknesses indicated for each locker type. B. ADA Shelves: Provide manufacturer's standard ADA kit shelves mounted 12 to 18 inches from bottom at ADA designated locations. C. Recessed Trim: Fabricate from 16 gage cold rolled sheet steel. Notch 3 inch wide side trim at the top and include a retainer to allow the 3 inch wide top trim to fit snugly into the side trim. The top and side trim will project 3/8 inch beyond the side and top walls and include return bends back to the walls. Finish to match lockers. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 10 51 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 10 51 00 LOCKERS 2.03 LOCKER UNITS A. Corridor Lockers Type L-1: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Heavy-Duty Corridor(HDC) KD Wardrobe Lockers manufactured by Superior. 2. Locations of Use: Corridors. 3. Size: a. 2 Tier, 12 inches wide by 15 inches deep by 72 inches high column. 4. Base: Fabricate for wood base. a. Base Height: 4 inch. 5. Handle: Deep-drawn seamless stainless steel recessed. 6. Ventilation Method: Door louvers. 7. Locker Body: Knock-down with 24 gage solid body components. 8. Doors: 14 gage louvered. 9. Hinges: 16 gage continuous piano type. 10. Latching: 2 point 12 gage latch hooks MIG welded to frame. Gravity lift spring loaded latching. 11. Locks: MasterLock 1630 built-in combination lock. a. Provide MasterLock 1636 MKADA lock at ADA lockers. 12. Hooks: 2-single hooks and 1-double hook. 13. Number Plates: Provide oval shaped brass plates. Form numbers of block font style, in contrasting color. 14. Finish edges smooth without burrs. 15. Provide recessed trim above and at sides of lockers. 2.04 FINISHING A. Clean, degrease, and neutralize metal; prime and finish with one coat of baked enamel. B. Paint Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that prepared bases are in correct position and configuration. B. Verify bases are properly sized. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install lockers plumb and square. C. Place and secure on prepared base. D. Secure lockers with anchor devices to suit substrate materials. Minimum Pullout Force: 100 lb. E. Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation. F. Install recessed trim, filler panels, and ADA shelves. G. Install accessories. H. Replace components that do not operate smoothly. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean locker interiors and exterior surfaces. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 10 51 00 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 11 31 00 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES SECTION 11 31 00 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Kitchen appliances. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. UL (EAUED) - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features of each piece of residential equipment specified. B. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owners name and registered with manufacturer. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Provide two (2)year limited dishwasher manufacturer warranty parts and labor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 KITCHEN APPLIANCES A. Dishwasher : Undercounter. 1. Controls: Solid state electronic. 2. Wash Levels: 3. 3. Cycles: 4, including normal. 4. Features: Include rinse aid dispenser, optional no-heat dry, optional water temperature boost, adjustable upper rack, and adjustable lower rack. 5. Finish: Stainless steel, color as indicated. 6. Manufacturers: a. ASKO Product: Classic Dishwasher#D5424DA-S www.askousa.com b. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify utility rough-ins are present and correctly located. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Anchor built-in equipment in place. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove packing materials from equipment. B. Wash and clean equipment. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 11 31 00 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 11 52 13 PROJECTION SCREENS SECTION 11 52 13 PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Front projection screen assemblies. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 51 00 -Acoustical Ceilings: Suspended panel ceilings for recessed screens. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts and descriptive information on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. B. Shop Drawings: For custom installations, indicate dimensions, verified field measurements, mounting details, and interface with adjacent construction. C. Samples: For screen fabrics, submit two 4 by in size. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Experienced in manufacturing products specified in this section. B. Installer Qualifications: Experienced in installation of the work of this section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver projection screens to project site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging. Inspect for damage and size before accepting delivery. B. Store in a protected, clean, dry area with temperature maintained above 50 degrees F. Stack according to manufacturer's recommendations. C. Acclimate screens to building temperatures for 24 hours prior to installation, or in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain interior of building between 60 degrees F and 75 degrees F during and after installation of projection screens. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide one year manufacturer warranty for projection screen assembly. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Da-Lite Screen Company: www.da-lite.com. B. Draper, Inc.: www.draperinc.com. C. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 FRONT PROJECTION SCREENS A. Front Projection Screens: Factory assembled unless otherwise indicated. B. Projection Viewing Surface: Matte white screen fabric, washable, flame retardant and mildew resistant. 1. Greenguard for Children and Schools certified. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 11 52 13 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 11 52 13 PROJECTION SCREENS C. Manual Ceiling Mounted Projection Screens: 1. Products: a. Da-Lite Advantage Manual with CSR. b. Draper Access/Series M AR. 2. Screen Format: NTSC 4:3 Video Format. 3. Viewing Size: 54"x96". 4. Borders: None. 5. Locations of Use: Library 114 D. Exposed Screen Cases: Steel; integral roller brackets. 1. Finish: Powder coat or as standard with manufacturer. 2. Color: White. 3. End Caps: Steel;finished to match case. 4. Mounting: Ceiling. E. Concealed-in-Ceiling Screen Cases: Steel; integral roller brackets. 1. Door Slat: Self trim; self-closing and -opening. 2. Case Finish: Baked enamel. 3. Case Color: White. 4. End Caps: Steel;finished to match case. 5. Electrically-Operated Screens: 1-1/2 inch aluminum door roller or as standard with manufacturer. F. Manually-Operated Screens: 1. Roller: 2 inch steel; spring loaded with locking device, or as standard with manufacturer. 2. Screen Pull: Ring on bottom bar. 3. Vertical Tensioning: Screen fabric weighted at bottom with steel bar with plastic end caps. G. Provide mounting hardware, brackets, supports, fasteners, and other mounting accessories required for a complete installation, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for specified substrates and mountings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate is finished and ready to accept screen installation. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installler, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proce.ling. C. Verify that openings for recessed screens are correctly sized. D. Do not install projection screens until climate control systems are in place and interior painting and other finishes are completed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate screen installation with installation of projection systems. B. Coordinate installation with adjacent construction and fixtures, including ceilings, walls, lighting, fire suppression, and registers and grilles. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using manufacturer's recommended hardware for relevant substrates. B. Do not field cut screens. C. Install screens in mountings as specified and as indicated on drawings. D. Install plumb and level. E. Adjust projection screens and related hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for proper placement and operation. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 11 52 13 - 2 Pri nted 2/22/2013 SECTION 11 52 13 PROJECTION SCREENS 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch up, repair, or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 11 52 13 -3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 11 66 23 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT SECTION 11 66 23 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basketball backboards, edge cushioning, safety straps, goals and support framing. 1. Backboard hoists, where indicated. B. Floor sleeves for net and goal posts. C. Wall mounted protection pads. D. Gym divider curtains and hoist. E. Volleyball nets and posts. F. Scoreboards. G. System control. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete floor slab to receive floor sleeves and anchors. B. Section 03 47 13 - Tilt-Up Concrete: Concrete walls supporting basketball systems. C. Section 05 21 00 - Steel Joist Framing: Structural members supporting basketball systems and gym divider curtain. D. Section 09 64 66 -Wood Athletic Flooring: Gymnasium flooring. E. Section 12 66 13 -Telescoping Bleachers: Telescoping bleachers controlled by system control keypad. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A36/A36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. B. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. C. ASTM A513 - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing. D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. AWS D1.1/D1.1M -Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. G. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. H. NFPA 255- Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Large Components: Ensure that large components can be moved into final position without damage to other construction. B. Electrically Operated Equipment: Coordinate location and electrical characteristics of service connection. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data showing configuration, sizes, materials, finishes, hardware, and accessories; include: 1. Electrical characteristics and connection locations. 2. Fire rating certifications. 3. Structural steel welder certifications. 4. Manufacturer's installation instructions. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 11 66 23 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 11 66 23 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT B. Shop Drawings: For custom fabricated equipment indicate, in large scale detail, construction methods; method of attachment or installation; type and gage of metal, hardware, and fittings; plan front elevation; elevations and dimensions; minimum one cross section; utility requirements as to types, sizes, and locations. 1. Indicate cable attachments and cable runs for motorized backstops. 2. Refer to Structural Drawings for structural supports. 3. Coordinate structural loading requirements with steel joist manufacturer. C. Erection Drawings: Detailed dimensional requirements for proper location of equipment. D. Selection Samples: Submit samples of backstop cushion molding, divider curtains, and wall pad coverings in manufacturer's available range of colors. E. Verification Samples: Submit samples of selected colors for backstop cushion molding, divider curtains, and wall pad coverings F. Operating and maintenance data, for each operating equipment item. G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than five years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified with minimum five years of experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's original packaging with factory original labels attached. B. Store products indoors and elevated above floor; prevent warping, twisting, or sagging. C. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; protect from extremes of weather, temperature, moisture, and other damage. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for each piece of equipment. B. Provide 1 year manufacturer's warranty covering defects in material and workmanship for system control keypad. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Gymnasium Equipment: 1. Jaypro Sports Construction Group (Draper, Inc.): www.jayprosportsconstruction.com. 2. Performance Sports Systems: www.perfsports.com. (Basis-of-Design) 3. Porter Athletic Equipment Company: www.porter-ath.com. 4. Sports Specialties/Spalding: www.sportsspecialties.com. 5. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Scoreboards: 1. Daktronics: www.daktronics.com. (Basis-of-Design) 2. Nevco: www.nevco.com. 3. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. See drawings for sizes and locations. B. Where mounting dimensions or sizes are not indicated, comply with applicable requirements of the following: 1. National Federation of State High School Associations (NFHS) sports rules. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 11 66 23 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 11 66 23 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 2. Oregon State Athletic Association (OSAA) C. Product descriptions for gymnasium equipment are based on listed models manufactured by Performance Sports Systems. Minor dimensional and material variations for other named manufacturers are acceptable subject to compliance to performance requirements and referenced standards. D. Provide mounting plates, brackets, and anchors of sufficient size and strength to securely attach equipment to building structure; comply with requirements of contract documents. E. Hardware: Heavy duty steel hardware, as recommended by manufacturer. F. Electrical Wiring and Components: Comply with NFPA 70; provide UL-listed equipment. G. Structural Steel Fabrications: Welded in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, using certified welders. 2.03 DIVIDER CURTAINS A. Gymnasium Divider Curtains: 1. Curtain Material: Class A rated, self-extinguishing vinyl coated polyester meeting NFPA 101. a. Upper Section: Nine oz/sq yd vinyl mesh fabric. 1) Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. b. Lower Section: 18 oz/sq yd solid vinyl coated polyester. 1) Height: 8 feet. 2) Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. 2. Operation: Vertical lift fold-up. 3. Divider Curtain Hoist: a. Curtain hoist shall drive a continuous 2-3/8 inch O.D. drive shaft. The curtain shall be lifted by means of 1/8 inch galvanized aircraft cable. Space lift cables at no greater than 12 feet center to center. The cable shall pass through grommets in the vinyl fabric spaced 24 inches center to center and be taken up on individual reels located on the drive shaft. The drive shaft shall be supported by a carrier assembly spaced no greater than 12 feet center to center. The carrier shall consist of a formed bracket with two rubber wheels on which the drive shall rotate. b. Products: 1) Performance Sports Systems Model 4002 Electric Divider Curtain Hoist. (Basis-of-Design). 2) Sports Specialties Model standard with Divider Curtain. 4. Controls: Constant contact key controls keyed to Owner locks. 5. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 6. Products: a. Performance Sports Systems Model 4020 Fold-up Divider Curtain (Basis-of-Design). b. Sports Specialties Model SS401-855 Fold Up Divider Curtain. c. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.04 INTERIOR BASKETBALL A. Basketball System: Manual side fold backstop assembly for gym: 1. Products: a. Performance Sports Systems Model 2500 Adjustable Side Folding Wall Mount Structure for Extensions 4'-0" to 12'-0". (Basis-of-Design) b. Sports Specialties Model SS302-600 Wall-Braced Backstop Side Fold. 2. Wall Attachment: Attach to wall on 2-inch by 7.25 inch clear coated wood pads. Support unit with chain fastened to front of the unit and attached to wood pad mounted on the wall. 3. Backstop: Construct backstop from four 1-7/8 inch O.D. tubes telescoped inside 2-1/8 inch tubes, spaced at 63 inch centers. Brace the bottom horizontal tubing with diagonal telescoping pipes that lock in playing position. Offset all pivot points to allow maximum fold. All critical fittings shall be malleable iron castings, heavy gage steel stampings or Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 11 66 23 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 11 66 23 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT weldments. Manufacture backstop in accordance with NCAA Rule 1, Section 8, stating that all backboard support systems shall be at least 6 inches behind backboard. 4. Finish: Black. 5. Include the following items with each backstop: a. Backboard. b. Goal with net. c. Backstop cushion molding. B. Basketball System: Motorized forward fold backstop assembly for gym at bleachers: 1. Products: a. Performance Sports Systems Model 3103 Welded Single Post Rear Braced Front Folding Basketball Structure. (Basis-of-Design) b. Sports Specialties Model SS1017 Ceiling Suspended Basketball Backstop System. 2. Support unit from 3-1/2 inch O.D. x 0.120 inch wall ASTM A500 Grade B horizontal and 2-3/8 inch O.D. x 12 gage wall ASTM A513 vertical structural steel tubing secured to the building with heavy gauge steel stampings or weldments (as required by building conditions). When truss span widths exceed 10'-0", use 3-1/2 inch O.D. x Schedule 40 wall ASTM A500 Grade B for the horizontals. Spans over 14'-0"will use welded bridge pipe. 3. Backstop: Single post design with a main vertical mast made of 6-5/8 inch O.D. x 0.120 inch wall ASTM A500 Grade B structural steel tubing with 2-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 14 gage wall ASTM A513 rectangular steel tube sway braces miter cut and welded in place to a top horizontal 4 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 0.18 inch web ASTM A36 steel channel. Suspend main mast from superstructure with an offset hanger 3 inches in front of the pivot point. Units with less than 3 inches offset will not be approved as equal. Manufacture backstop to allow 6 inch vertical adjustment for plumbing of the backboard. All fittings shall be heavy gage steel stampings or weldments. A direct goal attachment is used to transfer stress from the goal to the main mast assembly preventing strain on the backboard. 4. Rear brace shall be 1-7/8 inch O.D. x 12 gage wall ASTM A513 steel tubing with a slide mechanism and steel bushing for travel on a 1-7/8 inch O.D. slide rod. When truss heights are higher than 27'-0", rear brace shall be 2-3/8 inch O.D. x 12 gage wall ASTM A513 steel tubing. The entire assembly shall be self-aligning and designed to be self-locking and self-releasing. Backstop shall be raised and lowered with 1/4 inch galvanized aircraft cable with a breaking strength of 7000 lbs. Cable automatically retracts by means of 5/16 inch diameter shock cord. Manufacture backstop in accordance with NCAA Rule 1, Section 8, stating that all parts of the backboard support system shall be at least 6 inches behind backboard. 5. Finish: Black. 6. Include the following items with each backstop: a. Backboard. b. Goal. c. Backboard safety stop. d. Electric backstop hoist. Provide constant contact key controls. e. Backstop cushion molding. C. Backboards: Tempered glass, rectangular shaped. 1. Products: a. Performance Sports Systems Model LXP 4200 Steel Frame. (Basis-of Design) b. Sports Specialties Model SS411-007 Superglass Collegiate Backboard. 2. Fabricate with steel frame constructed of formed steel angles, formed and fastened together and connected with heavy gage steel mount plates to reinforce corners. Provide lower horizontal frame section with a tubular steel support brace. 3. Provide cushioning pad between steel mounting plate and glass to protect board against possible breakage. 4. Glass: 1/2 inch thick, fully tempered with white target lines permanently fused onto the surface. 5. Finish entire frame and components with powder coat gray finish. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 11 66 23 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 11 66 23 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 6. Dimensions: 42 inches high by 72 inches wide D. Goals: Steel rim, mounted to backboard, with attached nylon anti-whip net; complete with mounting hardware. 1. Products: a. Performance Sports Systems Model 2000+ Positive Lock Break-Away Goal. (Basis-of-Design) b. Sports Specialties Model SS411-508 Slammer Competitor Goal. 2. Provide official size 18 inch ring of 5/8 inch diameter steel with continuous no-tie net attachment, full wing brace design. Include anti-whip net and hardware. 3. Construct with positive lock mechanism to hold rim in solid playing position. Design goal to eliminate any possible entrapment areas. 4. Finish: Powder coat orange. E. Backboard Safety Stop: 1. Products: a. Performance Sports Systems Model 1100 Posilock. (Basis-of-Design) b. Sports Specialties Model SS402-865 Lynrus Aut-O-Loc Safety Belt. 2. Designed to prevent free-fall of backstops due to cable, pulley, support fitting or winch failure. Any sudden surge of speed due to failure shall instantly lock the safety stop and hold the backstop in any position. Unit shall lock backstop before it travels 12 inches in a free-fall. 3. Provide 2 inch wide nylon belt with a 7:1 safety actor that can extend 38 feet. Attach belt to the backstop frame using a buckle connection. 4. Safety stop shall have an automatic spring-loaded reset and shall not require electricity in order to operate. The safety stop shall lock when a speed of 1.5 ft/s is reached in the belt. F. Backboard Hoist: 1. Products: a. Performance Sports Systems Model 1194 Electric Backstop Hoist. (Basis-of-Design) b. Sports Specialties Model SS402-742 Lynrus QR4000 Electric Winch. 2. Load Type: Vertical lifting, pulling on a slope or pulling horizontally. 3. Rope Type: 1/4 inch diameter 7 x 19 galvanized aircraft cable (7000 lb. breaking strength). 4. Rope Speed: 9 to 12 fpm. 5. Electrical: 110 volt, 60 cycle or 120 volt, 60 cycle as standard with manufacturer. 6. Motor: 3/4 to 1 HP, 13 to 14 A(full load amperage). Instant reversing, low maximum current draw design. 7. Duty Cycle: Standard: 10 minutes ON, 20 minutes OFF. 8. Gear Reduction: Self lubrication gearing with no oil bath. 9. Rope Drum: Grooved for accurate winding. Support on large diameter ball bearings with positive, through the drum rope anchoring. 10. Braking: Double, self-locking worm gearing plus passive uni-directional brake. 11. Limit switches: Heavy duty upper and lower limit switches, gear driven for high accuracy. Maximum travel of 45 feet. 12. Provide constant contact key controls keyed to Owner's locks. G. Backboard Cushion Edge: 1. Products: a. Performance Sports Systems Model PMCE Pro Mold Cushion Edge. (Basis-of-Design) b. Sports Specialties Model SS413-4XX E-Z Bolt Backboard Padding. 2. Double sided backboard padding fabricated from 2 inch thick urethane foam. Provide 36-inch long pads that allow for 15 inches to run up the side of the backboard. Each half to be symmetrical to allow the half sections to be used on both right and left sides of the backboard. 3. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 11 66 23 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 11 66 23 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 2.05 FLOOR-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT A. Volley Ball Nets and Posts: Two court systems of adjustable posts, net, and tensioning winch meeting all requirements for FIVB, USA Volleyball, NCAA and NFHS competition requirements. 1. Posts: 3-1/2 inch O.D. schedule 80 aluminum tube with infinite height adjustments between 73 and 100 inches. 2. Net: 4 inch square#36 nylon cord with vinyl coated polyester hem, double stitched around the perimeter. a. Top Hem Reinforcing: 2000 pound minimum break strength galvanized aircraft cable in nylon coating. b. Bottom Hem Reinforcing: 1/4 inch diameter braided nylon rope with spring loaded, pressure type rope tensioner. c. Size: Regulation size. 3. Tensioning Winch: Manual crank heavy duty, self-locking worm gear mechanism. 4. Antenna and boundary marker. 5. Protective Pads: Polyethylene foam covered with polyester reinforced vinyl fabric. a. Size: 72 inches high. b. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. 6. Products: a. Performance Sports Systems Model 6000 Scholastic Telescopic One-Court Volleyball System. (Basis-of-Design) b. Sports Specialties Model SSSEA100 One Court Elite Aluminum Volleyball; System. c. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Floor Sleeves for Volleyball Posts: Metal sleeve, with latch cover, cast into concrete subfloor to hold poles for nets and goals; installed flush with finish floor surface. 1. Products: a. Performance Sports Systems Model 6430 Low Profile Volleyball 3.5 inch Diameter Floor Sleeve. (Basis-of-Design) b. Sports Specialties Model SS408-727 Brass Floor Plate and Sleeve c. At second story applications, provide Performance Sports Systems Model 6401 Second Story Floor Sleeve Adapter with sleeve retainer to be bolted to the underside of the floor slab. 2. Latch Cover: Brass, round; swivel hinge; tamper resistant lock with key. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Performance Sports Systems Model 6430 Low Profile Volleyball Floor Cover Standard Size. 3. Sleeve: Steel. 4. Depth of Sleeve: 10 inches from floor surface to bottom, including latch cover. 2.06 WALL PADDING A. Wall Padding: Foam filling bonded to backing board, wrapped in covering; each panel fabricated in one piece. 1. Products: a. Performance Sports Systems Model 4110. (Basis-of-Design) b. Sports Specialties Model SSWZTBXFR Protectplus Wood Backed Wall Pad. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of 25 or less, smoke developed of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or NFPA 255 as a complete panel. 3. Covering: Vinyl-coated polyester fabric, mildew and rot resistant; stapled to back of board. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard range. b. Fabric Weight: 14 oz/sq yd. c. No manufacturer's logos permitted. 4. Foam: Open cell polychloroprene (Neoprene) 5.5 pcf nominal density. 5. Foam Thickness: 2 inches. 6. Backing Board: Oriented strand board. a. Thickness: 7/16 inch. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 11 66 23- 6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 11 66 23 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT b. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of 25 or less, smoke developed of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or NFPA 255. 7. Panel Dimensions: 24 inches wide by 72 inches long, including nailing margins. 8. Mounting: Removable; Z-clips fixed to wall and to padding. 9. Provide manufacturer's standard trim kits for electrical outlet cutouts. 2.07 SCOREBOARDS A. Basketball Scoreboards: 8 foot x 6 foot high, with 13 inch (clock/score) and 10 inch (other) LED lighted read-outs. Scoreboards shall each display period time to 59:59; home and guest scores to 199; period to 9; possession and bonus indicators; and fouls/score and player, foul/match optional displays. Scoreboards shall be provided with No. 3100 all-sport control console, shielded control cable,j-box, and horn. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Nevco Model 2710. 2. Location: Provide one in gym. 3. Submit for and receive approval of any substitution requests prior to bid. 2.08 SYSTEM CONTROL A. System Control: Keypad and relay box with wall-mounted keypad for operation of basketball backstops, divider curtain, and scoreboards. 1. Provide multi-function keys with illuminated 4-line, 20-character LCD display for easy readout. System shall operate on 110 volts with keypad communications at 24 volts. 2. System shall operate equipment individually and shall have custom program options for multiple equipment configurations to be determined in consultation with Owner. 3. System shall be expandable for operating additional equipment by adding relay boxes. 4. Provide emergency stop button at display location. 5. System shall be password controlled to prevent unauthorized use. Push button operation shall be constant contact. 6. Products: a. Performance Sports Systems TSC2000X Total System Control Keypad. (Basis-of-Design) b. Sports Specialties Model SS401-951 Basic Key Pad Gymnasium Controller. c. Submit and receive approval of any substitution requests prior to bid. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Take field measurements to ensure proper fitting of work. If taking field measurements before fabrication will delay work, allow for adjustments within recommended tolerances. B. Inspect areas and conditions before installation. Notify Architect in writing of unsatisfactory or detrimental conditions. Do not proceed until conditions have been corrected. Commencing installation constitutes acceptance of work site conditions. C. Verify that electrical services are correctly located and of the proper characteristics. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with contract documents and manufacturer's instructions. B. Coordinate installation of inserts and anchors that must be built in to flooring or subflooring. C. Install equipment rigid, straight, plumb, and level. D. Secure all equipment with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. E. Install wall padding securely, with edges tight to wall and without wrinkles in fabric covering. 1. Provide field cuts by trained installers as necessary for outlet and other elements protruding through pads. Install trim kits at all outlets. Finish all other field cuts by trimming cut edges with vinyl matching pad. F. Separate dissimilar metals to prevent electrolytic corrosion. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 11 66 23 - 7 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 11 66 23 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Verify proper placement of equipment. B. Verify proper placement of equipment anchors and sleeves. Use actual movable equipment to be anchored if available. C. Adjust operating equipment for proper operation; remove and replace equipment causing noise or vibration. Lubricate equipment if recommended by manufacturer. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove masking or protective covering from finished surfaces. B. Clean equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until Substantial Completion. B. Replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 11 66 23 - 8 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 12 21 13 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS SECTION 12 21 13 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Horizontal slat louver blinds. B. Operating hardware. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Concealed wood blocking for attachment of headrail brackets. B. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Substrate for attachment of blinds. C. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors: Substrate for attachment of blinds. D. Section 08 4313-Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Substrate for attachment of blinds. E. Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Frameless glass relites. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. WCMA A100.1 - Safety of Corded Window Covering Products; Window Covering Manufacturers Association. (ANSI/WCMA A101.1) 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Horizontal slat louver blinds installed at locations scheduled herein. Manual control of raising and lowering by cord. Manual adjustment of blade tilt angle by control wand. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, tolerances required, method of attachment, clearances, and operation. 1. Shop Drawings shall be based upon field-verified dimensions at each location and shown on a schedule submitted with the drawings. C. Samples: Submit two samples, minimum four inch long illustrating slat materials and finish, color, cord type and color. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. 1.06 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT: A. Submit maintenance and cleaning instructions under provisions of Section 01 78 00, including recommended cleaning materials. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1. Installer Qualifications: Installers familiar with manually-controlled products specified in this Section with minimum of three years documented experience. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate the work with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to support blinds. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Horizontal Louver Blinds: 1. Hunter Douglas: www.hunterdouglas.com. 2. Levolor Contract: www.levolorcontract.com. 3. Bali "Classics": www.swfcontract.com. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 12 21 13 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 12 21 13 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 4. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 BLINDS AND BLIND COMPONENTS A. Blinds: Horizontal slat louvers hung from full-width headrail with full-width bottom rail; manual control of raising and lowering by cord with full range locking; blade angle adjustable by control wand; complying with WCMA A100.1. B. Metal Slats: Spring tempered pre-finished aluminum; radiused slat corners, with manufacturing burrs removed. 1. Width: One inch. 2. Thickness: 0.008 inch. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors. C. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene cord, ladder configuration. D. Head Rail: Pre-finished, formed aluminum box, with end caps; internally fitted with hardware, pulleys, and bearings for operation; same depth as width of slats 1. Height: One inches. 2. Color: Same as slats. E. Bottom Rail: Pre-finished, formed steel with top side shaped to match slat curvature; with end caps. Color: Same as headrail. F. Lift Cord: Braided nylon; continuous loop. G. Control Wand: Extruded hollow plastic; hexagonal shape. 1. Length of window opening height less 3 inches. 2. Color: clear. H. Headrail Attachment: Wall brackets. I. Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Determine sizes by field measurement. B. Fabricate blinds to fit within openings with uniform edge clearance of 1/4 inch. C. At openings requiring multiple blind units, provide separate blind assemblies with space of 1/4 inch between blinds, located at window mullion centers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work. B. Ensure structural blocking and supports are correctly placed. C. Do not commence installation until field measurements are confirmed. Verify control wand location in each room/space to ensure it is easily accessible. Wands shall not be located behind built-in components. D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure in place with flush countersunk fasteners. C. Install intermediate head supports at spacing per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust blinds for smooth operation. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 12 21 13 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 12 21 13 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Provide blinds for all exterior storefront windows EXCEPT the following: 1. Gymnasium 166. 2. Library 114 B. Provide blinds for all interior windows EXCEPT the following: 1. Door vision glass. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 12 21 13 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES SECTION 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manually chain-operated window shade and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. FM P7825-Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; current edition. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, product descriptions, installation instructions, detail sheets, and specifications for each type system specified. B. Verification Samples: 6 x 6 inch sample of fabric. C. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions and interface with other products. Include the following: 1. Room schedule including field-verified dimensions of each window opening to receive window shade system. 2. Indicate system series, operator, fabric selection, and mounting type. 3. Indicate control type and mounting details. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than five years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of experience. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's original cartons. B. Inspect the materials upon delivery to assure that specified products have been received. C. Store and handle shades to prevent damage to fabrics, finishes, and operators prior to installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Draper: www.draperinc.com. 2. MechoShade Systems, Inc.: www.mechoshade.com. 3. Nysan: www.nysan.com. 4. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. B. Basis of Design: MechoShade Systems, Inc. 1. Mecho III "Slim Line"with no blackout side track. Provide chain pulley keeper at all locations. 2. Fabric: Thermoveil 1500 Series Basket Weave. 3. Openness: +/- 3 percent. 4. Material: 79 percent vinyl 21 percent polyester core. 5. Color: 1317 Straw. 6. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 7. Location of Use: Library 114 @ all lower exterior storefront windows. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Manually-Operated Shades. 1. All hardware shall be available with regular drive and offset drive and be reversible for left or right hand operation. Offset drive chain assembly shall place both operating chains at Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 12 24 13- 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 12 24 13 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES the same location at the shade cloth or to the rear of the shadecloth out of sight. Hardware shall be operable without blackout side rails. B. Shade Roller and Shadecloth Attachment: 1. Extruded aluminum shade roller tube of diameter and wall thickness required to support shade fabric without excessive deflection. Roller tubes less than 2.55 inches in diameter are not acceptable. a. Provide for positive mechanical engagement with drive/brake mechanism. b. Provide for positive mechanical attachment of shadeband without requiring use of adhesives, adhesive tape, staples or rivets. Two sided pressure sensitive adhesive tape is not acceptable, shade bands stapled to roller tube shall not be acceptable. c. Attach shadebands to tube such that removal and replacement of a shadeband can be accomplished without removing either the tube from the brackets or without removing shade brackets or the drive operator. Shadebands must be replaceable on site. 2.03 FABRICATION A. At windows, fabricate units to completely fill openings from head to sill and jamb to jamb unless specifically indicated otherwise. B. Fabricate shade cloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with heat sealed trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Fabricate unguided shade cloth to roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch in either direction per 8 feet of shade height due to warp distortion or weave design. Seams not permitted. C. Provide battens in standard shades as required to assure proper tracking and uniform rolling of the shade bands. Battens shall be roll formed stainless steel or tempered steel, as required. D. For railroaded shade bands, provide seams in railroaded multi-width shadebands as required to meet size requirements. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring the seams will be properly located. The contractor shall be responsible for furnishing battens in place of plain seams when the width, height or weight of the shade exceeds manufacturer's specifications. In absence of such specifications, contractor shall be responsible for assuring proper use of seams or battens as required to assure the proper tracking of the railroaded multi-width shadebands. 1. Provide battens for railroaded shades when width to height ratios meet or exceed manufacturer's standards. Assure proper tracking and rolling of shadebands. 2.04 FINISHES A. Aluminum Components: PPG Duracron baked enamel in standard colors; idler rollers shall be covered with shadecloth fabric. B. Steel Components: Cadmium-plated, satin finished, or bonderized prior to painting with baked enamel finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate is ready to receive mounting hardware for shades. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Assume responsibility for all field dimensions and mounting surfaces. 2. Adjust window shade systems for proper operation. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 12 24 13-2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 12 24 14 MOTORIZED WINDOW SHADES SECTION 12 24 14 MOTORIZED WINDOW SHADES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrically operated interior roller-screen window and skylight shades with accessories. System shall be hardwired with group switching for each set of shades. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets, specifications, performance data, physical properties and installation instructions for each item required. 1. Provide additional information for fabric including size limitations, fire resistance information. 2. Identify available shade cloth colors and materials. 3. Include manufacturer's proposed warranty defining all terms, conditions and time periods for warranty coverage. B. Shop Drawings: 1/4 inch scale drawings, including actual measurements taken at the project site where practical. Include complete fabrication details and erections drawings. C. Selection Samples: 3 by 5 inch shade cloth and liner sample swatches indicating manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns available for initial selection. D. Verification Samples: One fully operational window shade sample, 24 by 24 inches complete with selected shade cloth and accessories mounted to specified roller mechanism. E. Wiring Diagrams and Schematics for Electrically Operated Units: Submit detailed wiring diagrams and schematics of the entire system, and each component of the system with a detailed list of the components, wiring schematics and operational characteristics for every level of operation. F. Warranty: Provide sample copies of manufacturer's actual warranties for all materials to be furnished under this Section, clearly defining all terms, conditions, and time periods for the coverage thereof. G. Maintenance Data: Provide recommended cleaning methods, stain removal methods and cleaning materials. H. Certificate of Compliance: Submit manufacturer's notarized certificate of compliance indicating compliance with requirements of specifications including statement that specified warranty will be provided without restriction. Manufacturer shall certify that materials proposed for use comply with applicable building code and environmental regulations. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide shade material tested in accordance with NFPA 701 -Vertical Burn Test. B. Wiring: Wire electrical control equipment in accordance with the window shade manufacturer's wiring diagrams, the National Electrical Code, and applicable local codes. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Obtain products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years documented experience demonstrating previously successful work of the type specified herein, and approved by window shade manufacturer. C. Take field measurements before preparation of shop drawings and fabrication where possible to ensure proper fitting of window shade system. Allow for adjustments within specified tolerances whenever taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay required installation schedules. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 12 24 14 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 12 24 14 MOTORIZED WINDOW SHADES 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver shades to the project until all concrete, masonry, plaster and other wet work has been completed and is dry. B. Deliver prefabricated shades to site in labeled protective packages, uniquely identified for each intended location. Schedule delivery to prevent delays but minimize on-site storage. C. Store materials in manner recommended by shade manufacturer inside, under cover and in manner to keep shades dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion and damage from construction traffic and other causes. D. Maintain ambient temperature between 60 and 85 degrees Fahrenheit and a relative humidity between 20 and 50 percent for a period starting 24 hours before installation of window shades and maintain until Owner's Final Acceptance. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Manual Operating Components: Provide warranty containing provisions that installation shall remain operational without fault for the warranty period and include all operating parts, except for the bead chain which is not covered by the warranty and is deemed a maintenance/service item. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion B. Motor and Electrical Components: Provide warranty containing provisions that installation shall remain operational without fault for the warranty period including coverage of motor, electrical controls and override circuits. 1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion C. Shadecloth: Warranty shall contain provisions that the shade cloth will not deteriorate, sag or warp and will not be unfit for the use intended for the warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: MechoShade Systems, Inc. B. Other Available Manufacturers: 1. Draper: www.draperinc.com. 2. Nysan: www.nysan.com. 3. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 SHADECLOTH MATERIALS A. Vinyl Blackout Material: 0700 Series Class Vinyl "Thermoveil." B. Fabric: Thermoveil 1500 Series Basket Weave. 1. Openness: +/- 3 percent. 2. Material: 79 percent vinyl 21 percent polyester core. 3. Color: 1317 Straw. C. Size: As indicated on Drawings. D. Location of Use: Where indicated on Drawings. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. General: All hardware shall be available with regular drive and offset drive and be reversible for left or right hand operation. Offset drive chain assembly shall place both operating chains at the same location at the shade cloth or to the rear of the shadecloth out of sight. Hardware shall be operable with or without black-out side channels. B. Motorized Shade Hardware and Shade Brackets: 1. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8 inch thick plated steel or thicker as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 12 24 14 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 12 24 14 MOTORIZED WINDOW SHADES 2. Provide shade hardware system that allows for removal of shade roller tube from brackets without removing hardware from opening or without requiring end or center support brackets to be removed. 3. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade bands without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets. 4. Provide shade hardware system that allows for field adjustment of motor or replacement of any operable hardware component without requiring removal of brackets regardless of mounting position. 5. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shadebands offset by a maximum of 45 degrees from the motor axis between shadebands, 22.5 degrees on each side of the radial line, by a single motor(multi-banded shades)subject to manufacturer's design criteria. 6. Provide positive mechanical engagement of drive mechanism to shade roller tube. Friction fit connections for drive mechanism to shade roller tube shall not be acceptable. 7. Use only Delrin engineered plastics by DuPont for all plastic components of shade hardware. Styrene based plastics are not acceptable. Polyester or reinforced polyester shall not be acceptable. C. Shade Roller and Shadecloth Attachment: 1. Use extruded aluminum shade roller tube of diameter and wall thickness required to support shade fabric without (excessive) deflection. Roller tubes less than 2.55 inch in diameter are not acceptable. 2. Provide for positive mechanical engagement with drive/brake mechanism. 3. Provide for positive mechanical attachment of shadeband without requiring use of adhesives, adhesive tape, staples or rivets. Two sided pressure sensitive adhesive tape is not acceptable, shade bands stapled to roller tube shall not be acceptable. 4. Attach shadebands to tube such that removal and replacement of a shadeband can be accomplished without removing either the tube from the brackets or without removing shade brackets or the drive operator. Shadebands must be replaceable on site. D. Shade Motot Drive System 1. Quiet Intelligent Motor System Performance Requirements: Specifications and design are based on the WhisperShadeTM IQa Motor System as manufactured by MechoShade Systems, Inc. Other systems may be acceptable providing all of the following performance capabilities are provided. Motor control systems not in complete compliance with these performance criteria shall not be accepted as equal systems. a. Precise shade positioning b. Shade control supports (5) repeatable and precise alignment positions including (3) default intermediate stopping positions (presets) in addition to upper and lower limits. c. Intermediate stopping positions are customizable electronically using occupant wall switch controls for convenience and flexibility. d. Two inherent methods of shade position control: 1) Low voltage hardwired dry-contact for low voltage dry contact switch or 3rd party shade operation. 2) Expandable option to full 2-way serial communication control. e. Configurable option enables the occupant to either stop the shade in any position between the upper and lower limits ("Normal Mode"), or to only stop the shade at the (5) alignment positions ("Uniform Mode") in order to manage the uniformity of the window wall. f. Multi-level group control: 1) Dry Contact control (a) Supports independent, group or master control (b) Supports up to (5) motors connect to the same switch controlled group g. Upgradable: Motors shall provide for the opportunity to expand and enhance its control capability and functionality'vthout requiring a change in motors. 2. Shade Motors a. Ultra-quiet 46 dBA operation within 3 feet open air from the motor Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 12 24 14 - 3 Pnnted 2/22/2013 SECTION 12 24 14 MOTORIZED WINDOW SHADES b. Tubular, asynchronous (non-synchronous) motors are concealed within the window covering assembly inside the shade roller tube or head rail c. Operates at 110 VAC, 60 Hz (230 VAC, 50 Hz); single phase; d. Includes built-in reversible capacitor, temperature class A, thermally protected, totally enclosed and maintenance free e. Available in various torques ranging from 53 in-lb (6Nm) to 352 in-lb (40Nm). f. Maximum current draw for each shade motor is dependent upon torque which ranges from 0.9 amps (53 in-lb)to 1.8 amps (352 in-lb) @ 120 VAC or respectively 0.45 amps to 0.9 amps @ 230 VAC. g. Equipped with line voltage, 3-conductor wiring cable possessing locking disconnect plug or NEMA 5-15P connector for bringing power to the motor 1) Supports the daisy-chain of power from motor-to-motor to the extent permissible by local and national codes for the capacity of the branch circuit h. Motor assembly meets agency approvals for the North American markets covering the motor tip-to-tip including UL1004 for motor construction and performance, UL2111 for thermal overload protection and as part of a "listed" system solution to UL325 for application within window and drapery applications. i. Use motors rated at the same nominal speed for all shades in the same room j. Total hanging weight of shade band shall not exceed 80 percent of the rated lifting capacity of the shade motor and tube assembly k. For roller shade applications supports reduced light gaps with the bracket assemblies including 3/4" drive, 7/16" idle & 7/16" center support or symmetrical 3/4"for all I. Includes built-in encoder to support precise and repeatable alignment m. Includes built-in microprocessor-based controller eliminating the need for external controllers 1) Includes 10-year power failure memory 2) Includes dry contact inputs for shade position control from cost effective, passive low voltage wall switches and also from third party equipment equipped with dry contact control capability without the need for external interface equipment 3) Supports precise and repeatable positioning of the motor to +/- 1/16" 4) Supports from a dry contact, passive low voltage wall switch (occupant's wall switch) or third party equipment: (a) Momentary wall switch button press shade positioning to any point between the upper and lower limits (b) Maintained wall switch button press shade positioning to any point between the upper and lower limits (c) Maintained wall switch button press shade positioning at low speed motor operation for refining shade position (d) "One-touch" (single, momentary wall switch button press)shade positioning to five (5)alignment points including the upper limit, lower limit and three (3) intermediate stopping points (presets) (e) Intermediate stopping points shall default to 25%, 50% and 75% of full shade travel between the upper and lower limits (f) Intermediate stopping points shall be configurable to any position between the limits and in any order (g) Configures the shade positioning mode: (h) Normal Mode: enables the occupant to operate the shade to any position between the upper and lower limits (i) Uniform Mode: enables the occupant to operate the shade only to the five (5)alignment points including the upper limit, lower limit and the three (3) intermediate stopping points 5) Provides feedback of motor position, motor status and motor configuration to external passive accessories (ie. wall switches), intelligent microprocessor-based network accessories (ie. intelligent wall switches, network accessory cards, etc.)and third party equipment Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 12 24 14 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 12 24 14 MOTORIZED WINDOW SHADES 6) Supports future enhancements via flash firmware upgradability without removing the motor from its installation 7) Supports optional connection to serial integration interfaces for third party equipment supporting integration by RS232 or Ethernet to various subsystems including but not limited to audio visual, lighting or BMS/BAS systems n. Low voltage cable with RJ45 connector supports connection to low voltage accessories (i.e. Wall switches) and to various external accessory interfaces o. Motor assembly meets agency approvals for the North American markets covering the motor tip-to-tip including UL1004 for motor construction and performance, UL2111 for thermal overload protection and as part of a "listed" system solution to UL325 for application within window and drapery applications 3. Wall Switches a. IQ Local Switch 1) Economical, dry contact, passive, low voltage wall switches 2) Fits industry standard multi-gang junction boxes 3) Fits industry standard multi-gang wall plates 4) Available in standard white color. Other custom colors available upon request 5) RJ45 input enables direct connection to the low voltage RJ45 connection available from the IQ Motor 6) Provides occupant shade positioning control up to five (5) repeatable and precise alignment positions including three (3) default intermediate stopping positions (presets) in addition to the upper and lower limits 7) Passive Low Voltage Switch Variations: (a) 5-Button Single Station (Single Zone) Switch. Shade Type 2. (b) Provides "one-touch"access to all five (5)alignment points on the IQ Motor (c) Provides access to customizing limits and intermediate stopping points (presets) (d) Provides access to configuring mode settings in the IQ Motor (e) Typically applied for solar shade control where the shade position is traditionally optimized to balance comfort and view. (f) Integrate with third party touch screen activated control system. Shade Type 3. E. Regular Roll Fascia: 1. Continuous removable extruded aluminum fascia that attaches to shade mounting brackets without the use of adhesives, magnetic strips or exposed fasteners. 2. Fascia shall be continuous across two or more shadebands in one piece. 3. Fully conceal brackets, shade roller and fabric on the tube. 4. Chain drive shall fall behind the bottom return edge of the fascia without requiring notching of the fascia. 5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. F. Side and Center Channels: Extruded aluminum guides. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate units to completely fill openings from head to sill and jamb to jamb unless specifically indicated otherwise. B. Fabricate shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with heat sealed trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Fabricate unguided shade cloth to roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch in either direction per 8 feet of shade height due to warp distortion or weave design. C. Provide battens in standard shades as required to assure proper tracking and uniform rolling of the shade bands. Assure the width to height ratios shall not exceed manufacturer's standards, or in absence of such standards, shall be responsible for establishing appropriate standards to assure proper tracking and rolling of the shade cloth within specified standards. Battens shall be roll formed stainless steel or tempered steel, as required. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 12 24 14 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 12 24 14 MOTORIZED WINDOW SHADES D. For railroaded shade bands, provide seams in railroaded multi-width shadebands as required to meet size requirements. Furnish battens in place of plain seams when the width, height or weight of the shade exceeds manufacturer's specifications. In absence of such specifications, assure proper use of seams or battens as required to assure the proper tracking of the railroaded multi-width shadebands. 1. Provide battens for railroaded shades when width to height ratios meet or exceed manufacturer's standards. Assure Proper tracking and rolling of shadebands. E. Blackout shadebands, when used in side channels, have horizontally mounted, roll-formed stainless steel or tempered steel battens not more than 3 feet on center extending fully into the side channels. Battens shall be concealed in a self colored fabric to match with the inside and outside colors of the shadeband. 1. Battens: Battens shall be roll formed of stainless steel or tempered steel and concave to match the contour of the roller tube. 2. Batten pockets shall be self-colored fabric front and back RF welded into the shadecloth. A self-color opaque liner shall be provided front and back to eliminate any see through of the battens pocket that shall be exceed 1-1/2 inches high and be totally opaque. A see-through moire effect which occurs with multiple layers of transparent fabrics shall not be acceptable. 2.05 FINISHES A. Aluminum Components: PPG Duracron baked enamel in standard colors; idler rollers shall be covered with shadecloth fabric. B. Steel Components: Cadmium-plated, satin finished, or bonderized prior to painting with baked enamel finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate and conditions for installation. Notify Architect in writing prior to installation when the project conditions are unacceptable for shade installation. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate and project conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units to comply with the manufacturer's instructions for the type of mounting and operation required. Provide units plumb, true and securely anchored in place with recommended hardware and accessories to provide smooth operation without binding. B. Install units within the following tolerances: 1. Maximum variation of gap at window opening perimeter shall be 1/4-inch per 8 feet of shade height. 2. Maximum offset from level: 1/8-inch. 3. Follow manufacturer's edge clearance specifications for shades where the width to height ratio exceeds 1 to 3. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust units for smooth operation. Adjust shade and shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Replace any units or components which do not hang properly or operate smoothly. 3.04 CLEANING A. Touch up damaged finishes and repair minor damage in order to eliminate evidence of repair. Remove and replace work that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. B. Clean exposed surfaces, including metal and shadecloth, using non abrasive materials and methods recommended by the Shadecloth Manufacturer. Remove and replace work which cannot be satisfactorily cleaned. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 12 24 14 - 6 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 12 24 14 MOTORIZED WINDOW SHADES 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate operation method and instruct Owner's Personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the window shade system. 3.06 SCHEDULE A. Provide Motorized Blinds at high windows in the following locations: 1. Gymnasium 166; north wall 2. Library 114: north wall B. Provide Motorized Blinds at skylights in the following locations: 1. Commons 150 2. Gymnasium 166 END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 12 24 14 - 7 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 12 48 13 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES SECTION 12 48 13 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Walk-off mats. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data indicating properties of walk-off surface, component dimensions. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions. C. Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating pattern, color, finish, edging . D. Maintenance Data: Include cleaning instructions, stain removal procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Walk-Off Mats: 1. Connexus Floor Matting, Mats Inc: www.matsinc.com. 2. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 MATS A. Walk-Off Mat WM-1: 100 percent Asota solution-dyed UV stabilized polypropylene fibers backed with ExoDi composite rubber backing. 1. Product: Super Nop 52 supplied by Connexus: www.connexusflooring.com. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard tapered vinyl moldings with flanges sewn to back of mat on all four sides with mitered corners. 3. Roll Size: 158 inches by 1220 inches. 4. Pile Height: 3/8 inch. 5. Total Height: 1/2 inch. 6. Pile Weight: 52 oz/sq yd. 7. Total Weight: 93 oz/sq yd. 8. Color(s): As indicated in Section 09 00 01 - Finish Legend. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate mats in single unit sizes without intermediate seams. Provide edging all exposed edges. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Field verify size of area for each mat. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 12 48 13 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 12 66 13 TELESCOPING BLEACHERS SECTION 12 66 13 TELESCOPING BLEACHERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Telescoping bleachers. B. Electric motor operators, controls, and internal wiring. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 64 66 -Wood Athletic Flooring: Coordination of placement of blocking below wood flooring. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 102 - Standard for Grandstands, Folding and Telescopic Seating, Tents, and Membrane Structures; National Fire Protection Association. B. PS 1 -Structural Plywood. C. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society. D. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel;American Welding Society. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage handling and requirements. 3. Installation methods. B. Shop Drawings: Complete layout with dimensions, seat heights, row spacing and rise, aisle widths and locations, points of connection to substrate, assembly dimensions, and material types and finishes. 1. Provide drawings customized to this project. 2. Provide dimensioned drawings locating all bleacher section wheel trucks for use by Section 09 64 66 to provide solid blocking under wood athletic flooring. 3. Include Professional Engineer certification. 4. Wiring Diagrams: Show locations of motors, electrical wiring, and rough-in connections. 5. Graphics Layout Drawings: Indicate pattern of contrasting seat colors. C. Selection Samples: For each material for which color selection is required, submit samples, 2 by 2 inches in size, illustrating colors and finishes available. D. Verification Samples: For each custom colored finish, submit samples of actual finish or product, for verification of color selection. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions, including annual inspection and maintenance and bi-annual inspection by a Professional Engineer or manufacturer factory service personnel. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than thirty years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's installation crew. C. Welder Qualifications: Certified by AWS for the process employed. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store, in original packaging, under cover and elevated above grade. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 12 66 13 - 1 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 12 66 13 TELESCOPING BLEACHERS 1.07 WARRANTY A. Submit waranty to Owner as part of project closeout. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. Replace parts that fail under normal use at no extra charge to Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Telescoping Bleachers: 1. Interkal LLC : www.interkal.com. (Basis-of-Design) 2. Irwin Telescopic Seating Company: www.irwintelescopicseating.com. 3. Hussey Seating Company: www.husseyseating.com. 4. Sheridan Seating Co: www.sheridanseating.com. 5. Substitutions: Submit for and receive approval prior to bidding. 2.02 MATERIAL, GENERAL A. Recycled Content of Medium-Density Fiberboard and Particleboard: Provide products with an average recycled content so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 20 percent. B. Formaldehyde Free Panel Products: Provide fiberboard, particleboard and plywood products made with binders and adhesives containing no added urea formaldehyde 2.03 TELESCOPING BLEACHERS A. Telescoping Bleachers: Factory assembled tiered benches that retract horizontally into depth approximately the same as a single row depth, with fixed seats mounted on leading edge of platforms. 1. Design to comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 102 and requirements of code authorities having jurisdiction; where conflicts between requirements occur, comply with whichever is more stringent. 2. First moving row shall be secured with friction or mechanical locks. Other rows shall be mechanically locked, operable only upon unlocking and cycling the first row. 3. Each bleacher row shall be comprised of risers, seat and deck components, and a complete set of supportive columns and braces. 4. Design with solid fascia (riser)or seat fronts that conceal interior mechanisms when fully retracted, fitting tightly enough to prevent climbing up face; at front row provide key locked, hinged fascia (skirt)to cover gap between seat riser/fascia and floor. 5. Operation: Furnish friction drive power system incorporating two friction drive assemblies each with two 6-inch by 2-1/2 inch cast drive wheels. The drive system shall power all moveable rows of the bleacher system including row one. Power shall be provided by a 1/2 HP 208V, 3-phase motor providing simultaneous power to all drive wheels. Power system shall be UL recognized. 6. Operation: Motor operated. B. Design Loads: Design to withstand the following loading conditions: 1. Live Load on Structural Supports: 100 psf, minimum, of gross horizontal projection. 2. Live Load on Seats and Walking Surfaces: 120 pounds per linear foot. 3. Lateral Sway Stress on Structural Supports: 24 pounds per linear foot of seat plank. 4. Perpendicular Sway Stress on Structural Supports: 10 pounds per linear foot of seat plank. C. Dimensions: 1. Wall attached forward fold. 2. Rows: 12. 3. Rise Per Row: 10.25 inches. 4. Row Depth: 26 inches. 5. Seat Height Above Tread: 6 inches. 6. Extended Dimension: 25'-4 3/4". Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 12 66 13 - 2 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 12 66 13 TELESCOPING BLEACHERS 7. Closed Dimension: 3'- 8 3/4" 8. Bank Length: As indicated on Drawings. D. Structural Supports: Steel or aluminum; manufacturer's standard wheeled carriages supporting each tier separately, with moving parts permanently lubricated and metal parts cushioned to prevent metal-to-metal contact during operation. 1. Design so that each row carriage so that it will individually support the design loads and is self-supporting when fully assembled without dependence on platform panels or boards, seats, or fascia. 2. Welding: In accordance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3. 3. Bolting: Use lock-washers or locknuts. 4. Wheels: Minimum 3-1/2 inch diameter by 1-1/8 inch wide, with non-marring soft rubber faces with rounded edges designed to protect wood or synthetic floor. Provide 1/2 inch diameter axle for all wheels. 5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel or powder coating. 6. Row Locking: Automatically mechanically lock each carriage to adjacent carriages when fully extended. 7. Unlocking : Automatically unlock all rows before engaging retraction mechanism. E. Motor Operation: Manufacturer's standard drive mechanism, using motor adequately sized for the purpose. 1. All electrical components and wiring UL listed. 2. Controls: Start, Stop, Forward, and Reverse in a single control unit. 3. Control Station: Removable plug-in low-voltage pendant station, with first-row plug-in location for each motor. 4. Provide all wiring internal to bleacher units, to junction box located where indicated; ensure that wiring is not energized except during operation. 5. Electrical Characteristics: 208/230V, 5 wire, 3-phase, 60 Hz. 6. Provide access to motor from front side of bleachers; a hinged front skirt or hinged section at least 30 inches wide is acceptable. 2.04 SEAT AND PLATFORM COMPONENTS A. Seats: 18 inch wide one-piece individual seating modules constructed of high-density polyethylene. Provide 10 inch deep seats. 1. Each module shall have two longitudinal and five transverse internal ribs to provide additional structural integrity and resistance to impact. 2. Provide full 1/2 inch interlock of each module to the adjacent module both around the perimeter and along the internal ribs to eliminate pinching hazards and provide proper alignment. Provide a steel-to-steel attachment of each module to a minimum 14 gage galvanized steel nosebeam. Provide concealed mounting hardware. 3. Provide end caps at the ends of each bank of seating as well as at each aisle. 4. Provide a recessed area for seat numbering for each module. 5. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. Coordinate color selections and placement with Architect. 6. Colors: Arrange seating modules using selected colors to form capital letters "WCHS"on the face of the closed bleacher. B. Platform, Tread, and Step Structure: Plywood continuously supported on front and rear with side joints tongue-and-grooved. 1. Plywood: PS 1, 5-ply southern pine or polyethylene-overlaid Douglas fir or southern pine, Grade A-C. 2. Plywood Thickness: 5/8 inch, minimum. 3. Front (Nose), Rear, and Intermediate Supports: Steel channel or tube, hot-dipped galvanized. 4. Provide end caps of same material and finish on each exposed end. 2.05 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS A. Provide the following railings: Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 12 66 13 - 3 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 12 66 13 TELESCOPING BLEACHERS 1. Aisle Handrails: Single post folding railing segment mounted in center of aisle at every other row beginning at row 1. 2. End of Row Guardrails: Self-storing, at open ends of sections beginning at row 2. 3. Top Row Rear Guardrail: Non-removable self-storing, mounted behind rear seat with tubular supports, running full width of section. 4. Height: 42 inches above adjacent platform or tread. 5. Provide vertical intermediate members in all guardrails spaced to meet code requirements. B. Design handrails and railings to withstand the following loads: 1. Concentrated Load on Handrails: 200 pounds in any direction. 2. Concentrated Load on Guardrails: 200 pounds in any direction along top rail. 3. Live Load on Handrails: 50 pounds per linear foot, applied in any direction. 4. Live Load on Guardrails: a. Horizontal: 50 pounds per linear foot, applied at the guardrail height. b. Vertical: 100 pounds per linear foot, applied vertically to top of guardrail. C. Railing Construction: Round steel or aluminum pipe or tube, with formed elbows at corners and caps at ends of straight runs. 1. Aluminum: 1.66 inches minimum outside diameter; black powder coat finish. 2. Steel: 1-1/2 inch minimum outside diameter, with 11 gage minimum wall thickness; black powder coat finish. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Foot Level Aisles: Provide footrest level aisles at locations and sizes shown on drawings and shop drawings. B. Intermediate Steps: Manufacturer's standard intermediate step as necessary in accordance with applicable code. C. Wheelchair Seating: 1. Notchouts: Provide manufacturer's standard permanent handicap notchouts (36-1/4 inches wide) located as required to comply with code requirements and as shown on Shop Drawings. Fascia panels shall have manufacturer's standard polydeck finish to match deck board surface. Notchouts to be 1 row deep. 2. Recoverable Notchouts: Provide manufacturer's standard recoverable handicap notchouts (36-1/4 inches wide) located as shown on Drawings. Notchouts to be 1 row deep. Operation of the notch-out from either mode shall be accomplished by activating a single pull rod located in the front kickboard. The locking linkage shall engage a continuous locking angle and lock the notch-out in either recovered or handicap mode. Recoverable seating utilizing cables or any requirement for tools to change modes will not be acceptable. D. Operation Controller(pendant switch): Extension and retraction shall be accomplished by use of the pendant control plugged into a single receptacle. Mount the receptacle behind the first row kickboard. E. Vinyl Curtain: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl end curtains to close off under the bleacher units in the extended position. 1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors. F. Fasteners: Provide hardware and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. G. Anchorage: As indicated on drawings; provide hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.07 FABRICATION A. Continuous Wheel Channel: Wheel channels shall consist of a one piece formed steel channel welded to the base of a vertical column. Wheel channels accommodate 8 to 12 wheels per row for maximum weight distribution and operating ease. The number of wheels increases as the number of rows increase. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 12 66 13 -4 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 12 66 13 TELESCOPING BLEACHERS B. Columns: Electrically welded closed rectangular steel tube, 2 inch x 3 inch minimum size, fitted with a rear welded gusset at the wheel channel. C. Row Interlocks: 1. Join each row structure front to rear by means of two (2) interacting steel connections, plus automatic gravity row locks where engineering determines they are required. 2. Lower track guides shall be an external superslide rod to guarantee positive engagement of vertical supports without binding and assures smooth operation over uneven floor conditions. Superslide shall be mounted to the side of the wheel channels to limit the possibility of damage. 3. Upper track guides shall completely interlock adjacent understructure support. A welded stop to ensure correct extension of bleacher unit on deck support. Use of bolt and nut stops is not acceptable, due to risk of loosening. D. Diagonal Braces: Structural formed steel truss fitted to rows 4 and beyond. Bracing shall be attached to the rear riser at optimum locations to insure structural integrity. Bracing shall be designed and shaped to support a minimum load of 1000 lbs. of both compression and tension forces created when the bleacher is loaded. E. Deck Supports: Shall be of structural steel, 11 gage spaced not greater than 60 inch on center for maximum deck stiffness. Every deck support not attached to a vertical post shall have an integral nylon roller to avoid steel to steel friction points for more efficient operation. F. Decking: All deck boards shall consist of 19/32 inch nominal Douglas Fir C-C grade plywood with exterior glue and solid cross bands. An extruded aluminum "H" connector shall be placed between plywood panels. 1. Finish of Exposed Wear Surface: High density polyethylene plastic 0.025 to 0.030 inch thick. 2. Color: Light gray. 3. Deck finishes, such as clear coat, requiring more than simple touch up to restore it to a new appearance after wear occurs are unacceptable. G. Welds: All welds shall be made at the factory by welders that are qualified in accordance with AWS D1.3 for the equipment and process used. H. Nose Beam: One-piece 13-gage galvanized steel. 13-gage steel is utilized for the necessary structural integrity to accommodate section lengths up to 26 feet. I. Rear Riser: One piece formed 14-gage, grade 40, galvanized steel, with a continuous access joint to fully encapsulate footrest panel for ease of cleaning and additional structural support. Provide 14-gage roll fore 9d steel for the necessary structural integrity to accommodate section lengths up to 26 feet. J. Splice Plates: Tie together each section with two structural steel members per row, employing a minimum of four steel to steel through bolt connections at the nose beam and a minimum of eight steel to steel through bolt connections at the lower steel rear riser. Gage of splice plates to match the gage of the nose beam and rear riser. Splice plates employing steel to plywood deck board attachments will not be acceptable. In order to minimize deflections and keep rows in alignment during operation, splice connections shall transfer both axial loads (tension/compression) and bending. K. Fasteners: All structural connections shall be made with S.A.E. grade 5 or better stress rated bolts. The use of self-tapping bolts is not acceptable. L. Platform Finish: Steel understructure abraded, cleaned and finished with russet brown water base acrylic paint. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are consistent with those on the shop drawings. B. Verify that electrical rough-ins have been installed and are accessible. Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 12 66 13 - 5 Printed 2/22/2013 SECTION 12 66 13 TELESCOPING BLEACHERS C. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared and area has been cleared of obstructions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not field cut or alter seats, fascia, or structural members without approval. C. Provide manufacturer's field representative to inspect completed installation. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Lubricate, test, and adjust each moving assembly to ensure proper operation in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean exposed and semi-exposed assembly surfaces. B. Touch up finishes on damaged or soiled areas. 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstration and Training: Provide manufacturer's field representative to demonstrate to and train Owner's operating personnel in proper operation of equipment. 1. Location: On site using installed equipment. 2. Time: As agreed between Owner and Contractor. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Project No.11015 Westside Christian High School FEB 2013 Addition/Remodel 12 66 13 - 6 Printed 2/22/2013